Social Psychology homework help

Social Psychology homework help

925 North Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92701

www.calcoast.edu Phone: 714-547-9625 Fax: 714-547-5777

12/14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Tracking Your Academic Activities Verifying an accurate course completion time is essential for accreditation. To meet both accreditation requirements and award academic credit, educational institutions must document the total number of hours students spend completing designated academic activities related to their coursework.

The total hours are then translated into academic credit based on a prescribed method of measuring educational attainment known as the Carnegie Unit. 90 hours of student preparation time and 45 hours of student engagement time are required for a 3 credit hour course.

Using the attached form as an example, keep track of the time you spend on each lesson, pre-test, self-test, unit test, writing assignment, reading assignment, outside reading, final examination, etc. You will not be required to turn in the worksheet; however, at the end of the course you will receive a Student Course Survey and the final question will ask how long it took you to complete the course. Your assistance in completing this requirement and providing the university with this valuable data is greatly appreciated.

As you fill out the worksheet, please keep in mind that your Academic Engagement Activities should total approximately 45 hours. Some examples of this type of activity may include:

Lesson Review Exercises

Key Term Reviews

Analysis

Study Guide Review

Writing Assignments

Review Grading Rubric

Unit Examinations

Proctored Final Examination

Course Academic Online Discussions

Student/Instructor Interaction

Documents/Student Resources

As you fill out the Academic Preparation Activities, please keep in mind that these should total approximately 90 hours. Some samples of this type of activity may include:

Pre-Test

Reading Assignments

Key Term Reviews

Studying for Examinations

Writing Assignments

Review Grading Rubric

Study Lesson Review Exercises

Internet/Web Research

Reading Websites

Suggested Outside Reading

Sample Worksheet for Tracking Your Academic Activities

Upon completion of this course, you will be asked to complete a survey. The last question on the survey will ask you the number of hours it took to complete the course. The total hours are then translated into academic credit based on a prescribed method of measuring educational attainment known as the Carnegie Unit. 90 hours of student preparation time and 45 hours of student engagement time (135 hours) are required for a 3 credit hour course.

This worksheet was developed as a tool to help track your time. You are not required to turn it in.

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Totals

Academic Engagement Activities Lesson Review Exercises Key Term Review Exercises Study Guide Review Documents/Student Resources Writing Assignments Review Grading Rubric Unit Examinations Proctored Final Examination Case Studies/Critical Analysis Course Academic Online Discussions Student/Instructor Interactions

Total Academic Engagement required for a 3 unit course = 45 hours

Academic Preparation Activities Pre-Test Reading Assignments Analyze Case Studies/Critical Analysis Key Term Review Exercises Study for Examinations Suggested Outside Readings Web Research Writing Assignments Review Grading Rubric Reading Websites Study Lesson Review Exercises

Total Academic Preparation required for a 3 unit course = 90 hours

Grand total of hours of various learning activities in completing this course

Pre-test Instructions

Thank you for taking the time to complete the required pre-test. The purpose of the pre-test is to measure your knowledge of the subject matter at the beginning of each course.

Please be assured, your score on the pre-test will not be part of your course grade. We do not want you to try to study for it or be worried about doing well on the pre-test. It is simply a measure of your “starting place,” that will be used for improving course content and to meet accreditation requirements.

If you receive your course materials online: • Please log-in to your Coast Connection student portal to complete your pre-test.

If you receive your course materials by mail: • You will receive your answer sheets for the pre-test by mail. • Once you have completed your pre-test, please mail or fax your answer sheet to the University at:

California Coast University 925 N. Spurgeon Street Santa Ana, CA 92701 Fax: 714-547-1451

If you have any questions, please feel free to contact the Student Services Department. Thank you for your cooperation.

Pre-test

ix

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

Which early sociologist emphasized the role of society in the development of the self? 1.

George Herbert Meada. Karl Marxb. Georg Simmerc. Herbert Blumer d.

____________ is the study of the effects of society on social-psychological processes, also 2. known as sociological social psychology.

sociologya. microsociologyb. macrosociologyc. psychology d.

Which of the following is considered a major dimension of group processes? 3.

legitimacya. justiceb. powerc. All of the above. d.

Perspective within symbolic interactionism that focuses on the quantitative study of social 4. interaction processes because of the stable nature of social life.

Chicago Schoola. Indiana Schoolb. Iowa Schoolc. both b and c d.

The research technique called “autoethnograpy” is associated with which social psychological 5. perspective?

symbolic interactiona. social structure and personalityb. group processesc. structural functionalism d.

Participants of an experiment that are not exposed to the independent variable. 6.

control groupa. convenience sampleb. focus groupc. experimental groupd.

Pre-test

x

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment is based on a study that began in ____________ 7. that was primarily led by ____________.

1957; Sewella. 1962; Nielsonb. 1965; Granovetterc. 1973; Kohn d.

According to research by Lucas and others, how can individuals with lower cultural status best 8. gain status in groups?

Give that person legitimate authority to lead the group.a. The person should focus on the success of the group, rather then her own interests.b. The person should provide a “kick back” to others in a group to get their leadership c. position. both a and b d.

Research in the 1960s showed a considerable overlap in ___________ and ___________ 9. occupations.

fathers’; sons’a. fathers’; daughters’b. mothers’; daughters’c. mothers’; sons’ d.

How did Joanne Nagel explain the increase in the number of people identifying themselves as 10. “American Indian” when the birth rates stayed the same?

Legal changes made scholarships more available to American Indians.a. The development of the “Red Power” movement shifted negative stereotypes of Indians.b. Urbanization made it easier for people to find and interact with other people that had c. some American-Indian heritage. All of the above. d.

The use of narratives and personal-stories is important to the process of _____________. 11.

symbolic interaction processa. identity control theoryb. mpression managementc. All of the above. d.

Pre-test

xi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Socialization is a process that _____________. 12.

begins at around two years of agea. lasts until the young twentiesb. begins at birth and continues through the life cyclec. both a and b d.

Sampson and Laub’s research on the impact of World War II (WWII) on men’s lives generally 13. showed that _____________.

WWII served as a turning point for all American soldiersa. IQ was the biggest factor in finding work after the warb. WWII only had an impact on soldiers if they served overseasc. most of the positive effects of war on the lives of soldiers came through their experience d. overseas, in-service training and access to programs like the GI Bill

Ausdale and Feagin’s research on children learning racism is important because 14. _______________.

it shows how children use race as a way to differentiate between peersa. it shows that children apply adult biases and racism in their day-to-day interactionsb. it shows that children use their own race as a way to gain acceptance by teachersc. both a and b d.

Most college students represent which type of person in Merton’s typology of deviance? 15.

conformistsa. innovatorsb. ritualistsc. retreatists d.

Component of social control theory referring to emotional bonds with other people in society. 16.

commitmenta. attachmentb. involvementc. None of the above. d.

Pre-test

xii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Manuel’s job loss really did not bother him because he did not like his boss. However, he 17. really started getting anxious when he stopped getting his paycheck. In this example, the effect of job loss on anxiety is ______________ by loss of income.

distresseda. moderatedb. mediatedc. constrained d.

Exposure to poor community conditions such as crime, poor living conditions and lack of 18. services.

malaisea. intransigenceb. ambient hazardsc. chronic strain d.

Nathan started attending KKK meetings when he saw some of his African-American neighbors 19. getting better jobs than him. Which of the following theories best explains Nathan’s negative attitude toward African Americans?

social distance theorya. symbolic interactionb. Blumer’s theory of group positionc. status construction theory d.

Theory that prejudicial attitudes reflect a group’s position in society. 20.

status construction theorya. theory of group positionb. modified labeling theoryc. colonization theory d.

A positive or negative evaluation of an object, a person or group or an idea. 21.

attitudea. prejudiceb. opinionc. belief d.

Pre-test

xiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Following Smelser’s value-added theory, why wouldn’t we expect a poor, third-world nation, 22. based on a barter economy, to develop mass hysteria over stock market problems like the U.S. did in the 1920s?

lack of structural conducivenessa. lack of structural strainb. lack of generalized beliefc. action of social control d.

Expectations about when and how to act excited or angry or any other emotion. 23.

emotional cuesa. emotional scriptsb. emotional energiesc. situational cues d.

When large numbers of people become obsessed with something like the purchase of a 24. product or an activity.

maniaa. crazeb. hysteriac. panic d.

A key ingredient of contagious mental unity, referring to situations in which people lose their 25. inhibitions to act and the tempo of their behavior increases.

intensity of behaviora. panicb. irrational behaviorc. hostile outburstsd.

925 North Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92701

Text:

Author(s):

Publisher:

S tu

d y G

u id

e

www.calcoast.edu

Phone: 714-547-9625 Fax: 714-547-5777

Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives

Second Edition, 2011

ISBN-13: 9780205661060

David E. Rohall, Melissa A. Milkie and Jeffrey W. Lucas

Pearson

12/14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Message From the President

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Welcome to California Coast University. I hope you will find this course interesting and useful throughout your career. This course was designed to meet the unique needs of students like you who are both highly motivated and capable of completing a degree program through distance learning.

Our faculty and administration have been involved in distance learning for over forty years and understand the characteristics common to successful students in this unique educational environment.

This course was prepared by CCU faculty members who are not only outstanding educators but who have real world experience. They have prepared these guidelines to help you successfully complete your educational goals and to get the most from your distance learning experience.

Again, we hope that you will find this course both helpful and motivating. We send our best wishes as you work toward the completion of your program.

Sincerely,

Thomas M. Neal President

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system without written permission from the publisher, except for the inclusion of brief quotation in review. Copyright © 2014 by California Coast University

Syllabus

xxi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Course Number PSY 228

Course Title Social Psychology

Course Description This course offers students an in-depth look at how people come to understand themselves and others in a social context, with considerable emphasis on sociology’s role in social psychology. Students will be given detailed examples of current research studies relating to each of the topics covered in this course such as stratification, deviance and mental health and illness. Each chapter of the text covered in this course will also introduce students to key sociological social psychologists whose research has made a significant contribution to the field.

Units of Credit 3 Units of Credit

Course Objectives Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to:

• Characterize three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

• Differentiate between qualitative and quantitative research methods.

• Determine how group processes affect identity.

• Recognize important agents of socialization.

• Identify physiological, social and behavioral components of emotions.

Learning Resources Textbook: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives 2nd edition, 2011 David E. Rohall, Melissa A. Milkie, and Jeffrey W. Lucas Pearson

ISBN-13: 9780205661060

All course examinations are based on the contents of the textbook required for this course. To successfully complete the examinations, you will need the textbook. You may rent the textbook from the CCU rental library or you may purchase the textbook from another source.

Although this study guide is developed by California Coast University, it may contain materials provided by the publisher of the textbook.

The Study Guide

The study guide was designed to help you further understand the material in the textbook and master the course content. Each study guide chapter corresponds to a chapter in the textbook.

Syllabus

xxii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Additional Readings and Online Resources

To help you further understand this subject material, additional readings and/or online resources related to this course are listed in this syllabus.

The Library Information and Resources Network, Inc. (LIRN)

Students are provided access to the Library and Information Resources Network, Inc. (LIRN). LIRN provides a centralized management of electronic information resources that allow students to access multiple research databases through one portal. Detailed information on the Library and Information Resources Network, Inc. is available on the California Coast University website under the Resources Tab. For additional information on using the network, LIRN provides a User Guide to help students search for the needed information. This helpful resource is available on the LIRN website. For information on accessing LIRN, please contact California Coast University – library@calcoast.edu or (714) 547-9625.

Supplementary Materials

Unit Examination Answer Sheets* Final Examination Scheduling Form

*Master of Education and Doctor of Education students will not receive unit exam answer sheets. These programs require written responses only.

Your Course Grade

Your grades on course examinations are determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university uses the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

Your grade in this course will be based on the number of points you earn. Grades are based on the percentage of points you earned out of a total of 500 points:

Four Unit Examinations

100 points each 400 points total 80% of your grade

Final Examination

100 points 100 points total 20% of your grade

Syllabus

xxiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Mastering the Course Content

In order to successfully complete this course, we recommend that you do the following before beginning:

• Be sure that you have the correct edition of the course textbook. Check the ISBN number of your textbook with the ISBN number listed on the cover page of this study guide.

• Review the table of contents at the end of this syllabus. You will only be responsible for the chapters in the textbook that are listed in the table of contents.

Each study guide contains several components selected and developed by the faculty to help you master the content of the course. Each chapter in the study guide corresponds to a chapter in the textbook. Study guides vary depending on the course, but most will include:

Learning Objectives Overviews Self Tests Summaries Key Terms Critical Analysis Questions (graduate and doctoral students only)

The most efficient way to complete this course is to read the materials in both the study guide and textbook in the sequence in which it appears, generally from beginning to end.

Read the Overviews and Summaries

Before reading a chapter of your textbook, review the corresponding learning objectives, overview, key terms and summary sections in the study guide. These were prepared to give you an overview of the content to be learned.

Review the Self Test

After you have reviewed the study guide summaries, look at the items on the self test. As you identify your areas of relative strength and weakness, you will become more aware of the material you will need to learn in greater depth.

Review the Critical Analysis and/or Case Study Questions (Graduate and Doctoral Students Only) The critical analysis questions are designed to help you gain a deeper understanding and appreciation for the course subject matter. This section will encourage you to give additional thought to the topics discussed in the chapter by presenting vignettes or cases with real world relevance.

Syllabus

xxiv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Read and Review the Chapter

Once you have the scope and organization of the chapter in mind, turn to the corresponding chapter in the textbook and read the material carefully. Keep the learning objectives, self test, critical analysis questions and/or case study questions in mind as you read.

Highlight important concepts and information in your study guide and write notes in the study guide as you read the textbook. These notes will help you study for the unit and final examinations.

Check Your Mastery of Each Chapter

When you feel that you have mastered the concepts presented in the chapter, complete the study guide self test and critical analysis questions and/or case study questions without referring to the textbook or your notes. Correct your responses using the answer key and solutions guide provided in the study guide. Your results will help you identify any areas you need to review.

Unit Examinations

Each course contains four unit examinations and a final examination. Unit examinations usually consist of 25 objective (multiple choice or true/false) test questions. For Master of Education and Doctor of Education students, unit examinations consist of writing assignments only.

Unit examinations may be found approximately every four to six chapters throughout your study guide. Unit examinations are open-book, do not require a proctor and are not timed. This will allow you to proceed at your own pace.

It is recommended that you check your answers against the material in your textbook for accuracy.

Writing Assignments

Each unit examination includes a written component. This assignment may be in the form of written questions or case study problems. The writing assignment affords the student an opportunity to demonstrate a level of subject mastery beyond the objective unit examinations, which reflects his/her ability to analyze, synthesize, evaluate and apply his/her knowledge. The writing assignment materials are found immediately following each unit examination.

Writing assignments are judged on the quality of the response in regard to the question. Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Syllabus

xxv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

• Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages.

• Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages.

• Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Plagiarism consists of taking and using the ideas, writings or inventions of another, without giving credit to that person and presenting it as one’s own. This is an offense that the university takes very seriously. An example of a correctly prepared written response may be found by visiting the Coast Connection student portal.

Citation Styles

The majority of your response should be your own original writing based on what you have learned from the textbook. However, students may also use outside materials if applicable. Be sure to provide a reference (or citation) for any materials used, including the required textbook. The following points are designed to help you understand how to provide proper references for your work:

• References are listed in two places.

• The first reference is briefly listed within your answer. This includes identifying information that directs the reader to your list of references at the end of your writing assignment.

• The second reference is at the end of your work in the list of references section.

• All references cited should provide enough identifying information so that the reader can access the original material.

For more detailed information on the proper use of citations, please refer to the CCU Student Handbook located on the Coast Connection student portal.

Submitting Your Unit Examinations and Writing Assignments via the Internet

Students may access the online testing features via the Coast Connection student portal. Multiple choice unit examinations may be completed and submitted online.

Syllabus

xxvi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Go to the California Coast University homepage at www.calcoast.edu and click on the student login icon at the upper right hand corner. After logging into your account, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the unit examination. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Writing assignments may be submitted online as well. After logging into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the writing assignment. Here, you will find further information and instructions on how to submit writing assignments through the student portal. Remember to keep a copy of your writing assignments for your own personal records.

Alternatively, if you experience diffulty submitting your writing assignments through the student portal, then you may email your assignments as a Word document attachment to essays@calcoast.edu. When doing so, please adhere to the following guidelines:

• Always submit your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number with your writing assignment.

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

• All responses must be typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size for ease of reading and grading.

Submitting Your Unit Examinations by Mail

Send your completed unit examination along with any writing assignments to the following mailing address:

California Coast University Testing Department 925 N. Spurgeon Street Santa Ana, CA 92701

Requests to retake a unit examination will only be honored if the final exam has NOT been sent.

Syllabus

xxvii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Students may retake one unit examination per course, free of charge. The cost for each additional, repeated exam will be $90. Payment must be paid in full to the accounting department prior to repeating unit exams.

Please contact Student Services for a repeat unit examination form. You may resubmit your unit examination once the original grade has been cleared from your online degree plan.

Final Examination

Scheduling a Final Examination

Final examination requests can be submitted via U.S. mail, online through the Coast Connection student portal, or by calling the Testing Department at (714) 547-9625.

A final exam scheduling form is located on the last page of this study guide. Please fill out ALL required fields and mail it to the university.

If you would like to request a final exam online, log into the Coast Connection student portal and click on My Academic Plan. Select the course you are working on and submit the Final Exam Request form located at the bottom of the page. ALL INFORMATION MUST BE FILLED IN.

Submitting Your Final Examination

Final Examinations can be submitted by mail, fax or online through the Coast Connection student portal.

After you have completed your exam, you or your proctor can fax it to the Grading Department at (714) 547-1451 or mail it to the university. When faxing exams, please do not resize your fax.

For online submissions, once you have logged into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the final examination. You must input the unique password that was sent to your proctor in order to unlock your final examination questions. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Proctors

The university requires that all final examinations be completed under the supervision of a proctor.

A proctor can be anyone EXCEPT an immediate family member, someone who resides with you or a current/former CCU student.

Syllabus

xxviii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The purpose of the proctored final examination is to verify that you are, in fact, the person who is enrolled in the course of study. It is also to verify that you are completing the final examination without the aid of any outside assistance.

During the proctored final examination, you may use your textbook and any notes you have taken during the completion of your unit examinations. Your designated proctor will verify your identity and that you have completed the final examination without any outside assistance.

Your Overall Grade Point Average (G.P.A.)

In addition to receiving a passing grade for each course, all students must maintain a required overall G.P.A. in order to graduate. Undergraduate students need an overall G.P.A. of 2.0 (C) on a 4.0 scale. Graduate and doctoral students need an overall G.P.A. of 3.0 (B) on a 4.0 scale.

A = 4 grade points B = 3 grade points C = 2 grade points D = 1 grade point F = 0 grade points

Students who do not meet the overall G.P.A. requirement by the end of their program must pay the current cost of tuition to repeat courses until they improve their overall G.P.A.

Overall course grades of “F” will be displayed on your degree plan and count as 0 units completed. You must pay to retake these courses.

Doctoral students must repeat any courses in which the overall course grade is a “D” or “F”.

Be sure to keep a copy of all work you submit to the university.

Syllabus

xxix

PSY 228 Social Psychology

If you have any questions about how to proceed through the course or regarding any California Coast University policies and procedures, the easiest way to get help is to send us a message through the student portal, via email, or phone the university.

University office hours are Monday through Friday from 8:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Pacific Standard Time.

California Coast University

925 N. Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, California 92701 Phone: (714) 547-9625 Fax: (714) 547-5777 Test Answer Sheet Fax Line: (714) 547-1451

Email: testing@calcoast.edu

Don’t forget: You are not alone! We are here to help you achieve your dream!

PS Y

22 8

Syllabus

xxx

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

The learning objectives for this course are listed below:

Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology

1. Define social psychology. 2. Differentiate between macrosociology and microsociology. 3. Compare and contrast sociologists and psychologists’ approach to social psychology. 4. Identify the three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

Chapter 2: Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology

1. Distinguish the major principles of the symbolic interaction perspective. 2. Define what it means to “construct” the world around us. 3. Characterize the social structure and personality perspective. 4. Identify key elements of the group processes perspective. 5. Consider elements of group structure.

Chapter 3: Studying People

1. Become acquainted with the vocabulary of social science research. 2. Differentiate qualitative sociology from quantitative sociology. 3. Determine major forms of qualitative and quantitative research. 4. Assess how social scientists begin to develop a research project.

Chapter 4: The Social Psychology of Stratification

1. Interpret how people construct inequality in society. 2. Determine how structure is linked to interactions. 3. Evaluate how stratification develops in group interaction. 4. Judge how inequalities from society-at-large get reproduced in groups.

Chapter 5: Self and Identity

1. Identify the components of the self. 2. Determine interactionist theories of the self and identity. 3. Characterize three dimensions of the self-concept. 4. Analyze what we know from research on the self-concept. 5. Interpret how group processes affect identity.

Syllabus

xxxi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter 6: Socialization Over the Life Course

1. Critique how society influences the social construction of the self. 2. Chart the stages involved in developing the self. 3. Name the four elements of life-course sociology. 4. Consider agents of socialization and how they affect our lives. 5. Assess how group processes researchers study socialization.

Chapter 7: The Social Psychology of Deviance

1. Analyze how we define what is normal and what is deviant. 2. Determine how the construction of deviant labels contribute to the development of deviant lifestyles. 3. Judge how structural conditions influence individuals’ decisions to commit deviant acts. 4. Consider how group relationships influence the development of deviance and perceptions of deviance.

Chapter 8: Mental Health and Illness

1. Determine what it means to be mentally healthy. 2. Interpret how the definition of mental illness is constructed. 3. List the structural conditions in society that contribute to distress. 4. Identify resources that can buffer stress. 5. Assess how mental health can influence our sense of identity and interactions with others.

Chapter 9: Attitudes, Values and Behaviors

1. Identify the nature of an attitude. 2. Evaluate how researchers study attitudes and behaviors. 3. Describe how people construct attitudes. 4. Analyze how attitudes toward other people form in group contexts.

Chapter 10: The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion

1. Distinguish the components of emotions. 2. Determine how people learn emotions. 3. Consider how identity relates to emotions. 4. Evaluate how our statuses in society affect our uses of emotions. 5. Interpret the norms that govern the use of emotions in different social settings. 6. Predict how group settings affect emotions.

Syllabus

xxxii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter 11: Collective Behavior

1. Analyze how crowds contribute to the development of mass hysteria. 2. Identify theories that explain individuals’ behavior in large groups. 3. Decide whether structural conditions affect crowd behaviors. 4. Chart the phases of collective behavior found in large social movements. 5. Evaluate how group and individual motivations interact in social movements.

Syllabus

xxxiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Best, Joel. 2006. Flavor of the Month: Why Smart People Fall for Fads. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.

Clarke, Lee. 2006. Worst Cases: Terror and Catastrophe in the Popular Imagination. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Gergen, Kenneth J. 2000. The Saturated Self: Dilemmas of Identity in Contemporary Life. New York: Basic Books.

Hertz, Rosanna. 2006. Single by Chance, Mothers by Choice: How Women are Choosing Parenthood without Marriage and Creating the New American Family. New York: Oxford University Press.

Horowitz, Allan V. 2002. Creating Mental Illness. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Lareau, Annette. 2003. Unequal Childhoods: Class, Race and Family Life. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.

Miller, David L. 2000. Introduction to Collective Behavior and Collective Action. Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland.

Polletta, Francesca. 2006. It was Like a Fever: Storytelling in Protest and Politics. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.

Ream, Robert Ketner. 2005. Uprooting Children: Mobility, Social Capital and Mexican American Underachievement. New York: LFB Scholarly Publishing.

Scheff, Thomas J. 1990. Microsociology: Discourse, Emotion and Social Structure. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Swidler, Ann. 2001. Talk of Love: How Culture Matters. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Turner,Ralph H. and Lewis M. Killian. 1972. Collective Behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Zelizer, Viviana. 2005. The Purchase of Intimacy. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

Suggested Readings

Table of Contents

xxxiv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Syllabus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii-xx

Unit One Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2: Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 3: Studying People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Unit 1 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Unit 1 Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Unit 1 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Unit Two

Chapter 4: The Social Psychology of Stratification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Chapter 5: Self and Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 6: Socialization Over the Life Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Unit 2 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Unit 2 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Unit 2 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Unit Three

Chapter 7: The Social Psychology of Deviance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Chapter 8: Mental Health and Illness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Chapter 9: Attitudes, Values and Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Unit 3 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Unit 3 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Unit 3 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Unit Four Chapter 10: The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Chapter 11: Collective Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Unit 4 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Unit 4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Unit 4 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Final Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Final Exam Scheduling Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Objectives

1

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter One Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Define social psychology.

2. Differentiate between macrosociology and microsociology.

3. Compare and contrast sociologists and psychologists’ approach to social psychology.

4. Identify the three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

• Read pages 1-24 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

2

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter is designed to give students an understanding of how sociologists study social psychology and its role in the larger field of sociology. Students will gain an understanding of the distinction between psychology and sociology and be able to explain the major sociological social psychology perspectives.

Key Terms

3

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Breaching experiments:

Culture:

Ethnomethodology:

Macrosociology:

Organizations:

Psychology:

Roles:

Social norms:

Social psychology:

Sociological imagination:

Symbolic interactionism:

Summary

4

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociology is the study of society. Sociologists look at society from both the macro and the micro level of analysis. Both psychological and sociological social psychologists study the social contexts of human thoughts, feelings and behaviors. Sociologists, however, also apply the perspectives and methods of the field of sociology to the study of social psychology.

Sociology was first defined in 1838 by French social philosopher, August Comte, who applied the principles of the scientific method to society. Some of the founders of sociological social psychology include George Herbert Mead, W.E.B. Dubois, William Thomas, Charles Horton Cooley and George Simmel. Three major perspectives in sociological social psychology include symbolic interactionism, social structure and personality and group processes.

Sociologists use a tool kit consisting of methods and concepts for studying the role of society in social psychological processes. Their tools include such concepts as statuses, roles, norms and values, culture and social institutions—which they apply to the study of human thoughts—feelings and behavior.

Self Test

5

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. How can macrosociological perspectives be used to study individual, micro-level interactions?

a. Macrosociological conditions may cause some individual-level conditions to exist in the first place. b. Differences in our macrosociological conditions may change the way we react to life events. c. Life events that affect us the most are often caused by societal conditions. d. All of the above.

2. Janna wanted to study the effects of population size on individuals’ decision to commit suicide. Which social psychological perspective is she most likely to use?

a. psychology b. sociology c. sociological social psychology d. psychological social psychology

3. Which macrosociological perspective views society as social systems composed of parts that serve to keep the system working properly?

a. conflict perspective b. symbolic interactionism c. behavioralism d. structural functionalism

4. Joe started noticing that kids from the upper classes tend to get accepted at better colleges than the kids from the middle and lower classes. His analysis probably comes from which macrosociological perspective?

a. conflict perspective b. symbolic interactionism c. behavioralism d. structural functionalism

Self Test

6

PSY 228 Social Psychology

5. Sociological social psychology is different from psychological social psychology because:

a. it focuses on the effects of societal conditions on individuals’ thoughts, feelings and behavior. b. it incorporates sociological perspectives and theories to explain individuals’ thoughts, feelings and behavior. c. it is a subfield of sociology, not psychology. d. All of the above.

6. Social psychology is the systematic study of individual thoughts, feelings and behavior in a social context. Which of the following social contexts are more likely to be studied by sociologists than psychologists?

a. small groups b. family interactions c. ethnic groups d. friendship groups

Answer Keys

7

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Breaching experiments: Experiments that violate the established social order to assess how people construct social reality.

Culture: A society’s set of unique patterns of behavior and beliefs.

Ethnomethodology: A method of studying society through observation of people’s typical day-to-day interactions.

Macrosociology: The study of large-scale social processes.

Organizations: Groups that share a common purpose and contain a formal set of rules and authority structure.

Psychology: The study of human thought processes and behaviors.

Roles: A set of expectations about how to behave in a group.

Social norms: The rules that regulate our behavior in relationships.

Social psychology: The systematic study of people’s thoughts, feelings and behavior in social contexts.

Sociological imagination: The ability to see personal lives in the context of the larger society— its history, culture and social structure.

Symbolic interactionism: A perspective within sociological social psychology that emphasizes the study of how people negotiate the meaning of social life during their interactions with other people.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

8

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. c

3. d

4. a

5. d

6. c

Notes

9

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

10

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Two Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Distinguish the major principles of the symbolic interaction perspective.

2. Define what it means to “construct” the world around us.

3. Characterize the social structure and personality perspective.

4. Identify key elements of the group processes perspective.

5. Consider elements of group structure.

• Read pages 25-53 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

11

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter provides an extensive review of three major perspectives in sociological social psychology. Students will learn about the history, theoretical and empirical importance of the three perspectives. The chapter begins with an overview of the history and tenets of symbolic interactionism. This is followed by a review of the two major schools of symbolic interactionism.

Key Terms

12

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency:

Collective behavior:

Components principle:

Frame analysis:

Legitimacy:

Proximity principle:

Psychology principle:

Reference groups:

Social scripts:

Thomas theorem:

Summary

13

PSY 228 Social Psychology

There are three broad perspectives in sociological social psychology: symbolic interactionism, social structure and personality and group processes.

Symbolic interactionism is the study of how people negotiate meaning during their interactions with others. Within this approach, two schools of symbolic interactionism exists: the Chicago school and the Iowa and Indiana schools.

The social structure and personality perspective emphasizes how social structure affects individuals within a society. Structural forces include status, roles and social networks.

The group processes perspective focuses on interactions that occur within groups, characteristics of groups and relationships among groups. Processes studied by those in the group processes perspective include power, status, justice and legitimacy.

A group’s behavior is influenced by structural conditions including its size and its function. Group research may focus on structure or on other aspects of group processes, such as the relationship between groups and the behavior of larger groups of people called collective behavior.

Self Test

14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Which social theorists are most associated with the concept of the social construction of reality?

a. Marx and Engels b. Thomas and Thomas c. Berger and Luckmann d. Blumer and Mead

2. A local fraternity developed a special hand signal whenever they see each other on the university quad. In symbolic interactionist terms, this signal has become a ______________ for this group.

a. meaningful exchange b. important source of pride c. language d. symbol

3. Terence started to believe that a friend at work is really a spy from another company, leading him to avoid interactions with that person as much as possible. Ultimately, he treats all interactions with her as suspect, making him reluctant to share any work-related information with her. Which of the following best explains Terence’s behavior?

a. components principle of the social structure and personality perspective b. the Thomas theorem c. the peter principle d. the group processes concept of legitimacy

4. Who coined the expression “symbolic interaction”?

a. Emile Durkheim b. Herbert Blumer c. August Comte d. George Herbert Mead

5. Professor Swanson is studying the meaning of “goodness” using a survey of public attitudes toward the topic. Which school of symbolic interaction is she most likely using in her research?

a. the Chicago school b. the Indiana/Iowa school c. the Swanson school d. the sociological social psychology school

Self Test

15

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Socioeconomic status (social class), race or ethnicity, gender, age and sexuality all relate to which principle of the social structure and personality perspective?

a. components principle b. proximity principle c. psychology principle d. peter principle

Answer Keys

16

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency: The ability to act and think independent of the constraints imposed by social conditions.

Collective behavior: The action or behavior of people in groups or crowds.

Components principle: Within the social structure and personality perspective, the ability to identify the elements or components of society most likely to affect a given attitude or behavior.

Frame analysis: The process by which individuals transform the meaning of a situation using basic cognitive structures provided by society.

Legitimacy: The perception that a social arrangement or position is the way that things should be.

Proximity principle: Element of the social structure and personality perspective referring to how people are affected by social structure through their immediate social environments.

Psychology principle: Element of the social structure and personality perspective referring to how individuals internalize proximal experiences.

Reference groups: People we look to as a source of standards and identity.

Social scripts: The appropriate thoughts, feelings and behaviors that should be displayed in a particular social frame.

Thomas theorem: Theorem stating that when people define situations as real, the consequences of those situations become real.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

17

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. b

4. b

5. b

6. a

Notes

18

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

19

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Three Studying People

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Become acquainted with the vocabulary of social science research.

2. Differentiate qualitative sociology from quantitative sociology.

3. Determine major forms of qualitative and quantitative research.

4. Assess how social scientists begin to develop a research project.

• Read pages 54-82 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

20

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to provide an overview of the techniques sociological social psychologists use to study people, emphasizing theoretical differences on the appropriate means of obtaining social-psychological data.

Key Terms

21

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Categorical variables:

Ethnography:

Focus groups:

Indices:

Interval variables:

Ordinal variables:

Population:

Qualitative research methods:

Reliability:

Snowball sample:

Validity:

Summary

22

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Several concepts apply to almost any research project. Researchers regularly use terms such as theory, research questions or hypotheses and variables to describe ways of studying people.

Researchers employ qualitative and quantitative techniques to study human subjects. Qualitative research methods include field research and in-depth interviews. Quantitative methods include survey research and experiments.

The steps in developing most research projects include assessing the theory and literature of the research topic, developing research questions or specific hypotheses, choosing the appropriate research methods, conducting data analysis and reporting the results.

Although there is no rule about whether a particular theory should or should not use quantitative or qualitative methods to study people, symbolic interactionists have traditionally relied more on qualitative methods. Many researchers try to employ multiple methods of studying a particular phenomenon.

Self Test

23

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. How are social theories and hypotheses related to one another?

a. Theories include general statements about social relationships while hypotheses are more specific statements about how variables will relate to one another. b. Theories are an extension of hypotheses. c. Theories are used to develop hypotheses. d. both a and c

2. Samantha started a research project predicting that men would be more supportive of using military forces to go to war than women. In this case, attitudes toward going to war is what kind of variable?

a. index b. scale c. independent variable d. dependent variable

3. In preparing for a survey of country club members, Donella asked the manager of the club for a list of members. This list refers to a _______________.

a. random sample b. probability sample c. sample list d. sampling frame

4. Which of the following types of samples is considered most representative of any given population?

a. random sample b. convenience sample c. snowball sample d. both b and c

5. An instructor asks you to develop a study of the homeless that will provide a great deal of depth into what it is like to be homeless. Given this mandate, which of the following methods would most likely give the information you need for such a project?

a. ethnography b. focus group c. survey d. experiment

Self Test

24

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. A sample in which any available person is included in the study is known as a ____________ sample.

a. true b. convenience c. odd d. real time

Answer Keys

25

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Categorical variables: Measures for which the possible responses have no particular order.

Ethnography: A form of field research that includes a descriptive analysis of a group or organization.

Focus groups: Semistructured interviews with small groups of people.

Indices: A series of related questions designed to measure a concept such as mastery.

Interval variables: A type of variable in which the difference between any two adjacent values is the same.

Ordinal variables: Variables for which response categories are ordered but the distances between adjacent categories are not necessarily equal.

Population: The larger group of people about whom a researcher seeks to draw conclusions.

Qualitative research methods: In-depth, semi-structured modes of observation or interviewing of subjects.

Reliability: When a study yields the same results using the same techniques and data.

Snowball sample: Samples in which informants provide contact information about other people who share some of the characteristics necessary for a study.

Validity: How valid or accurate the findings of the study are.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

26

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. a

3. d

4. a

5. a

6. b

Notes

27

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 1 Examination Instructions

28

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit One Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 1 Examination

29

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Which early sociologists emphasized the role of society in the development of the self?

a. George Herbert Mead b. Karl Marx c. Georg Simmer d. Herbert Blumer

2. Which sociological social psychology perspective emphasizes the role of meaning and the social construction of meaning in the study of social psychology?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

3. Which sociological social psychology perspective is likely to emphasize the importance of roles and statuses in the study of social psychology?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

4. Which sociological social psychology perspective is likely to emphasize the importance of interactions within groups?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

5. The sociological imagination is associated with which social theorists?

a. Emile Durkheim b. Max Weber c. C. Wright Mills d. Auguste Comte

Unit 1 Examination

30

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. The expectation to look someone in the eye when talking with them refers to a _______________.

a. norm b. role c. value d. belief

7. Derek’s job as a supervisor refers to his relative _______________ in the company while the expectations for how to behave on the job refers to his ________________.

a. role; status b. job; role c. status; role d. status; job

8. Which institution regulates sexual relations and child-rearing in society?

a. economy and work b. politics c. family d. religion

9. Which institution refers to the rituals and beliefs regarding sacred things?

a. economy and work b. politics c. family d. religion

10. Franklin did not think much about how the economy or society affects his life until he lost his job. Franklin’s internal processesing of his job loss best represents which principle from the social structure and personality perspective?

a. components principle b. psychology principle c. propinquity principle d. proximity principle

Unit 1 Examination

31

PSY 228 Social Psychology

11. After Donna cheated on her most recent exam, she starts to feel a sense of guilt, making her reconsider whether she wants to do it again. Donna’s feelings of guilt can be considered a ______________, according to the social structure and personality perspective, leading her to rethink her future behaviors.

a. social more b. social norm c. social force d. social fear

12. Which of the following is considered a major dimension of group processes?

a. power b. justice c. legitimacy d. All of the above.

13. Janelle wants to study how and why some people are able to tell other people what to do while others can not. What aspect of group processes is she studying?

a. power b. status c. justice d. legitimacy

14. What social psychologist is most associated with the concepts of dyads and triads?

a. Emile Durkheim b. August Comte c. Herbert Blumer d. Georg Simmel

15. The difference between dyads and triads is important because:

a. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially increases the number of relationships available in an interaction. b. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially decreases the amount of intimacy possible in a group. c. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially decreases the number of relationships available in an interaction. d. both a and b

Unit 1 Examination

32

PSY 228 Social Psychology

16. A group of friends getting together for dinner represents a ______________ group while a group of people at your work represents a _____________ group.

a. reference; primary b. primary; reference c. primary; secondary d. secondary; reference

17. Bob goes to the beach on a hot summer day and is surprised when he observes a group of people dressed in formal wear sitting in beach chairs amongst sunbathers. Bob was surprised because the ______________ did not meet his expectations for that situation.

a. situation b. social scripts c. frame d. All of the above.

18. ____________ require the researcher to weigh individual items differently.

a. Indices b. Scales c. both a and b d. None of the above.

19. Which of the following methods is MOST likely to show causation?

a. ethnography b. focus group c. survey d. experiment

20. An instructor developed a study to determine ways of producing more participation in his classes. In one class she provided free donuts everyday of class while in another she gave them nothing. She had her assistant takes notes on the number of comments and questions students made in each class. Which of these classes represent the control group?

a. the class not given the donuts b. the class given the donuts c. other classes that are not part of the experiment d. both classes would be considered the control group

Unit 1 Examination

33

PSY 228 Social Psychology

21. ____________ developed the field of operant conditioning; much of his work relied on experiments using rats and pigeons.

a. Carl Jung b. B.F. Skinner c. Sigmund Freud d. Joseph Berger

22. At what step in the research process does the researcher employ the library and other resources and conduct a literature review?

a. step 1 b. step 2 c. step 3 d. step 4

23. At what step in the research process does the researcher actually go out and collect data?

a. step 1 b. step 2 c. step 3 d. step 4

24. Research conducted by interviews, participant observations and ethnographies is referred to as what kind of research?

a. quantitative b. qualitative c. breeching d. experimental

25. Social scientists must always be concerned with _______________ and _______________ to accurately capture the phenomena in question.

a. truth and reliability b. reliability and validity c. truth and validity d. probability and validity

Unit 1 Examination

34

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit One

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

1. Think about the concept of poverty. How would a macro-level sociologist study this concept differently than a micro-level sociologist?

2. Discuss how symbolic interactionists define the concept of society. What role do symbols and language play in the development of society?

3. Discuss the ways that group structures can impact interaction in groups. Specifically, examine how group size (i.e., dyads and triads) and types of groups (e.g., primary groups) impact interactions between people.

You Can Do It

35

PSY 228 Social Psychology

You have just completed Unit 1 of this course.

You are off to a great start!

Keep up the good work!

Objectives

36

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Four The Social Psychology of Stratification

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Interpret how people construct inequality in society.

2. Determine how structure is linked to interactions.

3. Evaluate how stratification develops in group interaction.

4. Judge how inequalities from society-at-large get reproduced in groups.

• Read pages 84-120 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

37

PSY 228 Social Psychology

One of the major ways that sociological social psychology is different from its counterpart in psychology is its greater emphasis on the role of stratification in social psychological processes. There are several ways in which stratification affects our lives and relationships. Symbolic interactionists sometimes address how we create and maintain definitions of different classes of people. Social structure and personality scholars emphasize how structural conditions, often related to work, education, or family settings affect people. Those in the group processes perspective examine how stratification systems from the larger society become reproduced in groups. We will use each of these perspectives to examine how stratification processes occur in our day-to-day lives.

Key Terms

38

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Borderwork:

Direct exchanges:

Doing difference:

Feedback loop:

Intersectionality:

Routinization:

Social capital:

Social exchange theory:

Social stratification:

Substantive complexity:

Summary

39

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Three ways that interactionist researchers focus on stratification processes include examining how social structure shapes who we interact with, accounting for inequalities in the content of interactions, acknowledging how people with certain status characteristics have more power in terms of role taking and examining people’s power to define situations and define themselves.

The Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment traces the relationships among individual’s class position, their abilities and their long-term occupational outcomes.

The effect of networking among individuals from different groups creates a variety of outcomes for those involved, depending on the status of the individuals in a group as well as the status of the group itself.

Values serve as a guide for making decisions about the future, ultimately affecting the types of jobs we attain and class position we have in life, producing a feedback loop between our personality and social positions.

Group processes contribute to our understanding of structural developments by studying the exchanges among individuals in groups. Exchange processes lend themselves to the development of status structures because people bring different types and quantities of resources into the process. People who contribute more to a group or have more resources generally achieve a higher status in groups.

Self Test

40

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Shirley Brice Heath’s research on the socialization of status and race among Whites and Blacks in the rural-Piedmont Carolinas is important because:

a. it shows how social class influences how we interact with other people. b. it shows how historical and social conditions can affect our day-to-day interactions. c. it shows that White people have an advantage over African-Americans in getting into good colleges. d. both a and b

2. Which perspective in sociological social psychology is more likely to examine the effects of stratification in day-to-day exchanges between people?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

3. Which of the following is the best example of “borderwork”?

a. a group of teenage boys smoking cigarettes in a high-school parking lot b. a group of girls at a slumber party c. a group of boys and girls playing “kiss and chase” d. a group of boys and girls being lectured to about poor behavior

4. Elijah Anderson’s study of inner city norms and values show that:

a. inner city residents tend to be submissive in the face of their poverty. b. inner city residents are taught to develop a toughness to deal with challenges of poverty and poor living conditions. c. most inner city residents accept most traditional norms from the larger culture. d. both b and c

5. An intersectional approach is essential to understanding the dynamics of stratification because it allows us to the look at the multitude of ways in which our statuses and positions affect our experience.

a. True b. False

Self Test

41

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. According to the Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment, how does our social background influence our occupational status in life?

a. It shows that our social background influences with whom we spend time. b. It shows that our social background influences our mental abilities. c. It shows that our social background affects our educational levels. d. All of the above.

Answer Keys

42

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Borderwork: The creation of social and physical boundaries between boys and girls.

Direct exchanges: Exchanges between two people.

Doing difference: Any way in which inequality in any form (race, class or gender) is perpetuated during our interactions as people are held accountable to the social categories in which they are a part.

Feedback loop: A process in which our class position influences the development of values that, in turn, influences the type of job we seek.

Intersectionality: The idea that race, gender and class statuses are not separate but interlocking systems of inequality.

Routinization: Part of Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment referring to the level of repetitiveness found on the job.

Social capital: Trust and support found in relationships with other people.

Social exchange theory: Theory based on the premise that individuals enter into relationships that provide some benefit to them and end or leave relationships that do not provide some sort of reward.

Social stratification: The ways in which individuals or groups are ranked in society.

Substantive complexity: Part of Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment referring to how complicated the actual work is on the job.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

43

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. a

3. c

4. d

5. a

6. d

Notes

44

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

45

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Five Self and Identity

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the components of the self.

2. Determine interactionist theories of the self and identity.

3. Characterize three dimensions of the self-concept.

4. Analyze what we know from research on the self-concept.

5. Interpret how group processes affect identity.

• Read pages 121-149 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

46

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter reviews the different ways that sociologists study the meaning of the concepts of self and identity and the structural and group conditions that impact the self. It will address the components of the self; interactionist theories of the self and identity; three dimensions of self- concept; and how group processes affect identity.

Key Terms

47

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect-control theory:

Backstage:

Dramaturgical sociology:

Emotional arousal:

I:

Identity:

Mastery:

Mattering:

Me:

Personal characteristics:

Psychological centrality:

Self:

Self-enhancement:

Self-esteem:

Self-indication:

Verbal persuasion:

Vicarious experience:

Summary

48

PSY 228 Social Psychology

From a symbolic interactionist perspective, the self is a process in which we construct a sense of who we are. We use symbols and language to communicate with other people, but we also use language to think internally. The self includes a dialogue between the “I” and the “Me”.

Identity includes our social categories and personal characteristics. Identity theory examines how social conditions affect the salience of identities and thus our behavior. Affect-control theory incorporates emotions in identity processes.

The self-concept refers to all our thoughts and feelings about ourselves as an object, often studied in the form of identities, self-esteem, mattering and mastery. Class, race, and gender are important social statuses that influence our self-development over time. Social identity theory argues that people define and evaluate themselves in terms of the groups they belong to, including one’s race and gender.

Self Test

49

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. What part of the self-concept is mastery?

a. the self b. self-identities c. self-evaluations d. self indication

2. Debating what other people are thinking about you in a public setting is best represented by what term?

a. self-concept b.self-identities c. self-evaluations d. self indication

3. According to Mead, which aspect of our self is out in public, constantly processing new information related to the self?

a. the “I” b. the “Me” c. self-concept d. self indication

4. Which of the following is NOT an element of identity?

a. social categories b. role identities c. personal characteristics d. self attitudes

5. Being a Canadian applies to which aspect of identity?

a. social categories b. role identities c. personal characteristics d. self attitudes

Self Test

50

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Identity theory comes from which social-psychological perspective?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functional

Answer Keys

51

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect-control theory: The theory that incorporates elements of symbolic interactionism and identity theory to explain the role of emotion in identity processes.

Backstage: Part of dramaturgical sociology referring to the region where we relax our impression management efforts.

Dramaturgical sociology: The study of how we present ourselves, playing roles and managing impressions during interactions with other people.

Emotional arousal: Inferences about our abilities based on our emotional states that we use to build our sense of mastery.

I: The part of the self that is active, engaging in interactions with others.

Identity: Our internalized, stable sense of who we are.

Mastery: Our perceptions of our ability to control things important to us.

Mattering: Our sense that we are important to other people in the world.

Me: The part of the self that includes an organized set of attitudes toward the self.

Personal characteristics: Anything we use to describe our individual nature.

Psychological centrality: Our ability to shift aspects of the self to become more or less important to our overall self-concept.

Self: A process in which we construct a sense of who we are through interaction with others.

Self-enhancement: In social identity theory, the process through which we make comparisons that favor our own groups.

Self-esteem: The positive or negative evaluation of our self as an object.

Self-indication: The use of symbols and language to communicate internally.

Verbal persuasion: Information from others about our abilities used to derive mastery.

Vicarious experience: A way of building mastery by seeing other people perform tasks; it shows us that the task is accomplishable.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

52

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. d

5. a

6. a

Notes

53

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

54

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Six Socialization Over the Lifer Course

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Critique how society influences the social construction of the self.

2. Chart the stages involved in developing the self.

3. Name the four elements of life-course sociology.

4. Consider agents of socialization and how they affect our lives.

5. Assess how group processes researchers study socialization.

• Read pages 150-187 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

55

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to define socialization and the life course and the major theories and research associated with these ideas.

Key Terms

56

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency:

Birth cohort:

Contextual dissonance:

Gender socialization:

Idiocultures:

Life course:

Life events:

Linked lives:

Looking-glass self:

Pygmalion effect:

Socialization:

Summary

57

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociologists study socialization processes at every stage of development from childhood to late adulthood. The self develops through a symbolic process. An essential aspect of self-development is the ability to take the role of the other.

The sociology of childhood focuses on how children are active participants in creating culture. Life-course sociology is based on the notion that humans adapt to different situations based on their social and historical location, relative to different events and cultural “moments.” Four major themes in life-course sociology include historical context, timing, linked lives and agency.

Sociologists view agents of socialization as mediators of the larger society rather than direct causes of socialization. The family is considered the primary agent of socialization because children are raised from infancy with parents and often siblings. Schools and peers are two other important agents of socialization.

The group processes perspective often examines the role of socialization after it has occurred, reviewing, for instance, how expectations about gender or race affect group interactions.

Self Test

58

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Sammy is using dolls to represent people in a doll house. Based on Mead’s theory of child development, at what stage of development is she?

a. preparatory stage b. play stage c. game stage d. toy stage

2. A little boy playing in a baseball team is probably in which stage of development using Mead’s typology?

a. preparatory stage b. play stage c. game stage d. toy stage

3. Which social psychologist is associated with the looking-glass self?

a. George Herbert Mead b. Michel Foucault c. Georg Simmel d. Charles Horton Cooley

4. Studies have shown that factors such as parenting style, resources and status can dramatically affect the outcomes of children of divorced parents.

a. True b. False

5. Studies have found that father’s household labor participation has little effect on their son’s future household labor sharing.

a. True b. False

Self Test

59

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Several studies have shown that there is a correlation between watching violent television and aggressive behavior.

a. True b. False

Answer Keys

60

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency: An aspect of life-course sociology referring to our ability to improvise roles, make decisions and control our destiny.

Birth cohort: A group of people born around the same time period.

Contextual dissonance: A feeling that minority members of a group have because they are different from the majority members.

Gender socialization: Learning expectations about how to behave related to one’s gender.

Idiocultures: A system of knowledge, beliefs, behaviors and customs shared by an interacting group to which members refer and employ as a basis of further interaction.

Life course: The process of change from infancy to late adulthood resulting from personal and societal events and from transitions into and out of social roles.

Life events: Event that can cause significant changes in the course of our lives.

Linked lives: An aspect of life-course sociology referring to our relationships with other people.

Looking-glass self: How the self relies on imagined responses of others in its development.

Pygmalion effect: When children develop according to expectations of a group or society.

Socialization: The ways in which individuals attempt to align their own thoughts, feelings, and behavior to fit into a group or society.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

61

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. b

2. c

3. d

4. a

5. b

6. a

Notes

62

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 2 Examination Instructions

63

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Two Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 2 Examination

64

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. How does Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment link economic status, job characteristics and personality?

a. People with lower economic status tend to find work in jobs that have more supervision. b. People with lower economic status tend to find work in jobs that require less intellectual flexibility. c. People with less intellectual flexibility tend to seek jobs that are routinized. d. All of the above.

2. Bradley, a student at Big U, regularly seeks advice from his professor and mentor, Janet. According to exchange theory, what kind of exchange is most likely motivating Janet to stay in this relationship?

a. a direct exchange b. a reciprocal exchange c. a generalized exchange d. All of the above.

3. What was being exchanged among crew members and the captain in George Homan’s research about exchange processes on small warships?

a. support b. caring c. listening d. All of the above.

4. Who gets the most status in groups based on Bales’ research in social exchanges in small groups?

a. Those who are perceived as the best managers. b. Those who are perceived as being the smartest. c. Those who contribute the most to the group. d. Those who listen and care the most for the other members.

5. Which of the following best reflects a task group used to study status processes in groups?

a. A group of students at a class lecture. b. A group of people waiting in line to pay at a store. c. A group of citizens meeting to resolve a local problem. d. All of the above.

Unit 2 Examination

65

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Why are weak ties so important for finding work?

a. People with whom we have weak ties live and work in circles outside our own. b. People with whom we have weak ties tend to have better jobs. c. People with whom we have weak ties aren’t biased against us in the job market. d. People with whom we have weak ties provide training in getting better jobs.

7. According to status characteristics theory, gender, race and education levels are examples of _______________.

a. diffuse status characteristics b. specific status characteristics c. roles d. class positions

8. According to status characteristics theory, skill at playing basketball would be considered _______________.

a. diffuse status characteristics b. specific status characteristics c. roles d. class positions

9. People are ______________ aware of the status hierarchies that develop in task-oriented groups.

a. almost always b. usually not c. always d. None of the above.

10. Which theorist is most associated with impression management?

a. Auguste Comte b. Emile Durkheim c. Herbert Blumer d. Erving Goffman

11. According to dramaturgical sociology, what area of identity is associated with hanging out with friends while watching television?

a. front stage b. back stage c. performance stage d. informal groups

Unit 2 Examination

66

PSY 228 Social Psychology

12. A first date would most likely be associated with what area of identity?

a. front stage b. back stage c. performance stage d. informal groups

13. Spencer Cahill’s research on “bathroom behavior” clearly showed that _______________.

a. people act very differently in bathrooms than other areas of life b. serve as “self-service” repair shops c. people use bathrooms to “retire” from their front stage presentations d. All of the above.

14. Which of the following has the strongest impact on self-esteem?

a. social comparisons b. reflected appraisals c. psychological centrality d. self-perceptions

15. _____________ are observations of our behavior and its consequences.

a. Reflected appraisals b. Self-perceptions c. Social comparisons d. Psychological centrality

16. What is the best way to build a child’s sense of mastery or efficacy?

a. personal accomplishments b. vicarious experience c. verbal persuasion d. emotional arousal

17. Rosenberg’s early research on mattering found it positively related to _______________ and negatively related to ________________.

a. self-esteem; alcoholism b. depression; self-esteem c. self-esteem; depression d. mastery; depression

Unit 2 Examination

67

PSY 228 Social Psychology

18. Given research and theory in life-course sociology, which of the following groups are most likely to be negatively affected by Hurricane Katrina?

a. a poor White family who survived the storm together b. a poor African-American family who survived the storm together c. a middle-class White man who lost his income and had no access to family or friends during the event d. a middle-class African-American family who survived the storm together

19. Tony and Rose both received word that they were called up for active duty in the military out of the reserve component of the forces. Tony is several years older with a wife and child while Rose is just finishing college. Which dimension of life course sociology best explains why Tony is more likely to be affected by the mobilization than Rose?

a. historical context b. linked lives c. social timing d. agency

20. Which of the following is NOT considered a primary agent of socialization?

a. family b. peers c. schools d. government

21. Elder’s study of the Great Depression generally showed that ______________.

a. all children were negatively affected by growing up in the Great Depression b. only children growing up in poverty were affected by the Great Depression c. the Great Depression had the strongest impact on children’s lives by changing family roles d. both b and c

22. Kohn’s work on class socialization generally showed that middle-class families tend to stress ______________ while working-class families emphasize _______________ in raising their children.

a. autonomy; conformity b. conformity; freedom c. freedom; independence d. conformity; autonomy

Unit 2 Examination

68

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. Rosenthal and Jacobson’s study of classroom interaction is important because:

a. it showed that children are taught to be racist in the classroom. b. it showed that IQ scores could be manipulated based on a group prejudice. c. it showed that children’s IQ scores were not linked to race at all. d. it showed that racist beliefs and values exist in every classroom.

24. Which of the following groups are most prevalent in American schools based on Adler and Adler’s research on peer culture?

a. the popular click b. the wannabes c. middle friendship circles d. social isolates

25. Group processes researcher is important to the study of socialization in what way?

a. It shows the importance of peer-group interactions in socialization processes. b. It shows the importance of family interactions. c. It shows the importance of the media. d. It emphasizes the impact of socialization in group settings.

Unit 2 Examination

69

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Two

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. Describe the concept of “doing gender.” Apply this process to other statuses in society (e.g., race, ethnicity or sexuality).

2. Review the three ways that interactionists view the development and maintenance of stratification in society.

3. Discuss the similarities and differences between identity theory and social identity theory.

You Can Do It

70

PSY 228 Social Psychology

With Unit 2 complete, you are half way through the course.

Take a break and reward yourself

for a job well done!

Objectives

71

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Seven The Social Psychology of Deviance

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Analyze how we define what is normal and what is deviant.

2. Determine how the construction of deviant labels contribute to the development of deviant lifestyles.

3. Judge how structural conditions influence individuals’ decisions to commit deviant acts.

4. Consider how group relationships influence the development of deviance and perceptions of deviance.

• Read pages 190-220 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

72

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter examines major sociological concepts and theories associated with the concept of deviance.

Interactionists generally view deviance as a normal part of the symbolic interaction process. Structural and group-centered views of deviance tend to focus on the social conditions that increase the likelihood of breaking laws. These views come from the larger social science specialty of criminology. This chapter emphasizes the broader sense of deviance in everyday life, before reviewing traditional theories and research on criminal forms of deviance.

Key Terms

73

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Anomie:

Attachment:

Belief:

Covering:

Deviance:

Indexicality:

Labeling theory:

Mores:

Reflexivity:

Social control theory:

Summary

74

PSY 228 Social Psychology

From a social-psychological perspective, deviance is a necessary part of the symbolic interaction process of negotiating social reality. Interactionism assumes that individuals decide to maintain (or break) social norms and standards during every interaction. Deviance allows for change in relationships and society as a whole.

Ethnomethodological perspectives of deviance emphasize how individuals construct and defend their views of social reality—the “real” boundaries of social life. People who can provide better accounts can convince others of those accounts, thus controlling the meaning of good and bad— deviance and conformity—in society.

Labeling theory is a major interactionist perspective of deviance. It is based on the notion that deviance is a consequence of a social process in which a negative characteristic becomes an element of an individual’s identity.

Strain and social control theories apply macrosociological perspectives of deviant behavior, arguing that deviance results from a larger set of societal conditions. Societal norms create limitations to how we can achieve legitimate goals in life. They also give goals that are unattainable for some people.

Groups provide both the motives and the knowledge necessary to commit crime. Differential association theory states that deviance is learned through interaction with others. This theory may help explain how and why people rationalize deviant behavior, especially in white-collar crimes committed by middle- and upper-class people.

Self Test

75

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Some individuals choose a life of deviance because of the satisfaction they derive from the act and deviant lifestyle.

a. True b. False

2. Which of the following statements best describes interactionist perspective(s) on deviance?

a. Deviance is relative to a given group of people or society. b. Deviance is relatively consistent across groups and society. c. What it means to be deviant is constructed through a process of indexicality and reflexivity. d. both a and c

3. According to labeling theory, a primary act of deviance does not always lead to a secondary act of deviance.

a. true b. false

4. According to Edwin Lemert, how is society involved in the deviance process?

a. during primary deviance, when society makes deviance symbolic in nature b. during secondary deviance, when society labels a person as deviant c. during the process of hiring police personnel to put away criminals d. during the process of committing the deviant act and accepting the deviant label

5. Which of the following is true of William Chambliss’ research on the Saints and the Roughnecks?

a. The Saints committed significantly less crime than the Roughnecks but were more likely to get caught. b. The Saints committed significantly less crime than the Roughnecks but only the Roughnecks got caught. c. The Saints committed somewhat higher levels of deviance as the Roughnecks but the Roughnecks were more likely to be caught than the Saints. d. The Roughnecks committed less crime and were rarely caught.

Self Test

76

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. How did Howard Becker’s research contribute to the understanding of deviance?

a. It showed the important role of deviant subcultures in the maintenance of deviant identities. b. It reinforced the relationship between primary and secondary deviance. c. He showed that even drug experiences can be influenced by social conditions. d. All of the above.

Answer Keys

77

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Anomie: A sense of “normlessness” where there is little consensus about what is right and what is wrong.

Attachment: Component of social control theory referring to emotional bonds with other people in society.

Belief: Component of social control theory referring to people’s respect for law and order in society.

Covering: Keeping a known stigma from creating tensions in interaction by downplaying it.

Deviance: Any behavior that departs from accepted practices in a society or group.

Indexicality: The process by which individuals index thoughts, feelings and behaviors from their own perspective.

Labeling theory: Theory that argues deviance is a consequence of a social process in which a negative characteristic becomes an element of an individual’s identity.

Mores: Widely held values and beliefs in a society.

Reflexivity: The process by which individuals think about a behavior within its social context and give meaning to it.

Social control theory: Theory that deviance results when individuals’ bonds with conventional society are weakened in some way.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

78

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. a

2. d

3. a

4. b

5. c

6. d

Notes

79

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

80

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Eight Mental Health and Illness

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Determine what it means to be mentally healthy.

2. Interpret how the definition of mental illness is constructed.

3. List the structural conditions in society that contribute to distress.

4. Identify resources that can buffer stress.

5. Assess how mental health can influence our sense of identity and interactions with others.

• Read pages 221-246 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

81

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter examines mental health as an outcome of social life, influenced by social conditions and as a status characteristic that impacts our social interactions.

Once you read the sociological perspectives on mental health and illness, you may rethink what it means to have psychological problems.

Key Terms

82

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Ambient hazards:

Chronic strains:

Colonization:

Intransigence:

Malaise:

Moderators:

Negative life events:

Sociology of mental health:

Total institutions:

Withdrawal:

Summary

83

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The history of madness and civilization shows that the meaning and treatment of mental illness has changed dramatically over the centuries. In Europe, into the seventeenth century, mental illness was considered similar to other forms of deviance such as criminality.

Sociologists view many manifestations of mental illness to be the result of social conditions that tax individuals’ capacity to manage their lives. The stress process model helps us understand the relationship of negative life events and chronic strains to our mental health and well-being, focusing also on the resources we use to manage those stressors.

Social and economic characteristics are associated with different levels of distress, with social class status a critical factor in the stress process. Other important social characteristics that are implicated in the experience of stressors, the level of resources, and the expressions of distress include gender, age and race/ethnicity.

According to the group processes perspective, people set up different expectations for individuals’ performance depending on their status characteristics. Mental illness may be considered a diffuse status characteristic that influences members’ expectations of the mentally ill in a group setting, as well as the contributions made by those members.

Mental illness may be a form of stigma for individuals, an attribute that is deeply discrediting. Patients housed in mental institutions may try to cope in many different ways, including conversion, intransigence and forms of withdrawal and colonization.

Self Test

84

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Why was 1656 an important date in the history of mental illness according to Michel Foucault?

a. It is the year that psycho-tropic drugs started becoming widely available in Europe. b. It is the year that the “hospital general” opened, marking the beginning of the great confinement of mentally ill people. c. It is the first year in which psychoanalysis was used to treat mentally ill people. d. It was the first year that psychotropic drugs were introduced to the new world.

2. Which of the following forces are associated with putting aspects of social life, including mental illness, under the boundaries of medical professionals?

a. the power and authority of medical professionals b. activities of social movements and interest groups c. directed organization on professional activities d. All of the above are forces affecting medicalization.

3. Which social theorist argued that mental illness is a “myth?”

a. Peter Conrad b. Michel Foucault c. Thomas Szaz d. Herbert Blumer

4. Horwitz and Wakefield’s research focused on trends to increasingly diagnose individuals with clinical depression as the “loss of sadness” in society.

a. True b. False

5. What kind of stressors do college students typically report?

a. adjustment problems b. death of a loved one c. job loss d. fear of professors

Self Test

85

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Which of the following is NOT a measurement of someone’s depression levels?

a. I did not feel like eating. b. I felt depressed. c. I felt everything was an effort. d. All of the above are measures of depression.

Answer Keys

86

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Ambient hazards: Exposure to poor community conditions such as crime, poor living conditions and lack of services.

Chronic strains: Day-to-day role strains that may cause mental health problems over time by the accumulation of small amounts of stress.

Colonization: A way in which patients manage institutionalization by showing that their institution is a desirable place to live.

Intransigence: A way in which patients manage institutionalization by rebelling against the staff expectations.

Malaise: A psychological state of unhappiness associated with living conditions in rural or urban areas.

Moderators: Part of the stress process that includes the personal and social resources that affect the direction or strength of the relationship between a stressor and mental health.

Negative life events: Part of the stress process referring to any event deemed unwanted or stressful to an individual.

Sociology of mental health: The study of the social arrangements that affect mental illness and its consequences.

Total institutions: Places where individuals are isolated from the rest of society.

Withdrawal: A way of managing life in an institution involving the curtailing of interaction with others.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

87

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. b

2. d

3. c

4. a

5. a

6. d

Notes

88

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

89

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Nine Attitudes, Values, and Behaviors

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the nature of an attitude.

2. Evaluate how researchers study attitudes and behaviors.

3. Describe how people construct attitudes.

4. Analyze how attitudes toward other people form in group contexts.

• Read pages 247-276 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

90

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to review the definition and measurement of attitudes and values and to examine research on how people use their time. Specific emphasis is given to prejudicial attitudes and behavior.

In this chapter, after discussing how attitudes are conceptualized, three areas of study within sociological social psychology will be emphasized. First, we will examine how attitudes are constructed from an interactionist perspective. Second, we will examine how attitudes vary by social location. Finally, we will apply the group processes perspective on attitudes, particularly related to attitudes toward other people in groups.

Key Terms

91

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Altruism:

Attitude:

In-groups:

Opinion:

Prejudice:

Prosocial behavior:

Social distance:

Status construction theory:

Time deepening:

Values and beliefs:

Summary

92

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Attitudes incorporate emotional, cognitive and behavioral dimensions—how we feel, think and act toward an object. Attitudes are measured in terms of their direction and strength, though people can also have nonattitudes toward objects. Time-use studies measure behaviors and can be characterized as either productive time, such as work and family care, or free time, including activities such as watching television or socializing.

The relationship between attitudes and behavior, on average, is typically small with an average correlation of 0.38. The weak relationship between attitudes and behavior—and of attitudes with other attitudes—may reflect poor measurement of attitudes or the complexities of attitudes themselves. Interactionist perspectives view attitudes like any other aspect of social life: they are constructed based on our interactions with other people. Our group memberships can have a large influence in our attitudes toward people in other groups based on the relative standing of those groups.

Some attitudes and opinions have been found to vary based on social statuses. Men and women regularly report different attitudes toward some social issues, as do African Americans and whites. Many attitudes toward major social issues have changed over the last half century, indicating that newer cohorts have different values than earlier generations.

Status construction theory posits that individuals develop status value through face-to-face interaction as well as from larger societal prejudices. Social identity theory emphasizes the role of in-groups and out-groups in our attitude development.

Self Test

93

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Your evaluation of a new political candidate may best be described as a(n) _____________ while your overall political ideology may better be described as a(n) _____________.

a. ideology; value b. value; attitude c. attitude; value d. both refer to attitudes

2. In a recent poll, Darnell told the interviewer that he does not care either way in the election. His response reflects what concept?

a. ideology b. values c. attitudes d. nonattitudes

3. Melissa had planned to play 18 holes of golf on the weekend but decided to cut it down to nine holes so that she could go to lunch with her boyfriend. What kind of behavior is she engaging in?

a. time deepening b. time management c. stress processing d. bureaucratic management

4. Americans have more productive time than free time.

a. true b. false

5. The relationship between our attitudes and behavior is typically ____________.

a. strong b. small c. 1 in average correlation d. 0 in average correlation

Self Test

94

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Research generally shows that American attitudes on most major social issues have been pretty stable over the last 30 years.

a. true b. false

Answer Keys

95

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Altruism: Refers to the motivation to help another person.

Attitude: A positive or negative evaluation of an object, a person, a group or an idea.

In-groups: Groups with whom we identify.

Opinion: The cognitive or “thinking” aspect of an attitude.

Prejudice: An attitude of dislike or active hostility toward a particular group in society.

Prosocial behavior: Includes any behavior that benefits another person.

Social distance: How close we feel to other people.

Status construction theory: Group processes theory that posits that individuals develop status value in face-to-face interactions with other people.

Time deepening: When people do more with the time that they have available to them.

Values and beliefs: Strongly held, relatively stable sets of attitudes.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

96

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. a

5. b

6. b

Notes

97

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 3 Examination Instructions

98

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Three Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 3 Examination

99

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Most college students represent which type of person in Merton’s typology of deviance?

a. conformists b. innovators c. ritualists d. retreatists

2. A homeless person who decides to live in the woods is probably best represented by which of the following people using Merton’s typology of deviance?

a. conformists b. innovators c. ritualists d. retreatists

3. Which of the following represent strain according to new interpretations of strain theory?

a. negative relationships with family and friends b. poverty c. unemployment d. All of the above.

4. Which theory of deviance tries to explain why individuals do not commit crime?

a. labeling theory b. strain theory c. social control theory d. theory of differential association

5. Sampson and Laub’s research on delinquent and non-delinquent youths in Boston found delinquency was greater when bonds with which social institutions were weakest?

a. family b. education c. work d. both a and c

Unit 3 Examination

100

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. In high school, Janet rarely got involved in smoking or drinking. In college, Janet found some friends who spent most of their off time consuming large amounts of alcohol and other drugs. Soon, she did the same and did not know anyone who did not spend their time that way. Which theory best explains Janet’s behavior given this limited amount of information?

a. labeling theory b. strain theory c. social control theory d. theory of differential association

7. Which of the following best exemplifies white collar crimes?

a. stealing a purse b. simple assault c. telling a lie to your friend d. embezzling from work

8. Murder would most likely be considered the breaking of a ________________ while picking your nose in public would be breaking a ________________.

a. more; folkway b. folkway; more c. norm; value d. both are mores

9. Scholars contend that ______________ and _______________ are two factors that affect the likelihood of committing a crime.

a. controls; formal sanctions b. certainty; severity c. certainty; informal sanctions d. severity; formal sanctions

10. Given the research on the epidemiology of mental health, which group is most likely to report problems with drinking? Depression?

a. married people; singles b. African-Americans; Latinos c. African-Americans; Whites d. men; women

Unit 3 Examination

101

PSY 228 Social Psychology

11. The stresses associated with living in urban areas come from _____________ while the stresses associated with rural areas tend to be a result of _____________.

a. lack of stimulation; ambient hazards b. ambient hazards; lack of stimulation c. urban malaise; rural malaise d. negative life events; chronic stresses

12. How do group processes scholars examine the concept of mental illness?

a. It is viewed as a status characteristic like race or gender. b. It is viewed as a normal part of group interactions. c. It is viewed as a major area of group research. d. It is viewed as a way for individuals in groups to negotiate identity.

13. Which of the following would be considered a total institution?

a. your college b. a police station c. a prison d. a family household

14. Which sociologist is most associated with the concept of stigma?

a. Erving Goffman b. Georg Simmel c. George Herbert Mead d. Herbert Blumer

15. Goffman’s research on total institutions showed that many patients in insane asylums generally ____________ their roles as patients.

a. resist b. accept c. use colonization to cope with d. None of the above.

16. Which of the following coping strategies emphasize patients’ attempts to rebel against asylum staff?

a. conversion b. intransigence c. withdrawal d. colonization

Unit 3 Examination

102

PSY 228 Social Psychology

17. The loss of a job is represented in which component of the stress process?

a. stressors b. outcomes c. mediators and moderators d. social and economic characteristics

18. LaPiere’s study of prejudice clearly showed that most people _____________.

a. have some prejudice b. act on their prejudices c. do not act on their prejudices d. both a and c

19. Overall, American political attitudes lean on being ______________.

a. very conservative b. moderately conservative c. moderately liberal d. very liberal

20. Which of the following groups could be identified as most liberal in the U.S.?

a. females living in the Midwest b. females living on the West Coast c. males living in the Midwest d. males living on the West Coast

21. Which of the following groups spend the most time on childcare? Which group has shown an increase in time spent with childcare?

a. women for both questions b. men for both questions c. men; women d. women; men

22. Which of the following social theorists is most associated with studying racial prejudice in the United States?

a. George Herbert Mead b. W.E.B. Du Bois c. Talcott Parsons d. William Thomas

Unit 3 Examination

103

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. Based on status construction theory, what would be the best way to get what you want out of a group and leave a positive impression?

a. Act like a very nice person. b. Act like a generous person. c. Act like a majority member of society. d. Act like a high-status person.

24. Willer’s research showing presidential approval ratings increasing after the 9/11 terrorist attacks in the U.S. clearly showed ____________.

a. in-group bias tendencies b. out-group bias tendencies c. prejudicial biases d. ideological alliances

25. The slow treatment of Hurricane Katrina victims was used as an example of ____________ in your text.

a. government inefficiency b. conscious racism c. unconscious racism d. None of the above.

Unit 3 Examination

104

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Three

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. How do symbolic interactionists examine the social construction of mental health? Specifically, review Foucault’s historical analysis of mental illness in western cultures and the medicalization of deviance.

2. Discuss how community conditions can impact individuals’ mental health. Be specific about the role of stressors and resources available under different community conditions (e.g., urban vs. rural; poor vs. middle class).

3. Review the different dimensions of attitudes. How does the complexity in attitudes help to explain the relatively weak relationship between a person’s attitudes and their behaviors?

You Can Do It

105

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 3 is done! You’re close to the finish line and we’re cheering you on to victory!

Objectives

106

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Ten The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Distinguish the components of emotions.

2. Determine how people learn emotions.

3. Consider how identity relates to emotions.

4. Evaluate how our statuses in society affect our uses of emotions.

5. Interpret the norms that govern the use of emotions in different social settings.

6. Predict how group settings affect emotions.

• Read pages 277-306 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

107

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter reviews the many dimensions of sentiment and emotions. It also examines the role of emotions in the development and maintenance of society, as well as the impact of society and culture on the development and expression of emotions.

This chapter will start by reviewing how sociologists study the upward movement of emotions in the creation of society and the social construction of emotions more generally. It will also review the structured nature of emotions and how society shapes the scope and expression of emotions.

Key Terms

108

925 North Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92701

 

www.calcoast.edu Phone: 714-547-9625 Fax: 714-547-5777

12/14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

 

Tracking Your Academic Activities Verifying an accurate course completion time is essential for accreditation. To meet both accreditation requirements and award academic credit, educational institutions must document the total number of hours students spend completing designated academic activities related to their coursework.

The total hours are then translated into academic credit based on a prescribed method of measuring educational attainment known as the Carnegie Unit. 90 hours of student preparation time and 45 hours of student engagement time are required for a 3 credit hour course.

Using the attached form as an example, keep track of the time you spend on each lesson, pre-test, self-test, unit test, writing assignment, reading assignment, outside reading, final examination, etc. You will not be required to turn in the worksheet; however, at the end of the course you will receive a Student Course Survey and the final question will ask how long it took you to complete the course. Your assistance in completing this requirement and providing the university with this valuable data is greatly appreciated.

As you fill out the worksheet, please keep in mind that your Academic Engagement Activities should total approximately 45 hours. Some examples of this type of activity may include:

Lesson Review Exercises

Key Term Reviews

Analysis

Study Guide Review

Writing Assignments

Review Grading Rubric

Unit Examinations

Proctored Final Examination

Course Academic Online Discussions

Student/Instructor Interaction

Documents/Student Resources

As you fill out the Academic Preparation Activities, please keep in mind that these should total approximately 90 hours. Some samples of this type of activity may include:

Pre-Test

Reading Assignments

Key Term Reviews

Studying for Examinations

Writing Assignments

Review Grading Rubric

Study Lesson Review Exercises

Internet/Web Research

Reading Websites

Suggested Outside Reading

 

 

 

Sample Worksheet for Tracking Your Academic Activities

Upon completion of this course, you will be asked to complete a survey. The last question on the survey will ask you the number of hours it took to complete the course. The total hours are then translated into academic credit based on a prescribed method of measuring educational attainment known as the Carnegie Unit. 90 hours of student preparation time and 45 hours of student engagement time (135 hours) are required for a 3 credit hour course.

This worksheet was developed as a tool to help track your time. You are not required to turn it in.

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Totals

Academic Engagement Activities Lesson Review Exercises Key Term Review Exercises Study Guide Review Documents/Student Resources Writing Assignments Review Grading Rubric Unit Examinations Proctored Final Examination Case Studies/Critical Analysis Course Academic Online Discussions Student/Instructor Interactions

Total Academic Engagement required for a 3 unit course = 45 hours

Academic Preparation Activities Pre-Test Reading Assignments Analyze Case Studies/Critical Analysis Key Term Review Exercises Study for Examinations Suggested Outside Readings Web Research Writing Assignments Review Grading Rubric Reading Websites Study Lesson Review Exercises

Total Academic Preparation required for a 3 unit course = 90 hours

Grand total of hours of various learning activities in completing this course

 

 

 

Pre-test Instructions

Thank you for taking the time to complete the required pre-test. The purpose of the pre-test is to measure your knowledge of the subject matter at the beginning of each course.

Please be assured, your score on the pre-test will not be part of your course grade. We do not want you to try to study for it or be worried about doing well on the pre-test. It is simply a measure of your “starting place,” that will be used for improving course content and to meet accreditation requirements.

If you receive your course materials online: • Please log-in to your Coast Connection student portal to complete your pre-test.

If you receive your course materials by mail: • You will receive your answer sheets for the pre-test by mail. • Once you have completed your pre-test, please mail or fax your answer sheet to the University at:

California Coast University 925 N. Spurgeon Street Santa Ana, CA 92701 Fax: 714-547-1451

If you have any questions, please feel free to contact the Student Services Department. Thank you for your cooperation.

 

 

 

Pre-test

ix

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

Which early sociologist emphasized the role of society in the development of the self? 1.

George Herbert Meada. Karl Marxb. Georg Simmerc. Herbert Blumer d.

____________ is the study of the effects of society on social-psychological processes, also 2. known as sociological social psychology.

sociologya. microsociologyb. macrosociologyc. psychology d.

Which of the following is considered a major dimension of group processes? 3.

legitimacya. justiceb. powerc. All of the above. d.

Perspective within symbolic interactionism that focuses on the quantitative study of social 4. interaction processes because of the stable nature of social life.

Chicago Schoola. Indiana Schoolb. Iowa Schoolc. both b and c d.

The research technique called “autoethnograpy” is associated with which social psychological 5. perspective?

symbolic interactiona. social structure and personalityb. group processesc. structural functionalism d.

Participants of an experiment that are not exposed to the independent variable. 6.

control groupa. convenience sampleb. focus groupc. experimental groupd.

 

 

Pre-test

x

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment is based on a study that began in ____________ 7. that was primarily led by ____________.

1957; Sewella. 1962; Nielsonb. 1965; Granovetterc. 1973; Kohn d.

According to research by Lucas and others, how can individuals with lower cultural status best 8. gain status in groups?

Give that person legitimate authority to lead the group.a. The person should focus on the success of the group, rather then her own interests.b. The person should provide a “kick back” to others in a group to get their leadership c. position. both a and b d.

Research in the 1960s showed a considerable overlap in ___________ and ___________ 9. occupations.

fathers’; sons’a. fathers’; daughters’b. mothers’; daughters’c. mothers’; sons’ d.

How did Joanne Nagel explain the increase in the number of people identifying themselves as 10. “American Indian” when the birth rates stayed the same?

Legal changes made scholarships more available to American Indians.a. The development of the “Red Power” movement shifted negative stereotypes of Indians.b. Urbanization made it easier for people to find and interact with other people that had c. some American-Indian heritage. All of the above. d.

The use of narratives and personal-stories is important to the process of _____________. 11.

symbolic interaction processa. identity control theoryb. mpression managementc. All of the above. d.

 

 

Pre-test

xi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Socialization is a process that _____________. 12.

begins at around two years of agea. lasts until the young twentiesb. begins at birth and continues through the life cyclec. both a and b d.

Sampson and Laub’s research on the impact of World War II (WWII) on men’s lives generally 13. showed that _____________.

WWII served as a turning point for all American soldiersa. IQ was the biggest factor in finding work after the warb. WWII only had an impact on soldiers if they served overseasc. most of the positive effects of war on the lives of soldiers came through their experience d. overseas, in-service training and access to programs like the GI Bill

Ausdale and Feagin’s research on children learning racism is important because 14. _______________.

it shows how children use race as a way to differentiate between peersa. it shows that children apply adult biases and racism in their day-to-day interactionsb. it shows that children use their own race as a way to gain acceptance by teachersc. both a and b d.

Most college students represent which type of person in Merton’s typology of deviance? 15.

conformistsa. innovatorsb. ritualistsc. retreatists d.

Component of social control theory referring to emotional bonds with other people in society. 16.

commitmenta. attachmentb. involvementc. None of the above. d.

 

 

Pre-test

xii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Manuel’s job loss really did not bother him because he did not like his boss. However, he 17. really started getting anxious when he stopped getting his paycheck. In this example, the effect of job loss on anxiety is ______________ by loss of income.

distresseda. moderatedb. mediatedc. constrained d.

Exposure to poor community conditions such as crime, poor living conditions and lack of 18. services.

malaisea. intransigenceb. ambient hazardsc. chronic strain d.

Nathan started attending KKK meetings when he saw some of his African-American neighbors 19. getting better jobs than him. Which of the following theories best explains Nathan’s negative attitude toward African Americans?

social distance theorya. symbolic interactionb. Blumer’s theory of group positionc. status construction theory d.

Theory that prejudicial attitudes reflect a group’s position in society. 20.

status construction theorya. theory of group positionb. modified labeling theoryc. colonization theory d.

A positive or negative evaluation of an object, a person or group or an idea. 21.

attitudea. prejudiceb. opinionc. belief d.

 

 

Pre-test

xiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Following Smelser’s value-added theory, why wouldn’t we expect a poor, third-world nation, 22. based on a barter economy, to develop mass hysteria over stock market problems like the U.S. did in the 1920s?

lack of structural conducivenessa. lack of structural strainb. lack of generalized beliefc. action of social control d.

Expectations about when and how to act excited or angry or any other emotion. 23.

emotional cuesa. emotional scriptsb. emotional energiesc. situational cues d.

When large numbers of people become obsessed with something like the purchase of a 24. product or an activity.

maniaa. crazeb. hysteriac. panic d.

A key ingredient of contagious mental unity, referring to situations in which people lose their 25. inhibitions to act and the tempo of their behavior increases.

intensity of behaviora. panicb. irrational behaviorc. hostile outburstsd.

 

 

 

925 North Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92701

Text:

Author(s):

Publisher:

S tu

d y G

u id

e

www.calcoast.edu

Phone: 714-547-9625 Fax: 714-547-5777

Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives

Second Edition, 2011

ISBN-13: 9780205661060

David E. Rohall, Melissa A. Milkie and Jeffrey W. Lucas

Pearson

12/14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

 

Message From the President

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Welcome to California Coast University. I hope you will find this course interesting and useful throughout your career. This course was designed to meet the unique needs of students like you who are both highly motivated and capable of completing a degree program through distance learning.

Our faculty and administration have been involved in distance learning for over forty years and understand the characteristics common to successful students in this unique educational environment.

This course was prepared by CCU faculty members who are not only outstanding educators but who have real world experience. They have prepared these guidelines to help you successfully complete your educational goals and to get the most from your distance learning experience.

Again, we hope that you will find this course both helpful and motivating. We send our best wishes as you work toward the completion of your program.

Sincerely,

Thomas M. Neal President

 

 

 

 

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system without written permission from the publisher, except for the inclusion of brief quotation in review. Copyright © 2014 by California Coast University

 

 

 

Syllabus

xxi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Course Number PSY 228

Course Title Social Psychology

Course Description This course offers students an in-depth look at how people come to understand themselves and others in a social context, with considerable emphasis on sociology’s role in social psychology. Students will be given detailed examples of current research studies relating to each of the topics covered in this course such as stratification, deviance and mental health and illness. Each chapter of the text covered in this course will also introduce students to key sociological social psychologists whose research has made a significant contribution to the field.

Units of Credit 3 Units of Credit

Course Objectives Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to:

• Characterize three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

• Differentiate between qualitative and quantitative research methods.

• Determine how group processes affect identity.

• Recognize important agents of socialization.

• Identify physiological, social and behavioral components of emotions.

Learning Resources Textbook: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives 2nd edition, 2011 David E. Rohall, Melissa A. Milkie, and Jeffrey W. Lucas Pearson

ISBN-13: 9780205661060

All course examinations are based on the contents of the textbook required for this course. To successfully complete the examinations, you will need the textbook. You may rent the textbook from the CCU rental library or you may purchase the textbook from another source.

Although this study guide is developed by California Coast University, it may contain materials provided by the publisher of the textbook.

The Study Guide

The study guide was designed to help you further understand the material in the textbook and master the course content. Each study guide chapter corresponds to a chapter in the textbook.

 

 

Syllabus

xxii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Additional Readings and Online Resources

To help you further understand this subject material, additional readings and/or online resources related to this course are listed in this syllabus.

The Library Information and Resources Network, Inc. (LIRN)

Students are provided access to the Library and Information Resources Network, Inc. (LIRN). LIRN provides a centralized management of electronic information resources that allow students to access multiple research databases through one portal. Detailed information on the Library and Information Resources Network, Inc. is available on the California Coast University website under the Resources Tab. For additional information on using the network, LIRN provides a User Guide to help students search for the needed information. This helpful resource is available on the LIRN website. For information on accessing LIRN, please contact California Coast University – library@calcoast.edu or (714) 547-9625.

Supplementary Materials

Unit Examination Answer Sheets* Final Examination Scheduling Form

*Master of Education and Doctor of Education students will not receive unit exam answer sheets. These programs require written responses only.

Your Course Grade

Your grades on course examinations are determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university uses the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

Your grade in this course will be based on the number of points you earn. Grades are based on the percentage of points you earned out of a total of 500 points:

Four Unit Examinations

100 points each 400 points total 80% of your grade

Final Examination

100 points 100 points total 20% of your grade

 

 

Syllabus

xxiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Mastering the Course Content

In order to successfully complete this course, we recommend that you do the following before beginning:

• Be sure that you have the correct edition of the course textbook. Check the ISBN number of your textbook with the ISBN number listed on the cover page of this study guide.

• Review the table of contents at the end of this syllabus. You will only be responsible for the chapters in the textbook that are listed in the table of contents.

Each study guide contains several components selected and developed by the faculty to help you master the content of the course. Each chapter in the study guide corresponds to a chapter in the textbook. Study guides vary depending on the course, but most will include:

Learning Objectives Overviews Self Tests Summaries Key Terms Critical Analysis Questions (graduate and doctoral students only)

The most efficient way to complete this course is to read the materials in both the study guide and textbook in the sequence in which it appears, generally from beginning to end.

Read the Overviews and Summaries

Before reading a chapter of your textbook, review the corresponding learning objectives, overview, key terms and summary sections in the study guide. These were prepared to give you an overview of the content to be learned.

Review the Self Test

After you have reviewed the study guide summaries, look at the items on the self test. As you identify your areas of relative strength and weakness, you will become more aware of the material you will need to learn in greater depth.

Review the Critical Analysis and/or Case Study Questions (Graduate and Doctoral Students Only) The critical analysis questions are designed to help you gain a deeper understanding and appreciation for the course subject matter. This section will encourage you to give additional thought to the topics discussed in the chapter by presenting vignettes or cases with real world relevance.

 

 

Syllabus

xxiv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Read and Review the Chapter

Once you have the scope and organization of the chapter in mind, turn to the corresponding chapter in the textbook and read the material carefully. Keep the learning objectives, self test, critical analysis questions and/or case study questions in mind as you read.

Highlight important concepts and information in your study guide and write notes in the study guide as you read the textbook. These notes will help you study for the unit and final examinations.

Check Your Mastery of Each Chapter

When you feel that you have mastered the concepts presented in the chapter, complete the study guide self test and critical analysis questions and/or case study questions without referring to the textbook or your notes. Correct your responses using the answer key and solutions guide provided in the study guide. Your results will help you identify any areas you need to review.

Unit Examinations

Each course contains four unit examinations and a final examination. Unit examinations usually consist of 25 objective (multiple choice or true/false) test questions. For Master of Education and Doctor of Education students, unit examinations consist of writing assignments only.

Unit examinations may be found approximately every four to six chapters throughout your study guide. Unit examinations are open-book, do not require a proctor and are not timed. This will allow you to proceed at your own pace.

It is recommended that you check your answers against the material in your textbook for accuracy.

Writing Assignments

Each unit examination includes a written component. This assignment may be in the form of written questions or case study problems. The writing assignment affords the student an opportunity to demonstrate a level of subject mastery beyond the objective unit examinations, which reflects his/her ability to analyze, synthesize, evaluate and apply his/her knowledge. The writing assignment materials are found immediately following each unit examination.

Writing assignments are judged on the quality of the response in regard to the question. Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

 

 

Syllabus

xxv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

• Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages.

• Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages.

• Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Plagiarism consists of taking and using the ideas, writings or inventions of another, without giving credit to that person and presenting it as one’s own. This is an offense that the university takes very seriously. An example of a correctly prepared written response may be found by visiting the Coast Connection student portal.

Citation Styles

The majority of your response should be your own original writing based on what you have learned from the textbook. However, students may also use outside materials if applicable. Be sure to provide a reference (or citation) for any materials used, including the required textbook. The following points are designed to help you understand how to provide proper references for your work:

• References are listed in two places.

• The first reference is briefly listed within your answer. This includes identifying information that directs the reader to your list of references at the end of your writing assignment.

• The second reference is at the end of your work in the list of references section.

• All references cited should provide enough identifying information so that the reader can access the original material.

For more detailed information on the proper use of citations, please refer to the CCU Student Handbook located on the Coast Connection student portal.

Submitting Your Unit Examinations and Writing Assignments via the Internet

Students may access the online testing features via the Coast Connection student portal. Multiple choice unit examinations may be completed and submitted online.

 

 

Syllabus

xxvi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Go to the California Coast University homepage at www.calcoast.edu and click on the student login icon at the upper right hand corner. After logging into your account, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the unit examination. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Writing assignments may be submitted online as well. After logging into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the writing assignment. Here, you will find further information and instructions on how to submit writing assignments through the student portal. Remember to keep a copy of your writing assignments for your own personal records.

Alternatively, if you experience diffulty submitting your writing assignments through the student portal, then you may email your assignments as a Word document attachment to essays@calcoast.edu. When doing so, please adhere to the following guidelines:

• Always submit your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number with your writing assignment.

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

• All responses must be typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size for ease of reading and grading.

Submitting Your Unit Examinations by Mail

Send your completed unit examination along with any writing assignments to the following mailing address:

California Coast University Testing Department 925 N. Spurgeon Street Santa Ana, CA 92701

Requests to retake a unit examination will only be honored if the final exam has NOT been sent.

 

 

Syllabus

xxvii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Students may retake one unit examination per course, free of charge. The cost for each additional, repeated exam will be $90. Payment must be paid in full to the accounting department prior to repeating unit exams.

Please contact Student Services for a repeat unit examination form. You may resubmit your unit examination once the original grade has been cleared from your online degree plan.

Final Examination

Scheduling a Final Examination

Final examination requests can be submitted via U.S. mail, online through the Coast Connection student portal, or by calling the Testing Department at (714) 547-9625.

A final exam scheduling form is located on the last page of this study guide. Please fill out ALL required fields and mail it to the university.

If you would like to request a final exam online, log into the Coast Connection student portal and click on My Academic Plan. Select the course you are working on and submit the Final Exam Request form located at the bottom of the page. ALL INFORMATION MUST BE FILLED IN.

Submitting Your Final Examination

Final Examinations can be submitted by mail, fax or online through the Coast Connection student portal.

After you have completed your exam, you or your proctor can fax it to the Grading Department at (714) 547-1451 or mail it to the university. When faxing exams, please do not resize your fax.

For online submissions, once you have logged into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the final examination. You must input the unique password that was sent to your proctor in order to unlock your final examination questions. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Proctors

The university requires that all final examinations be completed under the supervision of a proctor.

A proctor can be anyone EXCEPT an immediate family member, someone who resides with you or a current/former CCU student.

 

 

Syllabus

xxviii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The purpose of the proctored final examination is to verify that you are, in fact, the person who is enrolled in the course of study. It is also to verify that you are completing the final examination without the aid of any outside assistance.

During the proctored final examination, you may use your textbook and any notes you have taken during the completion of your unit examinations. Your designated proctor will verify your identity and that you have completed the final examination without any outside assistance.

Your Overall Grade Point Average (G.P.A.)

In addition to receiving a passing grade for each course, all students must maintain a required overall G.P.A. in order to graduate. Undergraduate students need an overall G.P.A. of 2.0 (C) on a 4.0 scale. Graduate and doctoral students need an overall G.P.A. of 3.0 (B) on a 4.0 scale.

A = 4 grade points B = 3 grade points C = 2 grade points D = 1 grade point F = 0 grade points

Students who do not meet the overall G.P.A. requirement by the end of their program must pay the current cost of tuition to repeat courses until they improve their overall G.P.A.

Overall course grades of “F” will be displayed on your degree plan and count as 0 units completed. You must pay to retake these courses.

Doctoral students must repeat any courses in which the overall course grade is a “D” or “F”.

Be sure to keep a copy of all work you submit to the university.

 

 

Syllabus

xxix

PSY 228 Social Psychology

If you have any questions about how to proceed through the course or regarding any California Coast University policies and procedures, the easiest way to get help is to send us a message through the student portal, via email, or phone the university.

University office hours are Monday through Friday from 8:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Pacific Standard Time.

California Coast University

925 N. Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, California 92701 Phone: (714) 547-9625 Fax: (714) 547-5777 Test Answer Sheet Fax Line: (714) 547-1451

Email: testing@calcoast.edu

Don’t forget: You are not alone! We are here to help you achieve your dream!

PS Y

22 8

 

 

Syllabus

xxx

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

The learning objectives for this course are listed below:

Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology

1. Define social psychology. 2. Differentiate between macrosociology and microsociology. 3. Compare and contrast sociologists and psychologists’ approach to social psychology. 4. Identify the three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

Chapter 2: Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology

1. Distinguish the major principles of the symbolic interaction perspective. 2. Define what it means to “construct” the world around us. 3. Characterize the social structure and personality perspective. 4. Identify key elements of the group processes perspective. 5. Consider elements of group structure.

Chapter 3: Studying People

1. Become acquainted with the vocabulary of social science research. 2. Differentiate qualitative sociology from quantitative sociology. 3. Determine major forms of qualitative and quantitative research. 4. Assess how social scientists begin to develop a research project.

Chapter 4: The Social Psychology of Stratification

1. Interpret how people construct inequality in society. 2. Determine how structure is linked to interactions. 3. Evaluate how stratification develops in group interaction. 4. Judge how inequalities from society-at-large get reproduced in groups.

Chapter 5: Self and Identity

1. Identify the components of the self. 2. Determine interactionist theories of the self and identity. 3. Characterize three dimensions of the self-concept. 4. Analyze what we know from research on the self-concept. 5. Interpret how group processes affect identity.

 

 

Syllabus

xxxi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter 6: Socialization Over the Life Course

1. Critique how society influences the social construction of the self. 2. Chart the stages involved in developing the self. 3. Name the four elements of life-course sociology. 4. Consider agents of socialization and how they affect our lives. 5. Assess how group processes researchers study socialization.

Chapter 7: The Social Psychology of Deviance

1. Analyze how we define what is normal and what is deviant. 2. Determine how the construction of deviant labels contribute to the development of deviant lifestyles. 3. Judge how structural conditions influence individuals’ decisions to commit deviant acts. 4. Consider how group relationships influence the development of deviance and perceptions of deviance.

Chapter 8: Mental Health and Illness

1. Determine what it means to be mentally healthy. 2. Interpret how the definition of mental illness is constructed. 3. List the structural conditions in society that contribute to distress. 4. Identify resources that can buffer stress. 5. Assess how mental health can influence our sense of identity and interactions with others.

Chapter 9: Attitudes, Values and Behaviors

1. Identify the nature of an attitude. 2. Evaluate how researchers study attitudes and behaviors. 3. Describe how people construct attitudes. 4. Analyze how attitudes toward other people form in group contexts.

Chapter 10: The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion

1. Distinguish the components of emotions. 2. Determine how people learn emotions. 3. Consider how identity relates to emotions. 4. Evaluate how our statuses in society affect our uses of emotions. 5. Interpret the norms that govern the use of emotions in different social settings. 6. Predict how group settings affect emotions.

 

 

Syllabus

xxxii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter 11: Collective Behavior

1. Analyze how crowds contribute to the development of mass hysteria. 2. Identify theories that explain individuals’ behavior in large groups. 3. Decide whether structural conditions affect crowd behaviors. 4. Chart the phases of collective behavior found in large social movements. 5. Evaluate how group and individual motivations interact in social movements.

 

 

Syllabus

xxxiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Best, Joel. 2006. Flavor of the Month: Why Smart People Fall for Fads. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.

Clarke, Lee. 2006. Worst Cases: Terror and Catastrophe in the Popular Imagination. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Gergen, Kenneth J. 2000. The Saturated Self: Dilemmas of Identity in Contemporary Life. New York: Basic Books.

Hertz, Rosanna. 2006. Single by Chance, Mothers by Choice: How Women are Choosing Parenthood without Marriage and Creating the New American Family. New York: Oxford University Press.

Horowitz, Allan V. 2002. Creating Mental Illness. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Lareau, Annette. 2003. Unequal Childhoods: Class, Race and Family Life. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.

Miller, David L. 2000. Introduction to Collective Behavior and Collective Action. Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland.

Polletta, Francesca. 2006. It was Like a Fever: Storytelling in Protest and Politics. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.

Ream, Robert Ketner. 2005. Uprooting Children: Mobility, Social Capital and Mexican American Underachievement. New York: LFB Scholarly Publishing.

Scheff, Thomas J. 1990. Microsociology: Discourse, Emotion and Social Structure. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Swidler, Ann. 2001. Talk of Love: How Culture Matters. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Turner,Ralph H. and Lewis M. Killian. 1972. Collective Behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Zelizer, Viviana. 2005. The Purchase of Intimacy. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

Suggested Readings

 

 

Table of Contents

xxxiv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Syllabus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii-xx

Unit One Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2: Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 3: Studying People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Unit 1 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Unit 1 Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Unit 1 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Unit Two

Chapter 4: The Social Psychology of Stratification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Chapter 5: Self and Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 6: Socialization Over the Life Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Unit 2 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Unit 2 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Unit 2 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Unit Three

Chapter 7: The Social Psychology of Deviance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Chapter 8: Mental Health and Illness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Chapter 9: Attitudes, Values and Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Unit 3 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Unit 3 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Unit 3 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Unit Four Chapter 10: The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Chapter 11: Collective Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Unit 4 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Unit 4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Unit 4 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Final Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Final Exam Scheduling Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

 

 

Objectives

1

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter One Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Define social psychology.

2. Differentiate between macrosociology and microsociology.

3. Compare and contrast sociologists and psychologists’ approach to social psychology.

4. Identify the three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

• Read pages 1-24 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

2

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter is designed to give students an understanding of how sociologists study social psychology and its role in the larger field of sociology. Students will gain an understanding of the distinction between psychology and sociology and be able to explain the major sociological social psychology perspectives.

 

 

Key Terms

3

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Breaching experiments:

Culture:

Ethnomethodology:

Macrosociology:

Organizations:

Psychology:

Roles:

Social norms:

Social psychology:

Sociological imagination:

Symbolic interactionism:

 

 

Summary

4

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociology is the study of society. Sociologists look at society from both the macro and the micro level of analysis. Both psychological and sociological social psychologists study the social contexts of human thoughts, feelings and behaviors. Sociologists, however, also apply the perspectives and methods of the field of sociology to the study of social psychology.

Sociology was first defined in 1838 by French social philosopher, August Comte, who applied the principles of the scientific method to society. Some of the founders of sociological social psychology include George Herbert Mead, W.E.B. Dubois, William Thomas, Charles Horton Cooley and George Simmel. Three major perspectives in sociological social psychology include symbolic interactionism, social structure and personality and group processes.

Sociologists use a tool kit consisting of methods and concepts for studying the role of society in social psychological processes. Their tools include such concepts as statuses, roles, norms and values, culture and social institutions—which they apply to the study of human thoughts—feelings and behavior.

 

 

Self Test

5

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. How can macrosociological perspectives be used to study individual, micro-level interactions?

a. Macrosociological conditions may cause some individual-level conditions to exist in the first place. b. Differences in our macrosociological conditions may change the way we react to life events. c. Life events that affect us the most are often caused by societal conditions. d. All of the above.

2. Janna wanted to study the effects of population size on individuals’ decision to commit suicide. Which social psychological perspective is she most likely to use?

a. psychology b. sociology c. sociological social psychology d. psychological social psychology

3. Which macrosociological perspective views society as social systems composed of parts that serve to keep the system working properly?

a. conflict perspective b. symbolic interactionism c. behavioralism d. structural functionalism

4. Joe started noticing that kids from the upper classes tend to get accepted at better colleges than the kids from the middle and lower classes. His analysis probably comes from which macrosociological perspective?

a. conflict perspective b. symbolic interactionism c. behavioralism d. structural functionalism

 

 

Self Test

6

PSY 228 Social Psychology

5. Sociological social psychology is different from psychological social psychology because:

a. it focuses on the effects of societal conditions on individuals’ thoughts, feelings and behavior. b. it incorporates sociological perspectives and theories to explain individuals’ thoughts, feelings and behavior. c. it is a subfield of sociology, not psychology. d. All of the above.

6. Social psychology is the systematic study of individual thoughts, feelings and behavior in a social context. Which of the following social contexts are more likely to be studied by sociologists than psychologists?

a. small groups b. family interactions c. ethnic groups d. friendship groups

 

 

Answer Keys

7

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Breaching experiments: Experiments that violate the established social order to assess how people construct social reality.

Culture: A society’s set of unique patterns of behavior and beliefs.

Ethnomethodology: A method of studying society through observation of people’s typical day-to-day interactions.

Macrosociology: The study of large-scale social processes.

Organizations: Groups that share a common purpose and contain a formal set of rules and authority structure.

Psychology: The study of human thought processes and behaviors.

Roles: A set of expectations about how to behave in a group.

Social norms: The rules that regulate our behavior in relationships.

Social psychology: The systematic study of people’s thoughts, feelings and behavior in social contexts.

Sociological imagination: The ability to see personal lives in the context of the larger society— its history, culture and social structure.

Symbolic interactionism: A perspective within sociological social psychology that emphasizes the study of how people negotiate the meaning of social life during their interactions with other people.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

8

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. c

3. d

4. a

5. d

6. c

 

 

Notes

9

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

10

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Two Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Distinguish the major principles of the symbolic interaction perspective.

2. Define what it means to “construct” the world around us.

3. Characterize the social structure and personality perspective.

4. Identify key elements of the group processes perspective.

5. Consider elements of group structure.

• Read pages 25-53 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

11

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter provides an extensive review of three major perspectives in sociological social psychology. Students will learn about the history, theoretical and empirical importance of the three perspectives. The chapter begins with an overview of the history and tenets of symbolic interactionism. This is followed by a review of the two major schools of symbolic interactionism.

 

 

Key Terms

12

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency:

Collective behavior:

Components principle:

Frame analysis:

Legitimacy:

Proximity principle:

Psychology principle:

Reference groups:

Social scripts:

Thomas theorem:

 

 

Summary

13

PSY 228 Social Psychology

There are three broad perspectives in sociological social psychology: symbolic interactionism, social structure and personality and group processes.

Symbolic interactionism is the study of how people negotiate meaning during their interactions with others. Within this approach, two schools of symbolic interactionism exists: the Chicago school and the Iowa and Indiana schools.

The social structure and personality perspective emphasizes how social structure affects individuals within a society. Structural forces include status, roles and social networks.

The group processes perspective focuses on interactions that occur within groups, characteristics of groups and relationships among groups. Processes studied by those in the group processes perspective include power, status, justice and legitimacy.

A group’s behavior is influenced by structural conditions including its size and its function. Group research may focus on structure or on other aspects of group processes, such as the relationship between groups and the behavior of larger groups of people called collective behavior.

 

 

Self Test

14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Which social theorists are most associated with the concept of the social construction of reality?

a. Marx and Engels b. Thomas and Thomas c. Berger and Luckmann d. Blumer and Mead

2. A local fraternity developed a special hand signal whenever they see each other on the university quad. In symbolic interactionist terms, this signal has become a ______________ for this group.

a. meaningful exchange b. important source of pride c. language d. symbol

3. Terence started to believe that a friend at work is really a spy from another company, leading him to avoid interactions with that person as much as possible. Ultimately, he treats all interactions with her as suspect, making him reluctant to share any work-related information with her. Which of the following best explains Terence’s behavior?

a. components principle of the social structure and personality perspective b. the Thomas theorem c. the peter principle d. the group processes concept of legitimacy

4. Who coined the expression “symbolic interaction”?

a. Emile Durkheim b. Herbert Blumer c. August Comte d. George Herbert Mead

5. Professor Swanson is studying the meaning of “goodness” using a survey of public attitudes toward the topic. Which school of symbolic interaction is she most likely using in her research?

a. the Chicago school b. the Indiana/Iowa school c. the Swanson school d. the sociological social psychology school

 

 

Self Test

15

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Socioeconomic status (social class), race or ethnicity, gender, age and sexuality all relate to which principle of the social structure and personality perspective?

a. components principle b. proximity principle c. psychology principle d. peter principle

 

 

Answer Keys

16

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency: The ability to act and think independent of the constraints imposed by social conditions.

Collective behavior: The action or behavior of people in groups or crowds.

Components principle: Within the social structure and personality perspective, the ability to identify the elements or components of society most likely to affect a given attitude or behavior.

Frame analysis: The process by which individuals transform the meaning of a situation using basic cognitive structures provided by society.

Legitimacy: The perception that a social arrangement or position is the way that things should be.

Proximity principle: Element of the social structure and personality perspective referring to how people are affected by social structure through their immediate social environments.

Psychology principle: Element of the social structure and personality perspective referring to how individuals internalize proximal experiences.

Reference groups: People we look to as a source of standards and identity.

Social scripts: The appropriate thoughts, feelings and behaviors that should be displayed in a particular social frame.

Thomas theorem: Theorem stating that when people define situations as real, the consequences of those situations become real.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

17

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. b

4. b

5. b

6. a

 

 

Notes

18

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

19

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Three Studying People

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Become acquainted with the vocabulary of social science research.

2. Differentiate qualitative sociology from quantitative sociology.

3. Determine major forms of qualitative and quantitative research.

4. Assess how social scientists begin to develop a research project.

• Read pages 54-82 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

20

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to provide an overview of the techniques sociological social psychologists use to study people, emphasizing theoretical differences on the appropriate means of obtaining social-psychological data.

 

 

Key Terms

21

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Categorical variables:

Ethnography:

Focus groups:

Indices:

Interval variables:

Ordinal variables:

Population:

Qualitative research methods:

Reliability:

Snowball sample:

Validity:

 

 

Summary

22

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Several concepts apply to almost any research project. Researchers regularly use terms such as theory, research questions or hypotheses and variables to describe ways of studying people.

Researchers employ qualitative and quantitative techniques to study human subjects. Qualitative research methods include field research and in-depth interviews. Quantitative methods include survey research and experiments.

The steps in developing most research projects include assessing the theory and literature of the research topic, developing research questions or specific hypotheses, choosing the appropriate research methods, conducting data analysis and reporting the results.

Although there is no rule about whether a particular theory should or should not use quantitative or qualitative methods to study people, symbolic interactionists have traditionally relied more on qualitative methods. Many researchers try to employ multiple methods of studying a particular phenomenon.

 

 

Self Test

23

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. How are social theories and hypotheses related to one another?

a. Theories include general statements about social relationships while hypotheses are more specific statements about how variables will relate to one another. b. Theories are an extension of hypotheses. c. Theories are used to develop hypotheses. d. both a and c

2. Samantha started a research project predicting that men would be more supportive of using military forces to go to war than women. In this case, attitudes toward going to war is what kind of variable?

a. index b. scale c. independent variable d. dependent variable

3. In preparing for a survey of country club members, Donella asked the manager of the club for a list of members. This list refers to a _______________.

a. random sample b. probability sample c. sample list d. sampling frame

4. Which of the following types of samples is considered most representative of any given population?

a. random sample b. convenience sample c. snowball sample d. both b and c

5. An instructor asks you to develop a study of the homeless that will provide a great deal of depth into what it is like to be homeless. Given this mandate, which of the following methods would most likely give the information you need for such a project?

a. ethnography b. focus group c. survey d. experiment

 

 

Self Test

24

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. A sample in which any available person is included in the study is known as a ____________ sample.

a. true b. convenience c. odd d. real time

 

 

Answer Keys

25

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Categorical variables: Measures for which the possible responses have no particular order.

Ethnography: A form of field research that includes a descriptive analysis of a group or organization.

Focus groups: Semistructured interviews with small groups of people.

Indices: A series of related questions designed to measure a concept such as mastery.

Interval variables: A type of variable in which the difference between any two adjacent values is the same.

Ordinal variables: Variables for which response categories are ordered but the distances between adjacent categories are not necessarily equal.

Population: The larger group of people about whom a researcher seeks to draw conclusions.

Qualitative research methods: In-depth, semi-structured modes of observation or interviewing of subjects.

Reliability: When a study yields the same results using the same techniques and data.

Snowball sample: Samples in which informants provide contact information about other people who share some of the characteristics necessary for a study.

Validity: How valid or accurate the findings of the study are.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

26

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. a

3. d

4. a

5. a

6. b

 

 

Notes

27

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 1 Examination Instructions

28

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit One Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

29

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Which early sociologists emphasized the role of society in the development of the self?

a. George Herbert Mead b. Karl Marx c. Georg Simmer d. Herbert Blumer

2. Which sociological social psychology perspective emphasizes the role of meaning and the social construction of meaning in the study of social psychology?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

3. Which sociological social psychology perspective is likely to emphasize the importance of roles and statuses in the study of social psychology?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

4. Which sociological social psychology perspective is likely to emphasize the importance of interactions within groups?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

5. The sociological imagination is associated with which social theorists?

a. Emile Durkheim b. Max Weber c. C. Wright Mills d. Auguste Comte

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

30

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. The expectation to look someone in the eye when talking with them refers to a _______________.

a. norm b. role c. value d. belief

7. Derek’s job as a supervisor refers to his relative _______________ in the company while the expectations for how to behave on the job refers to his ________________.

a. role; status b. job; role c. status; role d. status; job

8. Which institution regulates sexual relations and child-rearing in society?

a. economy and work b. politics c. family d. religion

9. Which institution refers to the rituals and beliefs regarding sacred things?

a. economy and work b. politics c. family d. religion

10. Franklin did not think much about how the economy or society affects his life until he lost his job. Franklin’s internal processesing of his job loss best represents which principle from the social structure and personality perspective?

a. components principle b. psychology principle c. propinquity principle d. proximity principle

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

31

PSY 228 Social Psychology

11. After Donna cheated on her most recent exam, she starts to feel a sense of guilt, making her reconsider whether she wants to do it again. Donna’s feelings of guilt can be considered a ______________, according to the social structure and personality perspective, leading her to rethink her future behaviors.

a. social more b. social norm c. social force d. social fear

12. Which of the following is considered a major dimension of group processes?

a. power b. justice c. legitimacy d. All of the above.

13. Janelle wants to study how and why some people are able to tell other people what to do while others can not. What aspect of group processes is she studying?

a. power b. status c. justice d. legitimacy

14. What social psychologist is most associated with the concepts of dyads and triads?

a. Emile Durkheim b. August Comte c. Herbert Blumer d. Georg Simmel

15. The difference between dyads and triads is important because:

a. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially increases the number of relationships available in an interaction. b. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially decreases the amount of intimacy possible in a group. c. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially decreases the number of relationships available in an interaction. d. both a and b

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

32

PSY 228 Social Psychology

16. A group of friends getting together for dinner represents a ______________ group while a group of people at your work represents a _____________ group.

a. reference; primary b. primary; reference c. primary; secondary d. secondary; reference

17. Bob goes to the beach on a hot summer day and is surprised when he observes a group of people dressed in formal wear sitting in beach chairs amongst sunbathers. Bob was surprised because the ______________ did not meet his expectations for that situation.

a. situation b. social scripts c. frame d. All of the above.

18. ____________ require the researcher to weigh individual items differently.

a. Indices b. Scales c. both a and b d. None of the above.

19. Which of the following methods is MOST likely to show causation?

a. ethnography b. focus group c. survey d. experiment

20. An instructor developed a study to determine ways of producing more participation in his classes. In one class she provided free donuts everyday of class while in another she gave them nothing. She had her assistant takes notes on the number of comments and questions students made in each class. Which of these classes represent the control group?

a. the class not given the donuts b. the class given the donuts c. other classes that are not part of the experiment d. both classes would be considered the control group

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

33

PSY 228 Social Psychology

21. ____________ developed the field of operant conditioning; much of his work relied on experiments using rats and pigeons.

a. Carl Jung b. B.F. Skinner c. Sigmund Freud d. Joseph Berger

22. At what step in the research process does the researcher employ the library and other resources and conduct a literature review?

a. step 1 b. step 2 c. step 3 d. step 4

23. At what step in the research process does the researcher actually go out and collect data?

a. step 1 b. step 2 c. step 3 d. step 4

24. Research conducted by interviews, participant observations and ethnographies is referred to as what kind of research?

a. quantitative b. qualitative c. breeching d. experimental

25. Social scientists must always be concerned with _______________ and _______________ to accurately capture the phenomena in question.

a. truth and reliability b. reliability and validity c. truth and validity d. probability and validity

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

34

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit One

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

1. Think about the concept of poverty. How would a macro-level sociologist study this concept differently than a micro-level sociologist?

2. Discuss how symbolic interactionists define the concept of society. What role do symbols and language play in the development of society?

3. Discuss the ways that group structures can impact interaction in groups. Specifically, examine how group size (i.e., dyads and triads) and types of groups (e.g., primary groups) impact interactions between people.

 

 

You Can Do It

35

PSY 228 Social Psychology

You have just completed Unit 1 of this course.

You are off to a great start!

Keep up the good work!

 

 

Objectives

36

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Four The Social Psychology of Stratification

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Interpret how people construct inequality in society.

2. Determine how structure is linked to interactions.

3. Evaluate how stratification develops in group interaction.

4. Judge how inequalities from society-at-large get reproduced in groups.

• Read pages 84-120 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

37

PSY 228 Social Psychology

One of the major ways that sociological social psychology is different from its counterpart in psychology is its greater emphasis on the role of stratification in social psychological processes. There are several ways in which stratification affects our lives and relationships. Symbolic interactionists sometimes address how we create and maintain definitions of different classes of people. Social structure and personality scholars emphasize how structural conditions, often related to work, education, or family settings affect people. Those in the group processes perspective examine how stratification systems from the larger society become reproduced in groups. We will use each of these perspectives to examine how stratification processes occur in our day-to-day lives.

 

 

Key Terms

38

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Borderwork:

Direct exchanges:

Doing difference:

Feedback loop:

Intersectionality:

Routinization:

Social capital:

Social exchange theory:

Social stratification:

Substantive complexity:

 

 

Summary

39

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Three ways that interactionist researchers focus on stratification processes include examining how social structure shapes who we interact with, accounting for inequalities in the content of interactions, acknowledging how people with certain status characteristics have more power in terms of role taking and examining people’s power to define situations and define themselves.

The Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment traces the relationships among individual’s class position, their abilities and their long-term occupational outcomes.

The effect of networking among individuals from different groups creates a variety of outcomes for those involved, depending on the status of the individuals in a group as well as the status of the group itself.

Values serve as a guide for making decisions about the future, ultimately affecting the types of jobs we attain and class position we have in life, producing a feedback loop between our personality and social positions.

Group processes contribute to our understanding of structural developments by studying the exchanges among individuals in groups. Exchange processes lend themselves to the development of status structures because people bring different types and quantities of resources into the process. People who contribute more to a group or have more resources generally achieve a higher status in groups.

 

 

Self Test

40

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Shirley Brice Heath’s research on the socialization of status and race among Whites and Blacks in the rural-Piedmont Carolinas is important because:

a. it shows how social class influences how we interact with other people. b. it shows how historical and social conditions can affect our day-to-day interactions. c. it shows that White people have an advantage over African-Americans in getting into good colleges. d. both a and b

2. Which perspective in sociological social psychology is more likely to examine the effects of stratification in day-to-day exchanges between people?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

3. Which of the following is the best example of “borderwork”?

a. a group of teenage boys smoking cigarettes in a high-school parking lot b. a group of girls at a slumber party c. a group of boys and girls playing “kiss and chase” d. a group of boys and girls being lectured to about poor behavior

4. Elijah Anderson’s study of inner city norms and values show that:

a. inner city residents tend to be submissive in the face of their poverty. b. inner city residents are taught to develop a toughness to deal with challenges of poverty and poor living conditions. c. most inner city residents accept most traditional norms from the larger culture. d. both b and c

5. An intersectional approach is essential to understanding the dynamics of stratification because it allows us to the look at the multitude of ways in which our statuses and positions affect our experience.

a. True b. False

 

 

Self Test

41

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. According to the Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment, how does our social background influence our occupational status in life?

a. It shows that our social background influences with whom we spend time. b. It shows that our social background influences our mental abilities. c. It shows that our social background affects our educational levels. d. All of the above.

 

 

Answer Keys

42

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Borderwork: The creation of social and physical boundaries between boys and girls.

Direct exchanges: Exchanges between two people.

Doing difference: Any way in which inequality in any form (race, class or gender) is perpetuated during our interactions as people are held accountable to the social categories in which they are a part.

Feedback loop: A process in which our class position influences the development of values that, in turn, influences the type of job we seek.

Intersectionality: The idea that race, gender and class statuses are not separate but interlocking systems of inequality.

Routinization: Part of Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment referring to the level of repetitiveness found on the job.

Social capital: Trust and support found in relationships with other people.

Social exchange theory: Theory based on the premise that individuals enter into relationships that provide some benefit to them and end or leave relationships that do not provide some sort of reward.

Social stratification: The ways in which individuals or groups are ranked in society.

Substantive complexity: Part of Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment referring to how complicated the actual work is on the job.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

43

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. a

3. c

4. d

5. a

6. d

 

 

Notes

44

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

45

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Five Self and Identity

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the components of the self.

2. Determine interactionist theories of the self and identity.

3. Characterize three dimensions of the self-concept.

4. Analyze what we know from research on the self-concept.

5. Interpret how group processes affect identity.

• Read pages 121-149 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

46

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter reviews the different ways that sociologists study the meaning of the concepts of self and identity and the structural and group conditions that impact the self. It will address the components of the self; interactionist theories of the self and identity; three dimensions of self- concept; and how group processes affect identity.

 

 

Key Terms

47

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect-control theory:

Backstage:

Dramaturgical sociology:

Emotional arousal:

I:

Identity:

Mastery:

Mattering:

Me:

Personal characteristics:

Psychological centrality:

Self:

Self-enhancement:

Self-esteem:

Self-indication:

Verbal persuasion:

Vicarious experience:

 

 

Summary

48

PSY 228 Social Psychology

From a symbolic interactionist perspective, the self is a process in which we construct a sense of who we are. We use symbols and language to communicate with other people, but we also use language to think internally. The self includes a dialogue between the “I” and the “Me”.

Identity includes our social categories and personal characteristics. Identity theory examines how social conditions affect the salience of identities and thus our behavior. Affect-control theory incorporates emotions in identity processes.

The self-concept refers to all our thoughts and feelings about ourselves as an object, often studied in the form of identities, self-esteem, mattering and mastery. Class, race, and gender are important social statuses that influence our self-development over time. Social identity theory argues that people define and evaluate themselves in terms of the groups they belong to, including one’s race and gender.

 

 

Self Test

49

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. What part of the self-concept is mastery?

a. the self b. self-identities c. self-evaluations d. self indication

2. Debating what other people are thinking about you in a public setting is best represented by what term?

a. self-concept b.self-identities c. self-evaluations d. self indication

3. According to Mead, which aspect of our self is out in public, constantly processing new information related to the self?

a. the “I” b. the “Me” c. self-concept d. self indication

4. Which of the following is NOT an element of identity?

a. social categories b. role identities c. personal characteristics d. self attitudes

5. Being a Canadian applies to which aspect of identity?

a. social categories b. role identities c. personal characteristics d. self attitudes

 

 

Self Test

50

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Identity theory comes from which social-psychological perspective?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functional

 

 

Answer Keys

51

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect-control theory: The theory that incorporates elements of symbolic interactionism and identity theory to explain the role of emotion in identity processes.

Backstage: Part of dramaturgical sociology referring to the region where we relax our impression management efforts.

Dramaturgical sociology: The study of how we present ourselves, playing roles and managing impressions during interactions with other people.

Emotional arousal: Inferences about our abilities based on our emotional states that we use to build our sense of mastery.

I: The part of the self that is active, engaging in interactions with others.

Identity: Our internalized, stable sense of who we are.

Mastery: Our perceptions of our ability to control things important to us.

Mattering: Our sense that we are important to other people in the world.

Me: The part of the self that includes an organized set of attitudes toward the self.

Personal characteristics: Anything we use to describe our individual nature.

Psychological centrality: Our ability to shift aspects of the self to become more or less important to our overall self-concept.

Self: A process in which we construct a sense of who we are through interaction with others.

Self-enhancement: In social identity theory, the process through which we make comparisons that favor our own groups.

Self-esteem: The positive or negative evaluation of our self as an object.

Self-indication: The use of symbols and language to communicate internally.

Verbal persuasion: Information from others about our abilities used to derive mastery.

Vicarious experience: A way of building mastery by seeing other people perform tasks; it shows us that the task is accomplishable.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

52

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. d

5. a

6. a

 

 

Notes

53

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

54

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Six Socialization Over the Lifer Course

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Critique how society influences the social construction of the self.

2. Chart the stages involved in developing the self.

3. Name the four elements of life-course sociology.

4. Consider agents of socialization and how they affect our lives.

5. Assess how group processes researchers study socialization.

• Read pages 150-187 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

55

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to define socialization and the life course and the major theories and research associated with these ideas.

 

 

Key Terms

56

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency:

Birth cohort:

Contextual dissonance:

Gender socialization:

Idiocultures:

Life course:

Life events:

Linked lives:

Looking-glass self:

Pygmalion effect:

Socialization:

 

 

Summary

57

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociologists study socialization processes at every stage of development from childhood to late adulthood. The self develops through a symbolic process. An essential aspect of self-development is the ability to take the role of the other.

The sociology of childhood focuses on how children are active participants in creating culture. Life-course sociology is based on the notion that humans adapt to different situations based on their social and historical location, relative to different events and cultural “moments.” Four major themes in life-course sociology include historical context, timing, linked lives and agency.

Sociologists view agents of socialization as mediators of the larger society rather than direct causes of socialization. The family is considered the primary agent of socialization because children are raised from infancy with parents and often siblings. Schools and peers are two other important agents of socialization.

The group processes perspective often examines the role of socialization after it has occurred, reviewing, for instance, how expectations about gender or race affect group interactions.

 

 

Self Test

58

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Sammy is using dolls to represent people in a doll house. Based on Mead’s theory of child development, at what stage of development is she?

a. preparatory stage b. play stage c. game stage d. toy stage

2. A little boy playing in a baseball team is probably in which stage of development using Mead’s typology?

a. preparatory stage b. play stage c. game stage d. toy stage

3. Which social psychologist is associated with the looking-glass self?

a. George Herbert Mead b. Michel Foucault c. Georg Simmel d. Charles Horton Cooley

4. Studies have shown that factors such as parenting style, resources and status can dramatically affect the outcomes of children of divorced parents.

a. True b. False

5. Studies have found that father’s household labor participation has little effect on their son’s future household labor sharing.

a. True b. False

 

 

Self Test

59

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Several studies have shown that there is a correlation between watching violent television and aggressive behavior.

a. True b. False

 

 

Answer Keys

60

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency: An aspect of life-course sociology referring to our ability to improvise roles, make decisions and control our destiny.

Birth cohort: A group of people born around the same time period.

Contextual dissonance: A feeling that minority members of a group have because they are different from the majority members.

Gender socialization: Learning expectations about how to behave related to one’s gender.

Idiocultures: A system of knowledge, beliefs, behaviors and customs shared by an interacting group to which members refer and employ as a basis of further interaction.

Life course: The process of change from infancy to late adulthood resulting from personal and societal events and from transitions into and out of social roles.

Life events: Event that can cause significant changes in the course of our lives.

Linked lives: An aspect of life-course sociology referring to our relationships with other people.

Looking-glass self: How the self relies on imagined responses of others in its development.

Pygmalion effect: When children develop according to expectations of a group or society.

Socialization: The ways in which individuals attempt to align their own thoughts, feelings, and behavior to fit into a group or society.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

61

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. b

2. c

3. d

4. a

5. b

6. a

 

 

Notes

62

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 2 Examination Instructions

63

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Two Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

64

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. How does Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment link economic status, job characteristics and personality?

a. People with lower economic status tend to find work in jobs that have more supervision. b. People with lower economic status tend to find work in jobs that require less intellectual flexibility. c. People with less intellectual flexibility tend to seek jobs that are routinized. d. All of the above.

2. Bradley, a student at Big U, regularly seeks advice from his professor and mentor, Janet. According to exchange theory, what kind of exchange is most likely motivating Janet to stay in this relationship?

a. a direct exchange b. a reciprocal exchange c. a generalized exchange d. All of the above.

3. What was being exchanged among crew members and the captain in George Homan’s research about exchange processes on small warships?

a. support b. caring c. listening d. All of the above.

4. Who gets the most status in groups based on Bales’ research in social exchanges in small groups?

a. Those who are perceived as the best managers. b. Those who are perceived as being the smartest. c. Those who contribute the most to the group. d. Those who listen and care the most for the other members.

5. Which of the following best reflects a task group used to study status processes in groups?

a. A group of students at a class lecture. b. A group of people waiting in line to pay at a store. c. A group of citizens meeting to resolve a local problem. d. All of the above.

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

65

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Why are weak ties so important for finding work?

a. People with whom we have weak ties live and work in circles outside our own. b. People with whom we have weak ties tend to have better jobs. c. People with whom we have weak ties aren’t biased against us in the job market. d. People with whom we have weak ties provide training in getting better jobs.

7. According to status characteristics theory, gender, race and education levels are examples of _______________.

a. diffuse status characteristics b. specific status characteristics c. roles d. class positions

8. According to status characteristics theory, skill at playing basketball would be considered _______________.

a. diffuse status characteristics b. specific status characteristics c. roles d. class positions

9. People are ______________ aware of the status hierarchies that develop in task-oriented groups.

a. almost always b. usually not c. always d. None of the above.

10. Which theorist is most associated with impression management?

a. Auguste Comte b. Emile Durkheim c. Herbert Blumer d. Erving Goffman

11. According to dramaturgical sociology, what area of identity is associated with hanging out with friends while watching television?

a. front stage b. back stage c. performance stage d. informal groups

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

66

PSY 228 Social Psychology

12. A first date would most likely be associated with what area of identity?

a. front stage b. back stage c. performance stage d. informal groups

13. Spencer Cahill’s research on “bathroom behavior” clearly showed that _______________.

a. people act very differently in bathrooms than other areas of life b. serve as “self-service” repair shops c. people use bathrooms to “retire” from their front stage presentations d. All of the above.

14. Which of the following has the strongest impact on self-esteem?

a. social comparisons b. reflected appraisals c. psychological centrality d. self-perceptions

15. _____________ are observations of our behavior and its consequences.

a. Reflected appraisals b. Self-perceptions c. Social comparisons d. Psychological centrality

16. What is the best way to build a child’s sense of mastery or efficacy?

a. personal accomplishments b. vicarious experience c. verbal persuasion d. emotional arousal

17. Rosenberg’s early research on mattering found it positively related to _______________ and negatively related to ________________.

a. self-esteem; alcoholism b. depression; self-esteem c. self-esteem; depression d. mastery; depression

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

67

PSY 228 Social Psychology

18. Given research and theory in life-course sociology, which of the following groups are most likely to be negatively affected by Hurricane Katrina?

a. a poor White family who survived the storm together b. a poor African-American family who survived the storm together c. a middle-class White man who lost his income and had no access to family or friends during the event d. a middle-class African-American family who survived the storm together

19. Tony and Rose both received word that they were called up for active duty in the military out of the reserve component of the forces. Tony is several years older with a wife and child while Rose is just finishing college. Which dimension of life course sociology best explains why Tony is more likely to be affected by the mobilization than Rose?

a. historical context b. linked lives c. social timing d. agency

20. Which of the following is NOT considered a primary agent of socialization?

a. family b. peers c. schools d. government

21. Elder’s study of the Great Depression generally showed that ______________.

a. all children were negatively affected by growing up in the Great Depression b. only children growing up in poverty were affected by the Great Depression c. the Great Depression had the strongest impact on children’s lives by changing family roles d. both b and c

22. Kohn’s work on class socialization generally showed that middle-class families tend to stress ______________ while working-class families emphasize _______________ in raising their children.

a. autonomy; conformity b. conformity; freedom c. freedom; independence d. conformity; autonomy

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

68

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. Rosenthal and Jacobson’s study of classroom interaction is important because:

a. it showed that children are taught to be racist in the classroom. b. it showed that IQ scores could be manipulated based on a group prejudice. c. it showed that children’s IQ scores were not linked to race at all. d. it showed that racist beliefs and values exist in every classroom.

24. Which of the following groups are most prevalent in American schools based on Adler and Adler’s research on peer culture?

a. the popular click b. the wannabes c. middle friendship circles d. social isolates

25. Group processes researcher is important to the study of socialization in what way?

a. It shows the importance of peer-group interactions in socialization processes. b. It shows the importance of family interactions. c. It shows the importance of the media. d. It emphasizes the impact of socialization in group settings.

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

69

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Two

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. Describe the concept of “doing gender.” Apply this process to other statuses in society (e.g., race, ethnicity or sexuality).

2. Review the three ways that interactionists view the development and maintenance of stratification in society.

3. Discuss the similarities and differences between identity theory and social identity theory.

 

 

You Can Do It

70

PSY 228 Social Psychology

With Unit 2 complete, you are half way through the course.

Take a break and reward yourself

for a job well done!

 

 

Objectives

71

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Seven The Social Psychology of Deviance

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Analyze how we define what is normal and what is deviant.

2. Determine how the construction of deviant labels contribute to the development of deviant lifestyles.

3. Judge how structural conditions influence individuals’ decisions to commit deviant acts.

4. Consider how group relationships influence the development of deviance and perceptions of deviance.

• Read pages 190-220 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

72

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter examines major sociological concepts and theories associated with the concept of deviance.

Interactionists generally view deviance as a normal part of the symbolic interaction process. Structural and group-centered views of deviance tend to focus on the social conditions that increase the likelihood of breaking laws. These views come from the larger social science specialty of criminology. This chapter emphasizes the broader sense of deviance in everyday life, before reviewing traditional theories and research on criminal forms of deviance.

 

 

Key Terms

73

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Anomie:

Attachment:

Belief:

Covering:

Deviance:

Indexicality:

Labeling theory:

Mores:

Reflexivity:

Social control theory:

 

 

Summary

74

PSY 228 Social Psychology

From a social-psychological perspective, deviance is a necessary part of the symbolic interaction process of negotiating social reality. Interactionism assumes that individuals decide to maintain (or break) social norms and standards during every interaction. Deviance allows for change in relationships and society as a whole.

Ethnomethodological perspectives of deviance emphasize how individuals construct and defend their views of social reality—the “real” boundaries of social life. People who can provide better accounts can convince others of those accounts, thus controlling the meaning of good and bad— deviance and conformity—in society.

Labeling theory is a major interactionist perspective of deviance. It is based on the notion that deviance is a consequence of a social process in which a negative characteristic becomes an element of an individual’s identity.

Strain and social control theories apply macrosociological perspectives of deviant behavior, arguing that deviance results from a larger set of societal conditions. Societal norms create limitations to how we can achieve legitimate goals in life. They also give goals that are unattainable for some people.

Groups provide both the motives and the knowledge necessary to commit crime. Differential association theory states that deviance is learned through interaction with others. This theory may help explain how and why people rationalize deviant behavior, especially in white-collar crimes committed by middle- and upper-class people.

 

 

Self Test

75

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Some individuals choose a life of deviance because of the satisfaction they derive from the act and deviant lifestyle.

a. True b. False

2. Which of the following statements best describes interactionist perspective(s) on deviance?

a. Deviance is relative to a given group of people or society. b. Deviance is relatively consistent across groups and society. c. What it means to be deviant is constructed through a process of indexicality and reflexivity. d. both a and c

3. According to labeling theory, a primary act of deviance does not always lead to a secondary act of deviance.

a. true b. false

4. According to Edwin Lemert, how is society involved in the deviance process?

a. during primary deviance, when society makes deviance symbolic in nature b. during secondary deviance, when society labels a person as deviant c. during the process of hiring police personnel to put away criminals d. during the process of committing the deviant act and accepting the deviant label

5. Which of the following is true of William Chambliss’ research on the Saints and the Roughnecks?

a. The Saints committed significantly less crime than the Roughnecks but were more likely to get caught. b. The Saints committed significantly less crime than the Roughnecks but only the Roughnecks got caught. c. The Saints committed somewhat higher levels of deviance as the Roughnecks but the Roughnecks were more likely to be caught than the Saints. d. The Roughnecks committed less crime and were rarely caught.

 

 

Self Test

76

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. How did Howard Becker’s research contribute to the understanding of deviance?

a. It showed the important role of deviant subcultures in the maintenance of deviant identities. b. It reinforced the relationship between primary and secondary deviance. c. He showed that even drug experiences can be influenced by social conditions. d. All of the above.

 

 

Answer Keys

77

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Anomie: A sense of “normlessness” where there is little consensus about what is right and what is wrong.

Attachment: Component of social control theory referring to emotional bonds with other people in society.

Belief: Component of social control theory referring to people’s respect for law and order in society.

Covering: Keeping a known stigma from creating tensions in interaction by downplaying it.

Deviance: Any behavior that departs from accepted practices in a society or group.

Indexicality: The process by which individuals index thoughts, feelings and behaviors from their own perspective.

Labeling theory: Theory that argues deviance is a consequence of a social process in which a negative characteristic becomes an element of an individual’s identity.

Mores: Widely held values and beliefs in a society.

Reflexivity: The process by which individuals think about a behavior within its social context and give meaning to it.

Social control theory: Theory that deviance results when individuals’ bonds with conventional society are weakened in some way.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

78

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. a

2. d

3. a

4. b

5. c

6. d

 

 

Notes

79

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

80

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Eight Mental Health and Illness

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Determine what it means to be mentally healthy.

2. Interpret how the definition of mental illness is constructed.

3. List the structural conditions in society that contribute to distress.

4. Identify resources that can buffer stress.

5. Assess how mental health can influence our sense of identity and interactions with others.

• Read pages 221-246 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

81

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter examines mental health as an outcome of social life, influenced by social conditions and as a status characteristic that impacts our social interactions.

Once you read the sociological perspectives on mental health and illness, you may rethink what it means to have psychological problems.

 

 

Key Terms

82

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Ambient hazards:

Chronic strains:

Colonization:

Intransigence:

Malaise:

Moderators:

Negative life events:

Sociology of mental health:

Total institutions:

Withdrawal:

 

 

Summary

83

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The history of madness and civilization shows that the meaning and treatment of mental illness has changed dramatically over the centuries. In Europe, into the seventeenth century, mental illness was considered similar to other forms of deviance such as criminality.

Sociologists view many manifestations of mental illness to be the result of social conditions that tax individuals’ capacity to manage their lives. The stress process model helps us understand the relationship of negative life events and chronic strains to our mental health and well-being, focusing also on the resources we use to manage those stressors.

Social and economic characteristics are associated with different levels of distress, with social class status a critical factor in the stress process. Other important social characteristics that are implicated in the experience of stressors, the level of resources, and the expressions of distress include gender, age and race/ethnicity.

According to the group processes perspective, people set up different expectations for individuals’ performance depending on their status characteristics. Mental illness may be considered a diffuse status characteristic that influences members’ expectations of the mentally ill in a group setting, as well as the contributions made by those members.

Mental illness may be a form of stigma for individuals, an attribute that is deeply discrediting. Patients housed in mental institutions may try to cope in many different ways, including conversion, intransigence and forms of withdrawal and colonization.

 

 

Self Test

84

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Why was 1656 an important date in the history of mental illness according to Michel Foucault?

a. It is the year that psycho-tropic drugs started becoming widely available in Europe. b. It is the year that the “hospital general” opened, marking the beginning of the great confinement of mentally ill people. c. It is the first year in which psychoanalysis was used to treat mentally ill people. d. It was the first year that psychotropic drugs were introduced to the new world.

2. Which of the following forces are associated with putting aspects of social life, including mental illness, under the boundaries of medical professionals?

a. the power and authority of medical professionals b. activities of social movements and interest groups c. directed organization on professional activities d. All of the above are forces affecting medicalization.

3. Which social theorist argued that mental illness is a “myth?”

a. Peter Conrad b. Michel Foucault c. Thomas Szaz d. Herbert Blumer

4. Horwitz and Wakefield’s research focused on trends to increasingly diagnose individuals with clinical depression as the “loss of sadness” in society.

a. True b. False

5. What kind of stressors do college students typically report?

a. adjustment problems b. death of a loved one c. job loss d. fear of professors

 

 

Self Test

85

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Which of the following is NOT a measurement of someone’s depression levels?

a. I did not feel like eating. b. I felt depressed. c. I felt everything was an effort. d. All of the above are measures of depression.

 

 

Answer Keys

86

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Ambient hazards: Exposure to poor community conditions such as crime, poor living conditions and lack of services.

Chronic strains: Day-to-day role strains that may cause mental health problems over time by the accumulation of small amounts of stress.

Colonization: A way in which patients manage institutionalization by showing that their institution is a desirable place to live.

Intransigence: A way in which patients manage institutionalization by rebelling against the staff expectations.

Malaise: A psychological state of unhappiness associated with living conditions in rural or urban areas.

Moderators: Part of the stress process that includes the personal and social resources that affect the direction or strength of the relationship between a stressor and mental health.

Negative life events: Part of the stress process referring to any event deemed unwanted or stressful to an individual.

Sociology of mental health: The study of the social arrangements that affect mental illness and its consequences.

Total institutions: Places where individuals are isolated from the rest of society.

Withdrawal: A way of managing life in an institution involving the curtailing of interaction with others.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

87

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. b

2. d

3. c

4. a

5. a

6. d

 

 

Notes

88

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

89

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Nine Attitudes, Values, and Behaviors

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the nature of an attitude.

2. Evaluate how researchers study attitudes and behaviors.

3. Describe how people construct attitudes.

4. Analyze how attitudes toward other people form in group contexts.

• Read pages 247-276 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

90

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to review the definition and measurement of attitudes and values and to examine research on how people use their time. Specific emphasis is given to prejudicial attitudes and behavior.

In this chapter, after discussing how attitudes are conceptualized, three areas of study within sociological social psychology will be emphasized. First, we will examine how attitudes are constructed from an interactionist perspective. Second, we will examine how attitudes vary by social location. Finally, we will apply the group processes perspective on attitudes, particularly related to attitudes toward other people in groups.

 

 

Key Terms

91

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Altruism:

Attitude:

In-groups:

Opinion:

Prejudice:

Prosocial behavior:

Social distance:

Status construction theory:

Time deepening:

Values and beliefs:

 

 

Summary

92

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Attitudes incorporate emotional, cognitive and behavioral dimensions—how we feel, think and act toward an object. Attitudes are measured in terms of their direction and strength, though people can also have nonattitudes toward objects. Time-use studies measure behaviors and can be characterized as either productive time, such as work and family care, or free time, including activities such as watching television or socializing.

The relationship between attitudes and behavior, on average, is typically small with an average correlation of 0.38. The weak relationship between attitudes and behavior—and of attitudes with other attitudes—may reflect poor measurement of attitudes or the complexities of attitudes themselves. Interactionist perspectives view attitudes like any other aspect of social life: they are constructed based on our interactions with other people. Our group memberships can have a large influence in our attitudes toward people in other groups based on the relative standing of those groups.

Some attitudes and opinions have been found to vary based on social statuses. Men and women regularly report different attitudes toward some social issues, as do African Americans and whites. Many attitudes toward major social issues have changed over the last half century, indicating that newer cohorts have different values than earlier generations.

Status construction theory posits that individuals develop status value through face-to-face interaction as well as from larger societal prejudices. Social identity theory emphasizes the role of in-groups and out-groups in our attitude development.

 

 

Self Test

93

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Your evaluation of a new political candidate may best be described as a(n) _____________ while your overall political ideology may better be described as a(n) _____________.

a. ideology; value b. value; attitude c. attitude; value d. both refer to attitudes

2. In a recent poll, Darnell told the interviewer that he does not care either way in the election. His response reflects what concept?

a. ideology b. values c. attitudes d. nonattitudes

3. Melissa had planned to play 18 holes of golf on the weekend but decided to cut it down to nine holes so that she could go to lunch with her boyfriend. What kind of behavior is she engaging in?

a. time deepening b. time management c. stress processing d. bureaucratic management

4. Americans have more productive time than free time.

a. true b. false

5. The relationship between our attitudes and behavior is typically ____________.

a. strong b. small c. 1 in average correlation d. 0 in average correlation

 

 

Self Test

94

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Research generally shows that American attitudes on most major social issues have been pretty stable over the last 30 years.

a. true b. false

 

 

Answer Keys

95

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Altruism: Refers to the motivation to help another person.

Attitude: A positive or negative evaluation of an object, a person, a group or an idea.

In-groups: Groups with whom we identify.

Opinion: The cognitive or “thinking” aspect of an attitude.

Prejudice: An attitude of dislike or active hostility toward a particular group in society.

Prosocial behavior: Includes any behavior that benefits another person.

Social distance: How close we feel to other people.

Status construction theory: Group processes theory that posits that individuals develop status value in face-to-face interactions with other people.

Time deepening: When people do more with the time that they have available to them.

Values and beliefs: Strongly held, relatively stable sets of attitudes.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

96

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. a

5. b

6. b

 

 

Notes

97

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 3 Examination Instructions

98

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Three Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

99

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Most college students represent which type of person in Merton’s typology of deviance?

a. conformists b. innovators c. ritualists d. retreatists

2. A homeless person who decides to live in the woods is probably best represented by which of the following people using Merton’s typology of deviance?

a. conformists b. innovators c. ritualists d. retreatists

3. Which of the following represent strain according to new interpretations of strain theory?

a. negative relationships with family and friends b. poverty c. unemployment d. All of the above.

4. Which theory of deviance tries to explain why individuals do not commit crime?

a. labeling theory b. strain theory c. social control theory d. theory of differential association

5. Sampson and Laub’s research on delinquent and non-delinquent youths in Boston found delinquency was greater when bonds with which social institutions were weakest?

a. family b. education c. work d. both a and c

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

100

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. In high school, Janet rarely got involved in smoking or drinking. In college, Janet found some friends who spent most of their off time consuming large amounts of alcohol and other drugs. Soon, she did the same and did not know anyone who did not spend their time that way. Which theory best explains Janet’s behavior given this limited amount of information?

a. labeling theory b. strain theory c. social control theory d. theory of differential association

7. Which of the following best exemplifies white collar crimes?

a. stealing a purse b. simple assault c. telling a lie to your friend d. embezzling from work

8. Murder would most likely be considered the breaking of a ________________ while picking your nose in public would be breaking a ________________.

a. more; folkway b. folkway; more c. norm; value d. both are mores

9. Scholars contend that ______________ and _______________ are two factors that affect the likelihood of committing a crime.

a. controls; formal sanctions b. certainty; severity c. certainty; informal sanctions d. severity; formal sanctions

10. Given the research on the epidemiology of mental health, which group is most likely to report problems with drinking? Depression?

a. married people; singles b. African-Americans; Latinos c. African-Americans; Whites d. men; women

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

101

PSY 228 Social Psychology

11. The stresses associated with living in urban areas come from _____________ while the stresses associated with rural areas tend to be a result of _____________.

a. lack of stimulation; ambient hazards b. ambient hazards; lack of stimulation c. urban malaise; rural malaise d. negative life events; chronic stresses

12. How do group processes scholars examine the concept of mental illness?

a. It is viewed as a status characteristic like race or gender. b. It is viewed as a normal part of group interactions. c. It is viewed as a major area of group research. d. It is viewed as a way for individuals in groups to negotiate identity.

13. Which of the following would be considered a total institution?

a. your college b. a police station c. a prison d. a family household

14. Which sociologist is most associated with the concept of stigma?

a. Erving Goffman b. Georg Simmel c. George Herbert Mead d. Herbert Blumer

15. Goffman’s research on total institutions showed that many patients in insane asylums generally ____________ their roles as patients.

a. resist b. accept c. use colonization to cope with d. None of the above.

16. Which of the following coping strategies emphasize patients’ attempts to rebel against asylum staff?

a. conversion b. intransigence c. withdrawal d. colonization

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

102

PSY 228 Social Psychology

17. The loss of a job is represented in which component of the stress process?

a. stressors b. outcomes c. mediators and moderators d. social and economic characteristics

18. LaPiere’s study of prejudice clearly showed that most people _____________.

a. have some prejudice b. act on their prejudices c. do not act on their prejudices d. both a and c

19. Overall, American political attitudes lean on being ______________.

a. very conservative b. moderately conservative c. moderately liberal d. very liberal

20. Which of the following groups could be identified as most liberal in the U.S.?

a. females living in the Midwest b. females living on the West Coast c. males living in the Midwest d. males living on the West Coast

21. Which of the following groups spend the most time on childcare? Which group has shown an increase in time spent with childcare?

a. women for both questions b. men for both questions c. men; women d. women; men

22. Which of the following social theorists is most associated with studying racial prejudice in the United States?

a. George Herbert Mead b. W.E.B. Du Bois c. Talcott Parsons d. William Thomas

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

103

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. Based on status construction theory, what would be the best way to get what you want out of a group and leave a positive impression?

a. Act like a very nice person. b. Act like a generous person. c. Act like a majority member of society. d. Act like a high-status person.

24. Willer’s research showing presidential approval ratings increasing after the 9/11 terrorist attacks in the U.S. clearly showed ____________.

a. in-group bias tendencies b. out-group bias tendencies c. prejudicial biases d. ideological alliances

25. The slow treatment of Hurricane Katrina victims was used as an example of ____________ in your text.

a. government inefficiency b. conscious racism c. unconscious racism d. None of the above.

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

104

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Three

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. How do symbolic interactionists examine the social construction of mental health? Specifically, review Foucault’s historical analysis of mental illness in western cultures and the medicalization of deviance.

2. Discuss how community conditions can impact individuals’ mental health. Be specific about the role of stressors and resources available under different community conditions (e.g., urban vs. rural; poor vs. middle class).

3. Review the different dimensions of attitudes. How does the complexity in attitudes help to explain the relatively weak relationship between a person’s attitudes and their behaviors?

 

 

You Can Do It

105

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 3 is done! You’re close to the finish line and we’re cheering you on to victory!

 

 

Objectives

106

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Ten The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Distinguish the components of emotions.

2. Determine how people learn emotions.

3. Consider how identity relates to emotions.

4. Evaluate how our statuses in society affect our uses of emotions.

5. Interpret the norms that govern the use of emotions in different social settings.

6. Predict how group settings affect emotions.

• Read pages 277-306 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

107

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter reviews the many dimensions of sentiment and emotions. It also examines the role of emotions in the development and maintenance of society, as well as the impact of society and culture on the development and expression of emotions.

This chapter will start by reviewing how sociologists study the upward movement of emotions in the creation of society and the social construction of emotions more generally. It will also review the structured nature of emotions and how society shapes the scope and expression of emotions.

 

 

Key Terms

108

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect:

Cybernetic approach:

Distributive justice:

Edgework:

Emotional cues:

Emotional intelligence:

Emotional scripts:

Emotions:

Interaction ritual:

Mood:

Potency:

Procedure justice:

Sentiment:

Transient sentiments:

 

 

Summary

109

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociological perspectives on emotion emphasize the cybernetic approach to the study of emotions: emotions radiate upward from individual-level interactions to maintain social structures as well as downward when social structure helps to shape our emotions.

Symbolic interactionists believe we learn emotions like we learn about other aspects of social life: through interaction with other people. The sociocentric model of emotional socialization argues that the primary means of learning about emotions comes from social instruction, whereas affect control theory argues that people use emotions as signals as to how well they are performing their role in a given situation.

People use emotional scripts and cues to help use and manage emotions in day-to-day life. The theory of interaction ritual chains emphasizes the role of emotions in maintaining macrosociological social institutions.

The power-status approach to emotions says that emotions result from real, anticipated, imagined or recollected outcomes of social interactions. The gain or loss of power and status are primary ways in which our position affects our emotional life.

The norms that govern our emotional lives are called feeling rules. We may receive “rule reminders” from friends and family when we do not “feel” appropriately. Emotion work refers to the generation of prescribed emotion to meet the demands of a job. The commodification of emotions is associated with the concept of “McDonaldization.”

The socioemotional economy is a system for regulating emotional resources among people that links individuals into larger networks of people. Sympathy is an important example of this economy. Emotion culture refers to a society’s expectation about how to experience different emotions. According to the group processes perspective, there are at least two ways in which exchange processes may affect your emotions: the concern over getting what is fair out of the group and the way in which distributions are made in a group. Emotions can also affect status relationships in group exchanges such that higher-status people are freer to express certain emotions than lower status people.

 

 

Self Test

110

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Based on Thoit’s treatment of emotions, which of the following is NOT a dimension of emotion?

a. situational cues b. physiological changes c. an arousal d. an emotion label

2. The moment that society gives meaning to an emotion it becomes a _____________.

a. sentiment b. feeling c. mood d. affect

3. Clem has been feeling sad all day long. What term best describes his emotional state?

a. sentiment b. feeling c. mood d. affect

4. Which of the following would be considered a primary emotion?

a. anger b. fear c. depression d. All of the above are primary emotions.

5. Non-verbal behaviors play a lesser role than verbal communication does.

a. True b. False

6. The meanings of emotions are stable over a life course.

a. True b. False

 

 

Self Test

111

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Answer Keys

112

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect: An evaluative component of an emotion.

Cybernetic approach: The study of emotion that assumes that social conditions shape our emotions; and in turn, our emotions act to maintain social structures.

Distributive justice: In exchange theory, it is the belief about the fairness of what people get.

Edgework: Thrill-seeking behaviors designed to produce intense emotions.

Emotional cues: Information about when and what emotions are appropriate in a given social setting.

Emotional intelligence: Our ability to control and employ emotions in our social environments.

Emotional scripts: Expectations about when and how to act excited, angry, sad and so on.

Emotions: Feelings that incorporate situational cures, physiological changes, expressive gestures and an emotion label.

Interaction ritual: The exchange of symbols and emotion between individuals essential to maintaining society.

Mood: A diffuse emotional state that lasts a relatively long period of time.

Potency: Element of affect control theory referring to how a person’s sentiment toward an object is powerful or powerless.

Procedure justice: In exchange theory, it is the beliefs about the fairness of the methods used to make distributions.

Sentiment: A feeling that has been given meaning by society.

Transient sentiments: Sentiments unique to specific interactions.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

113

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. a

3. c

4. d

5. b

6. b

 

 

Notes

114

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

115

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Eleven Collective Behavior

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Analyze how crowds contribute to the development of mass hysteria.

2. Identify theories that explain individuals’ behavior in large groups.

3. Decide whether structural conditions affect crowd behaviors.

4. Chart the phases of collective behavior found in large social movements.

5. Evaluate how group and individual motivations interact in social movements.

• Read pages 307-336 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

116

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to review theories of collective behavior and the current research on behaviors that occur during collective events.

This chapter will review theories and research related to the concepts of collective behavior, collective action and social movements.

 

 

Key Terms

117

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Acting crowds:

Collective identity:

Craze:

Expressive crowd:

Hostile outbursts:

Mass:

Milling:

Routine dispersal:

Social dilemma:

Structural strain:

 

 

Summary

118

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Traditional theories of collective behavior, collective action and social movements emphasize the ways in which crowds transform the individuals acting in them, turning them into irrational beings. Rational choice perspectives on collective action emphasize the idea that people in groups are purposive in their decisions and actions in everyday life, including group events.

Research on protests in the United States over the last decades has shown that most protests and marches are small in nature. Very few marches go over 100,000 participants and very few involve civil disobedience. However, only the largest protests receive much media attention.

Sociological social psychologists also study how we develop collective memories, examining the conditions that produce spontaneous thoughts or feelings at the same time; how conditions coalesce to bring us to believe something is true; what an event means to a people; and, finally, how we categorize those memories with other historical events.

Research evidence in the group processes tradition indicates that people will be likely to form coalitions when they are faced with large power disparities. The free-rider problem and social dilemmas are typical problems found in behavior within and between groups.

 

 

Self Test

119

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. The March for Life protest against abortion is probably best described as a ______________.

a. social action b. collective action c. social movement d. collective movement

2. Gustave LeBon’s book, The Crowd, is based on observations of which of the following events?

a. the Russian Revolution b. The French Revolution c. WWII d. the Chinese Revolution

3. Which theorist is most associated with mass hysteria theory?

a. Carl Couch b. Herbert Blumer c. Neil Smelser d. Gustave LeBon

4. According to Blumer’s theory of circular reaction, when do individuals in crowds start to lose control and act without much rationality?

a. during the milling phase when individuals are encouraged to act out against authorities b. during the interpretation phase when individuals are encouraged to act out against authorities c. during the interpretation phase when individuals lose their ability to communicate about appropriate behavior d. during the milling phase when individuals lose their ability to communicate about appropriate behavior

5. Research on crowd and protest behaviors has generally supported LeBon and other scholars from the mass hysteria tradition.

a. true b. false

 

 

Self Test

120

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Guilford went to a protest against the school’s smoking policy because he truly believed that it was wrong and should be changed. He had been a leader in the anti-smoking group for a number of years prior to the march. According to Turner and Killian, which kind of participant is he?

a. ego-involved participant b. concerned participant c. insecure participant d. curiosity seeker

 

 

Answer Keys

121

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Acting crowds: Groups of people with a focus,or goal who act with unity to achieve the goal.

Collective identity: An individual’s sense of connection with a larger community or group.

Craze: When large numbers of people become obsessed with something like the purchase of a product or an activity.

Expressive crowd: Crowd that lacks a goal and is primarily a setting for emotional release, which often occurs through rhythmical actions such as applause, dancing or singing.

Hostile outbursts: Any type of mass violence or killings.

Mass: Anonymous individuals from many social strata that are loosely organized.

Milling: Part of the circular reaction process in which individuals at an event anxiously move about in a seemingly aimless and random fashion.

Routine dispersal: A dispersal in which participants leave a gathering in a rational, orderly fashion.

Social dilemma: A situation whereby if every person acts in his or her own best interests, the results will be bad for the group.

Structural strain: Element of value-added theory stating there must be some level of conflict over some issue or problem to initiate collective action.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

122

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. b

3. d

4. c

5. b

6. a

 

 

Notes

123

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 4 Examination Instructions

124

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Four Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

125

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Which of the following jobs is most likely to have an extensive set of feeling rules?

a. a stay-at-home mother b. a cashier at McDonalds c. a plumber d. a farmer

2. Zurcher’s concept of emotional scripts most closely resembles what other concept reviewed in this chapter?

a. emotion rules b. emotional energy c. feeling rules d. sentiment

3. Milan was a little perturbed when his boss refused to accept some flowers he had brought as a sign of his sadness over the loss of her sister. Which sympathy rule did his boss break?

a. Do not make false claims of sympathy. b. Do not claim too much sympathy. c. Claim some sympathy. d. Reciprocate to other for their gift of sympathy.

4. Based on Lofland’s analysis of the role of culture in the expression of grief in society, which of the following places would have the hardest time coping with the loss of a child?

a. modern day Asia b. modern day Europe c. modern day Ethiopia d. modern day America

5. Swidler’s research on love in American culture revealed what?

a. Americans find it hard to fall in love. b. Americans initiate relationships based on a mythical view of emotional bonding between lovers. c. Americans use a more realistic view of love to sustain relationships on a day-to-day basis. d. both b and c

 

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

126

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. According to exchange theory and research, which of the following situations is most likely to produce a positive emotion?

a. an exchange in which people get the amount equal to their position in the group b. an exchange in which you get as much as you gave c. an exchange in which you get less than you gave d. All of these exchanges will produce a positive emotion.

7. According to the exchange theory, what sentiment is EXPECTED when you get more out of an exchange than you give?

a. sadness b. guilt c. happiness d. joy

8. According to research and theory of group processes, how does power in relationships affect our emotions?

a. Relationships characterized as having equal power engender positive emotion. b. Power makes us feel guilty in social exchanges. c. Relationships characterized as having unequal power engender positive emotion. d. Power gives us a positive feeling only when we deserve it during social exchanges.

9. Secondary emotions are ________________.

a. learned through socialization b. similar to sentiments c. social emotions d. All the above.

10. Your feeling that a district attorney has a lot of power refer to which dimension of affect control theory?

a. evaluation b. potency c. activity d. strength

11. What emotion did wheelchair users employ when managing interactions with “stand-up” people in Cahill and Eggleston’s study of people with a handicap?

a. fear b. humor c. love d. anger

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

127

PSY 228 Social Psychology

12. Your friend, Chloe, goes through a bad break-up and her cat runs away all in the same week. When you and Chloe are out to dinner one night you run into Sarah, a good friend of yours from school. Chloe expresses the tragedies that have befallen her the past week to Sarah who proceeds to listen and then changes the conversation. Once back to your dinner, Chloe expresses her dismay and hurt that Sarah did not seem concerned about her break-up or loss of her cat. Sarah is upset because her ______________ were not met.

a. social scripts b. emotional scripts c. sentiments d. emotions

13. According to Randall Collins’ theory of interaction ritual chains, what role does emotion play in the maintenance of society?

a. Emotional energies provide the reason for maintaining interactions in society. b. Emotional scripts provide information about how to behave in society. c. Emotions give us cues as to whether we are performing our roles in society adequately. d. Emotions exist within a series of “feeling rules” about how to behave in society.

14. Which of the following jobs does NOT demand high levels of emotion work.

a. waitress b. teacher c. customer service agent d. None of the above.

15. Steve turned to the people around him for help in deciding how to act at a local protest. According to perception control theory, what form of perception control is he using?

a. independent instruction b. interdependent instruction c. organizational instruction d. interactional instruction

16. What is the best predictor of an individual participating in a march or a riot?

a. her structural position b. her concern over a social condition in society c. her being asked to go to the event d. her access to resources

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

128

PSY 228 Social Psychology

17. The vast majority of protests and other collective events have which kind of dispersal?

a. routine dispersal b. emergency dispersal c. coerced dispersal d. active dispersal

18. Which of the following are typical behaviors at a large protest march?

a. People break off into a series of smaller groups. b. People form lines to access various facilities. c. People develop arcs and circles around speakers. d. All of the above are typical behaviors.

19. ____________ is thrill-seeking behaviors designed to produce intense emotions.

a. Potency b. Edgework c. Cyberneticism d. None of the above.

20. Enduring emotional meanings in a given society is known as _____________.

a. fundamental sentiments b. transient sentiments c. emotional cues d. emotion work

21. The debate as to whether or not you should stop and look at an accident while driving by, possibly slowing down the traffic behind you, is an example of a ______________.

a. social dilemma b. free rider problem c. group conformity d. mass hysteria

22. Public radio—radio stations that rely, in part, on listener support to stay in business—run the risk of what problem?

a. a social dilemma b. the free rider problem c. group conformity d. mass hysteria

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

129

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. The use of _______________ is important to the forming of collective memories.

a. storytelling b. collective behavior c. collective emotion d. framing

24. According to emergent norm theory, the _______________ is the type of person who participates in the group out of curiosity.

a. ego-involved participant b. curiosity seeker c. concerned participant d. insecure participant

25. Phase of collective behavior referring to the factors that bring people together into the same place at the same time.

a. gathering phase b. homogeneity of mood c. assembling phase d. interpretive phase

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

130

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Four

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. Review the theory of interaction ritual chains. How do our emotions contribute to the maintenance of society according to this theory?

2. Review the role of emotions in exchange processes. What conditions are most likely to produce positive emotions? Negative emotions? What role does power and status play in the development of emotions in exchange relationships?

3. Apply group processes theory and research related to coalitions to explain the development of social movements more broadly. First, define the concept of coalition. Second, describe how coalitions work and the conditions that make them successful. Third, apply this information to explain how and why people initiate social movements in society.

 

 

You Can Do It

131

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Congratulations! You have completed Unit 4.

Now let’s sharpen our pencils for the Final Exam.

We are confident you will do well.

 

 

Final Examination Instructions

132

PSY 228 Social Psychology

About the Final Examination

After you have successfully completed all of the unit examinations and writing assignments, it will be time for you to take the final examination.

The final examination will be provided by student services only after you have completed all four unit examinations and submitted all four writing assignments.

Scheduling a Final Examination

Final examination requests can be submitted via U.S. mail, online through the Coast Connection student portal, or by calling the Testing Department at (714) 547-9625.

A final exam scheduling form is located on the last page of this study guide. Please fill out ALL required fields and mail it to the university.

If you would like to request a final exam online, log into the Coast Connection student portal and click on My Academic Plan. Select the course you are working on and submit the Final Exam Request form located at the bottom of the page. ALL INFORMATION MUST BE FILLED IN.

Final exams will only be sent if you have completed all four unit examinations and submitted all four writing assignments.

Submitting Your Final Examination

Final Examinations can be submitted by mail, fax or online through the Coast Connection student portal.

After you have completed your exam, you or your proctor can fax it to the Grading Department at (714) 547-1451 or mail it to the university. When faxing exams, please do not resize your fax.

For online submissions, once you have logged into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the final examination. You must input the unique password that was sent to your proctor in order to unlock your final examination questions. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

 

 

Final Exam Scheduling Form

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The university requires all final examinations to be completed under the supervision of a proctor. Please provide information on your designated proctor. ALL information must be filled in; otherwise, your request will not be processed.

Date _____________________________ Student I.D. ______________________________________________

Student Name ________________________________________________________________________________

Address ______________________________________________________________________________________

City __________________________________________________ State _________________________________

Zip Code ________________ Country ____________________________________________________________

E-Mail Address _______________________________________________________________________________

Daytime Telephone _____________________________ Evening Telephone _____________________________

Course Information:

Course Number ___________ Course Title _______________________________________________________

Please send the Final Examination to:

Proctor’s Name _______________________________________________________________________________

Proctor’s Relationship to Student ________________________________________________________________

Street Address _______________________________________________________________________

City ______________________________ State _________________ Zip Code __________________________

Country __________________________________ Email Address ___________________________

Daytime Telephone _________________________ Evening Telephone _________________________________

Student’s Signature ________________________________________________________________________

133

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect:

Cybernetic approach:

Distributive justice:

Edgework:

Emotional cues:

Emotional intelligence:

Emotional scripts:

Emotions:

Interaction ritual:

Mood:

Potency:

Procedure justice:

Sentiment:

Transient sentiments:

Summary

109

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociological perspectives on emotion emphasize the cybernetic approach to the study of emotions: emotions radiate upward from individual-level interactions to maintain social structures as well as downward when social structure helps to shape our emotions.

Symbolic interactionists believe we learn emotions like we learn about other aspects of social life: through interaction with other people. The sociocentric model of emotional socialization argues that the primary means of learning about emotions comes from social instruction, whereas affect control theory argues that people use emotions as signals as to how well they are performing their role in a given situation.

People use emotional scripts and cues to help use and manage emotions in day-to-day life. The theory of interaction ritual chains emphasizes the role of emotions in maintaining macrosociological social institutions.

The power-status approach to emotions says that emotions result from real, anticipated, imagined or recollected outcomes of social interactions. The gain or loss of power and status are primary ways in which our position affects our emotional life.

The norms that govern our emotional lives are called feeling rules. We may receive “rule reminders” from friends and family when we do not “feel” appropriately. Emotion work refers to the generation of prescribed emotion to meet the demands of a job. The commodification of emotions is associated with the concept of “McDonaldization.”

The socioemotional economy is a system for regulating emotional resources among people that links individuals into larger networks of people. Sympathy is an important example of this economy. Emotion culture refers to a society’s expectation about how to experience different emotions. According to the group processes perspective, there are at least two ways in which exchange processes may affect your emotions: the concern over getting what is fair out of the group and the way in which distributions are made in a group. Emotions can also affect status relationships in group exchanges such that higher-status people are freer to express certain emotions than lower status people.

Self Test

110

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Based on Thoit’s treatment of emotions, which of the following is NOT a dimension of emotion?

a. situational cues b. physiological changes c. an arousal d. an emotion label

2. The moment that society gives meaning to an emotion it becomes a _____________.

a. sentiment b. feeling c. mood d. affect

3. Clem has been feeling sad all day long. What term best describes his emotional state?

a. sentiment b. feeling c. mood d. affect

4. Which of the following would be considered a primary emotion?

a. anger b. fear c. depression d. All of the above are primary emotions.

5. Non-verbal behaviors play a lesser role than verbal communication does.

a. True b. False

6. The meanings of emotions are stable over a life course.

a. True b. False

Self Test

111

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Answer Keys

112

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect: An evaluative component of an emotion.

Cybernetic approach: The study of emotion that assumes that social conditions shape our emotions; and in turn, our emotions act to maintain social structures.

Distributive justice: In exchange theory, it is the belief about the fairness of what people get.

Edgework: Thrill-seeking behaviors designed to produce intense emotions.

Emotional cues: Information about when and what emotions are appropriate in a given social setting.

Emotional intelligence: Our ability to control and employ emotions in our social environments.

Emotional scripts: Expectations about when and how to act excited, angry, sad and so on.

Emotions: Feelings that incorporate situational cures, physiological changes, expressive gestures and an emotion label.

Interaction ritual: The exchange of symbols and emotion between individuals essential to maintaining society.

Mood: A diffuse emotional state that lasts a relatively long period of time.

Potency: Element of affect control theory referring to how a person’s sentiment toward an object is powerful or powerless.

Procedure justice: In exchange theory, it is the beliefs about the fairness of the methods used to make distributions.

Sentiment: A feeling that has been given meaning by society.

Transient sentiments: Sentiments unique to specific interactions.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

113

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. a

3. c

4. d

5. b

6. b

Notes

114

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

115

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Eleven Collective Behavior

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Analyze how crowds contribute to the development of mass hysteria.

2. Identify theories that explain individuals’ behavior in large groups.

3. Decide whether structural conditions affect crowd behaviors.

4. Chart the phases of collective behavior found in large social movements.

5. Evaluate how group and individual motivations interact in social movements.

• Read pages 307-336 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

116

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to review theories of collective behavior and the current research on behaviors that occur during collective events.

This chapter will review theories and research related to the concepts of collective behavior, collective action and social movements.

Key Terms

117

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Acting crowds:

Collective identity:

Craze:

Expressive crowd:

Hostile outbursts:

Mass:

Milling:

Routine dispersal:

Social dilemma:

Structural strain:

Summary

118

925 North Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92701

 

www.calcoast.edu Phone: 714-547-9625 Fax: 714-547-5777

12/14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

 

Tracking Your Academic Activities Verifying an accurate course completion time is essential for accreditation. To meet both accreditation requirements and award academic credit, educational institutions must document the total number of hours students spend completing designated academic activities related to their coursework.

The total hours are then translated into academic credit based on a prescribed method of measuring educational attainment known as the Carnegie Unit. 90 hours of student preparation time and 45 hours of student engagement time are required for a 3 credit hour course.

Using the attached form as an example, keep track of the time you spend on each lesson, pre-test, self-test, unit test, writing assignment, reading assignment, outside reading, final examination, etc. You will not be required to turn in the worksheet; however, at the end of the course you will receive a Student Course Survey and the final question will ask how long it took you to complete the course. Your assistance in completing this requirement and providing the university with this valuable data is greatly appreciated.

As you fill out the worksheet, please keep in mind that your Academic Engagement Activities should total approximately 45 hours. Some examples of this type of activity may include:

Lesson Review Exercises

Key Term Reviews

Analysis

Study Guide Review

Writing Assignments

Review Grading Rubric

Unit Examinations

Proctored Final Examination

Course Academic Online Discussions

Student/Instructor Interaction

Documents/Student Resources

As you fill out the Academic Preparation Activities, please keep in mind that these should total approximately 90 hours. Some samples of this type of activity may include:

Pre-Test

Reading Assignments

Key Term Reviews

Studying for Examinations

Writing Assignments

Review Grading Rubric

Study Lesson Review Exercises

Internet/Web Research

Reading Websites

Suggested Outside Reading

 

 

 

Sample Worksheet for Tracking Your Academic Activities

Upon completion of this course, you will be asked to complete a survey. The last question on the survey will ask you the number of hours it took to complete the course. The total hours are then translated into academic credit based on a prescribed method of measuring educational attainment known as the Carnegie Unit. 90 hours of student preparation time and 45 hours of student engagement time (135 hours) are required for a 3 credit hour course.

This worksheet was developed as a tool to help track your time. You are not required to turn it in.

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Totals

Academic Engagement Activities Lesson Review Exercises Key Term Review Exercises Study Guide Review Documents/Student Resources Writing Assignments Review Grading Rubric Unit Examinations Proctored Final Examination Case Studies/Critical Analysis Course Academic Online Discussions Student/Instructor Interactions

Total Academic Engagement required for a 3 unit course = 45 hours

Academic Preparation Activities Pre-Test Reading Assignments Analyze Case Studies/Critical Analysis Key Term Review Exercises Study for Examinations Suggested Outside Readings Web Research Writing Assignments Review Grading Rubric Reading Websites Study Lesson Review Exercises

Total Academic Preparation required for a 3 unit course = 90 hours

Grand total of hours of various learning activities in completing this course

 

 

 

Pre-test Instructions

Thank you for taking the time to complete the required pre-test. The purpose of the pre-test is to measure your knowledge of the subject matter at the beginning of each course.

Please be assured, your score on the pre-test will not be part of your course grade. We do not want you to try to study for it or be worried about doing well on the pre-test. It is simply a measure of your “starting place,” that will be used for improving course content and to meet accreditation requirements.

If you receive your course materials online: • Please log-in to your Coast Connection student portal to complete your pre-test.

If you receive your course materials by mail: • You will receive your answer sheets for the pre-test by mail. • Once you have completed your pre-test, please mail or fax your answer sheet to the University at:

California Coast University 925 N. Spurgeon Street Santa Ana, CA 92701 Fax: 714-547-1451

If you have any questions, please feel free to contact the Student Services Department. Thank you for your cooperation.

 

 

 

Pre-test

ix

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

Which early sociologist emphasized the role of society in the development of the self? 1.

George Herbert Meada. Karl Marxb. Georg Simmerc. Herbert Blumer d.

____________ is the study of the effects of society on social-psychological processes, also 2. known as sociological social psychology.

sociologya. microsociologyb. macrosociologyc. psychology d.

Which of the following is considered a major dimension of group processes? 3.

legitimacya. justiceb. powerc. All of the above. d.

Perspective within symbolic interactionism that focuses on the quantitative study of social 4. interaction processes because of the stable nature of social life.

Chicago Schoola. Indiana Schoolb. Iowa Schoolc. both b and c d.

The research technique called “autoethnograpy” is associated with which social psychological 5. perspective?

symbolic interactiona. social structure and personalityb. group processesc. structural functionalism d.

Participants of an experiment that are not exposed to the independent variable. 6.

control groupa. convenience sampleb. focus groupc. experimental groupd.

 

 

Pre-test

x

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment is based on a study that began in ____________ 7. that was primarily led by ____________.

1957; Sewella. 1962; Nielsonb. 1965; Granovetterc. 1973; Kohn d.

According to research by Lucas and others, how can individuals with lower cultural status best 8. gain status in groups?

Give that person legitimate authority to lead the group.a. The person should focus on the success of the group, rather then her own interests.b. The person should provide a “kick back” to others in a group to get their leadership c. position. both a and b d.

Research in the 1960s showed a considerable overlap in ___________ and ___________ 9. occupations.

fathers’; sons’a. fathers’; daughters’b. mothers’; daughters’c. mothers’; sons’ d.

How did Joanne Nagel explain the increase in the number of people identifying themselves as 10. “American Indian” when the birth rates stayed the same?

Legal changes made scholarships more available to American Indians.a. The development of the “Red Power” movement shifted negative stereotypes of Indians.b. Urbanization made it easier for people to find and interact with other people that had c. some American-Indian heritage. All of the above. d.

The use of narratives and personal-stories is important to the process of _____________. 11.

symbolic interaction processa. identity control theoryb. mpression managementc. All of the above. d.

 

 

Pre-test

xi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Socialization is a process that _____________. 12.

begins at around two years of agea. lasts until the young twentiesb. begins at birth and continues through the life cyclec. both a and b d.

Sampson and Laub’s research on the impact of World War II (WWII) on men’s lives generally 13. showed that _____________.

WWII served as a turning point for all American soldiersa. IQ was the biggest factor in finding work after the warb. WWII only had an impact on soldiers if they served overseasc. most of the positive effects of war on the lives of soldiers came through their experience d. overseas, in-service training and access to programs like the GI Bill

Ausdale and Feagin’s research on children learning racism is important because 14. _______________.

it shows how children use race as a way to differentiate between peersa. it shows that children apply adult biases and racism in their day-to-day interactionsb. it shows that children use their own race as a way to gain acceptance by teachersc. both a and b d.

Most college students represent which type of person in Merton’s typology of deviance? 15.

conformistsa. innovatorsb. ritualistsc. retreatists d.

Component of social control theory referring to emotional bonds with other people in society. 16.

commitmenta. attachmentb. involvementc. None of the above. d.

 

 

Pre-test

xii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Manuel’s job loss really did not bother him because he did not like his boss. However, he 17. really started getting anxious when he stopped getting his paycheck. In this example, the effect of job loss on anxiety is ______________ by loss of income.

distresseda. moderatedb. mediatedc. constrained d.

Exposure to poor community conditions such as crime, poor living conditions and lack of 18. services.

malaisea. intransigenceb. ambient hazardsc. chronic strain d.

Nathan started attending KKK meetings when he saw some of his African-American neighbors 19. getting better jobs than him. Which of the following theories best explains Nathan’s negative attitude toward African Americans?

social distance theorya. symbolic interactionb. Blumer’s theory of group positionc. status construction theory d.

Theory that prejudicial attitudes reflect a group’s position in society. 20.

status construction theorya. theory of group positionb. modified labeling theoryc. colonization theory d.

A positive or negative evaluation of an object, a person or group or an idea. 21.

attitudea. prejudiceb. opinionc. belief d.

 

 

Pre-test

xiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Following Smelser’s value-added theory, why wouldn’t we expect a poor, third-world nation, 22. based on a barter economy, to develop mass hysteria over stock market problems like the U.S. did in the 1920s?

lack of structural conducivenessa. lack of structural strainb. lack of generalized beliefc. action of social control d.

Expectations about when and how to act excited or angry or any other emotion. 23.

emotional cuesa. emotional scriptsb. emotional energiesc. situational cues d.

When large numbers of people become obsessed with something like the purchase of a 24. product or an activity.

maniaa. crazeb. hysteriac. panic d.

A key ingredient of contagious mental unity, referring to situations in which people lose their 25. inhibitions to act and the tempo of their behavior increases.

intensity of behaviora. panicb. irrational behaviorc. hostile outburstsd.

 

 

 

925 North Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92701

Text:

Author(s):

Publisher:

S tu

d y G

u id

e

www.calcoast.edu

Phone: 714-547-9625 Fax: 714-547-5777

Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives

Second Edition, 2011

ISBN-13: 9780205661060

David E. Rohall, Melissa A. Milkie and Jeffrey W. Lucas

Pearson

12/14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

 

Message From the President

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Welcome to California Coast University. I hope you will find this course interesting and useful throughout your career. This course was designed to meet the unique needs of students like you who are both highly motivated and capable of completing a degree program through distance learning.

Our faculty and administration have been involved in distance learning for over forty years and understand the characteristics common to successful students in this unique educational environment.

This course was prepared by CCU faculty members who are not only outstanding educators but who have real world experience. They have prepared these guidelines to help you successfully complete your educational goals and to get the most from your distance learning experience.

Again, we hope that you will find this course both helpful and motivating. We send our best wishes as you work toward the completion of your program.

Sincerely,

Thomas M. Neal President

 

 

 

 

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system without written permission from the publisher, except for the inclusion of brief quotation in review. Copyright © 2014 by California Coast University

 

 

 

Syllabus

xxi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Course Number PSY 228

Course Title Social Psychology

Course Description This course offers students an in-depth look at how people come to understand themselves and others in a social context, with considerable emphasis on sociology’s role in social psychology. Students will be given detailed examples of current research studies relating to each of the topics covered in this course such as stratification, deviance and mental health and illness. Each chapter of the text covered in this course will also introduce students to key sociological social psychologists whose research has made a significant contribution to the field.

Units of Credit 3 Units of Credit

Course Objectives Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to:

• Characterize three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

• Differentiate between qualitative and quantitative research methods.

• Determine how group processes affect identity.

• Recognize important agents of socialization.

• Identify physiological, social and behavioral components of emotions.

Learning Resources Textbook: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives 2nd edition, 2011 David E. Rohall, Melissa A. Milkie, and Jeffrey W. Lucas Pearson

ISBN-13: 9780205661060

All course examinations are based on the contents of the textbook required for this course. To successfully complete the examinations, you will need the textbook. You may rent the textbook from the CCU rental library or you may purchase the textbook from another source.

Although this study guide is developed by California Coast University, it may contain materials provided by the publisher of the textbook.

The Study Guide

The study guide was designed to help you further understand the material in the textbook and master the course content. Each study guide chapter corresponds to a chapter in the textbook.

 

 

Syllabus

xxii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Additional Readings and Online Resources

To help you further understand this subject material, additional readings and/or online resources related to this course are listed in this syllabus.

The Library Information and Resources Network, Inc. (LIRN)

Students are provided access to the Library and Information Resources Network, Inc. (LIRN). LIRN provides a centralized management of electronic information resources that allow students to access multiple research databases through one portal. Detailed information on the Library and Information Resources Network, Inc. is available on the California Coast University website under the Resources Tab. For additional information on using the network, LIRN provides a User Guide to help students search for the needed information. This helpful resource is available on the LIRN website. For information on accessing LIRN, please contact California Coast University – library@calcoast.edu or (714) 547-9625.

Supplementary Materials

Unit Examination Answer Sheets* Final Examination Scheduling Form

*Master of Education and Doctor of Education students will not receive unit exam answer sheets. These programs require written responses only.

Your Course Grade

Your grades on course examinations are determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university uses the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

Your grade in this course will be based on the number of points you earn. Grades are based on the percentage of points you earned out of a total of 500 points:

Four Unit Examinations

100 points each 400 points total 80% of your grade

Final Examination

100 points 100 points total 20% of your grade

 

 

Syllabus

xxiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Mastering the Course Content

In order to successfully complete this course, we recommend that you do the following before beginning:

• Be sure that you have the correct edition of the course textbook. Check the ISBN number of your textbook with the ISBN number listed on the cover page of this study guide.

• Review the table of contents at the end of this syllabus. You will only be responsible for the chapters in the textbook that are listed in the table of contents.

Each study guide contains several components selected and developed by the faculty to help you master the content of the course. Each chapter in the study guide corresponds to a chapter in the textbook. Study guides vary depending on the course, but most will include:

Learning Objectives Overviews Self Tests Summaries Key Terms Critical Analysis Questions (graduate and doctoral students only)

The most efficient way to complete this course is to read the materials in both the study guide and textbook in the sequence in which it appears, generally from beginning to end.

Read the Overviews and Summaries

Before reading a chapter of your textbook, review the corresponding learning objectives, overview, key terms and summary sections in the study guide. These were prepared to give you an overview of the content to be learned.

Review the Self Test

After you have reviewed the study guide summaries, look at the items on the self test. As you identify your areas of relative strength and weakness, you will become more aware of the material you will need to learn in greater depth.

Review the Critical Analysis and/or Case Study Questions (Graduate and Doctoral Students Only) The critical analysis questions are designed to help you gain a deeper understanding and appreciation for the course subject matter. This section will encourage you to give additional thought to the topics discussed in the chapter by presenting vignettes or cases with real world relevance.

 

 

Syllabus

xxiv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Read and Review the Chapter

Once you have the scope and organization of the chapter in mind, turn to the corresponding chapter in the textbook and read the material carefully. Keep the learning objectives, self test, critical analysis questions and/or case study questions in mind as you read.

Highlight important concepts and information in your study guide and write notes in the study guide as you read the textbook. These notes will help you study for the unit and final examinations.

Check Your Mastery of Each Chapter

When you feel that you have mastered the concepts presented in the chapter, complete the study guide self test and critical analysis questions and/or case study questions without referring to the textbook or your notes. Correct your responses using the answer key and solutions guide provided in the study guide. Your results will help you identify any areas you need to review.

Unit Examinations

Each course contains four unit examinations and a final examination. Unit examinations usually consist of 25 objective (multiple choice or true/false) test questions. For Master of Education and Doctor of Education students, unit examinations consist of writing assignments only.

Unit examinations may be found approximately every four to six chapters throughout your study guide. Unit examinations are open-book, do not require a proctor and are not timed. This will allow you to proceed at your own pace.

It is recommended that you check your answers against the material in your textbook for accuracy.

Writing Assignments

Each unit examination includes a written component. This assignment may be in the form of written questions or case study problems. The writing assignment affords the student an opportunity to demonstrate a level of subject mastery beyond the objective unit examinations, which reflects his/her ability to analyze, synthesize, evaluate and apply his/her knowledge. The writing assignment materials are found immediately following each unit examination.

Writing assignments are judged on the quality of the response in regard to the question. Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

 

 

Syllabus

xxv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

• Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages.

• Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages.

• Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Plagiarism consists of taking and using the ideas, writings or inventions of another, without giving credit to that person and presenting it as one’s own. This is an offense that the university takes very seriously. An example of a correctly prepared written response may be found by visiting the Coast Connection student portal.

Citation Styles

The majority of your response should be your own original writing based on what you have learned from the textbook. However, students may also use outside materials if applicable. Be sure to provide a reference (or citation) for any materials used, including the required textbook. The following points are designed to help you understand how to provide proper references for your work:

• References are listed in two places.

• The first reference is briefly listed within your answer. This includes identifying information that directs the reader to your list of references at the end of your writing assignment.

• The second reference is at the end of your work in the list of references section.

• All references cited should provide enough identifying information so that the reader can access the original material.

For more detailed information on the proper use of citations, please refer to the CCU Student Handbook located on the Coast Connection student portal.

Submitting Your Unit Examinations and Writing Assignments via the Internet

Students may access the online testing features via the Coast Connection student portal. Multiple choice unit examinations may be completed and submitted online.

 

 

Syllabus

xxvi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Go to the California Coast University homepage at www.calcoast.edu and click on the student login icon at the upper right hand corner. After logging into your account, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the unit examination. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Writing assignments may be submitted online as well. After logging into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the writing assignment. Here, you will find further information and instructions on how to submit writing assignments through the student portal. Remember to keep a copy of your writing assignments for your own personal records.

Alternatively, if you experience diffulty submitting your writing assignments through the student portal, then you may email your assignments as a Word document attachment to essays@calcoast.edu. When doing so, please adhere to the following guidelines:

• Always submit your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number with your writing assignment.

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

• All responses must be typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size for ease of reading and grading.

Submitting Your Unit Examinations by Mail

Send your completed unit examination along with any writing assignments to the following mailing address:

California Coast University Testing Department 925 N. Spurgeon Street Santa Ana, CA 92701

Requests to retake a unit examination will only be honored if the final exam has NOT been sent.

 

 

Syllabus

xxvii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Students may retake one unit examination per course, free of charge. The cost for each additional, repeated exam will be $90. Payment must be paid in full to the accounting department prior to repeating unit exams.

Please contact Student Services for a repeat unit examination form. You may resubmit your unit examination once the original grade has been cleared from your online degree plan.

Final Examination

Scheduling a Final Examination

Final examination requests can be submitted via U.S. mail, online through the Coast Connection student portal, or by calling the Testing Department at (714) 547-9625.

A final exam scheduling form is located on the last page of this study guide. Please fill out ALL required fields and mail it to the university.

If you would like to request a final exam online, log into the Coast Connection student portal and click on My Academic Plan. Select the course you are working on and submit the Final Exam Request form located at the bottom of the page. ALL INFORMATION MUST BE FILLED IN.

Submitting Your Final Examination

Final Examinations can be submitted by mail, fax or online through the Coast Connection student portal.

After you have completed your exam, you or your proctor can fax it to the Grading Department at (714) 547-1451 or mail it to the university. When faxing exams, please do not resize your fax.

For online submissions, once you have logged into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the final examination. You must input the unique password that was sent to your proctor in order to unlock your final examination questions. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Proctors

The university requires that all final examinations be completed under the supervision of a proctor.

A proctor can be anyone EXCEPT an immediate family member, someone who resides with you or a current/former CCU student.

 

 

Syllabus

xxviii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The purpose of the proctored final examination is to verify that you are, in fact, the person who is enrolled in the course of study. It is also to verify that you are completing the final examination without the aid of any outside assistance.

During the proctored final examination, you may use your textbook and any notes you have taken during the completion of your unit examinations. Your designated proctor will verify your identity and that you have completed the final examination without any outside assistance.

Your Overall Grade Point Average (G.P.A.)

In addition to receiving a passing grade for each course, all students must maintain a required overall G.P.A. in order to graduate. Undergraduate students need an overall G.P.A. of 2.0 (C) on a 4.0 scale. Graduate and doctoral students need an overall G.P.A. of 3.0 (B) on a 4.0 scale.

A = 4 grade points B = 3 grade points C = 2 grade points D = 1 grade point F = 0 grade points

Students who do not meet the overall G.P.A. requirement by the end of their program must pay the current cost of tuition to repeat courses until they improve their overall G.P.A.

Overall course grades of “F” will be displayed on your degree plan and count as 0 units completed. You must pay to retake these courses.

Doctoral students must repeat any courses in which the overall course grade is a “D” or “F”.

Be sure to keep a copy of all work you submit to the university.

 

 

Syllabus

xxix

PSY 228 Social Psychology

If you have any questions about how to proceed through the course or regarding any California Coast University policies and procedures, the easiest way to get help is to send us a message through the student portal, via email, or phone the university.

University office hours are Monday through Friday from 8:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Pacific Standard Time.

California Coast University

925 N. Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, California 92701 Phone: (714) 547-9625 Fax: (714) 547-5777 Test Answer Sheet Fax Line: (714) 547-1451

Email: testing@calcoast.edu

Don’t forget: You are not alone! We are here to help you achieve your dream!

PS Y

22 8

 

 

Syllabus

xxx

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

The learning objectives for this course are listed below:

Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology

1. Define social psychology. 2. Differentiate between macrosociology and microsociology. 3. Compare and contrast sociologists and psychologists’ approach to social psychology. 4. Identify the three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

Chapter 2: Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology

1. Distinguish the major principles of the symbolic interaction perspective. 2. Define what it means to “construct” the world around us. 3. Characterize the social structure and personality perspective. 4. Identify key elements of the group processes perspective. 5. Consider elements of group structure.

Chapter 3: Studying People

1. Become acquainted with the vocabulary of social science research. 2. Differentiate qualitative sociology from quantitative sociology. 3. Determine major forms of qualitative and quantitative research. 4. Assess how social scientists begin to develop a research project.

Chapter 4: The Social Psychology of Stratification

1. Interpret how people construct inequality in society. 2. Determine how structure is linked to interactions. 3. Evaluate how stratification develops in group interaction. 4. Judge how inequalities from society-at-large get reproduced in groups.

Chapter 5: Self and Identity

1. Identify the components of the self. 2. Determine interactionist theories of the self and identity. 3. Characterize three dimensions of the self-concept. 4. Analyze what we know from research on the self-concept. 5. Interpret how group processes affect identity.

 

 

Syllabus

xxxi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter 6: Socialization Over the Life Course

1. Critique how society influences the social construction of the self. 2. Chart the stages involved in developing the self. 3. Name the four elements of life-course sociology. 4. Consider agents of socialization and how they affect our lives. 5. Assess how group processes researchers study socialization.

Chapter 7: The Social Psychology of Deviance

1. Analyze how we define what is normal and what is deviant. 2. Determine how the construction of deviant labels contribute to the development of deviant lifestyles. 3. Judge how structural conditions influence individuals’ decisions to commit deviant acts. 4. Consider how group relationships influence the development of deviance and perceptions of deviance.

Chapter 8: Mental Health and Illness

1. Determine what it means to be mentally healthy. 2. Interpret how the definition of mental illness is constructed. 3. List the structural conditions in society that contribute to distress. 4. Identify resources that can buffer stress. 5. Assess how mental health can influence our sense of identity and interactions with others.

Chapter 9: Attitudes, Values and Behaviors

1. Identify the nature of an attitude. 2. Evaluate how researchers study attitudes and behaviors. 3. Describe how people construct attitudes. 4. Analyze how attitudes toward other people form in group contexts.

Chapter 10: The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion

1. Distinguish the components of emotions. 2. Determine how people learn emotions. 3. Consider how identity relates to emotions. 4. Evaluate how our statuses in society affect our uses of emotions. 5. Interpret the norms that govern the use of emotions in different social settings. 6. Predict how group settings affect emotions.

 

 

Syllabus

xxxii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter 11: Collective Behavior

1. Analyze how crowds contribute to the development of mass hysteria. 2. Identify theories that explain individuals’ behavior in large groups. 3. Decide whether structural conditions affect crowd behaviors. 4. Chart the phases of collective behavior found in large social movements. 5. Evaluate how group and individual motivations interact in social movements.

 

 

Syllabus

xxxiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Best, Joel. 2006. Flavor of the Month: Why Smart People Fall for Fads. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.

Clarke, Lee. 2006. Worst Cases: Terror and Catastrophe in the Popular Imagination. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Gergen, Kenneth J. 2000. The Saturated Self: Dilemmas of Identity in Contemporary Life. New York: Basic Books.

Hertz, Rosanna. 2006. Single by Chance, Mothers by Choice: How Women are Choosing Parenthood without Marriage and Creating the New American Family. New York: Oxford University Press.

Horowitz, Allan V. 2002. Creating Mental Illness. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Lareau, Annette. 2003. Unequal Childhoods: Class, Race and Family Life. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.

Miller, David L. 2000. Introduction to Collective Behavior and Collective Action. Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland.

Polletta, Francesca. 2006. It was Like a Fever: Storytelling in Protest and Politics. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.

Ream, Robert Ketner. 2005. Uprooting Children: Mobility, Social Capital and Mexican American Underachievement. New York: LFB Scholarly Publishing.

Scheff, Thomas J. 1990. Microsociology: Discourse, Emotion and Social Structure. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Swidler, Ann. 2001. Talk of Love: How Culture Matters. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Turner,Ralph H. and Lewis M. Killian. 1972. Collective Behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Zelizer, Viviana. 2005. The Purchase of Intimacy. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

Suggested Readings

 

 

Table of Contents

xxxiv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Syllabus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii-xx

Unit One Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2: Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 3: Studying People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Unit 1 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Unit 1 Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Unit 1 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Unit Two

Chapter 4: The Social Psychology of Stratification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Chapter 5: Self and Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 6: Socialization Over the Life Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Unit 2 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Unit 2 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Unit 2 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Unit Three

Chapter 7: The Social Psychology of Deviance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Chapter 8: Mental Health and Illness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Chapter 9: Attitudes, Values and Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Unit 3 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Unit 3 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Unit 3 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Unit Four Chapter 10: The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Chapter 11: Collective Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Unit 4 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Unit 4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Unit 4 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Final Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Final Exam Scheduling Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

 

 

Objectives

1

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter One Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Define social psychology.

2. Differentiate between macrosociology and microsociology.

3. Compare and contrast sociologists and psychologists’ approach to social psychology.

4. Identify the three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

• Read pages 1-24 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

2

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter is designed to give students an understanding of how sociologists study social psychology and its role in the larger field of sociology. Students will gain an understanding of the distinction between psychology and sociology and be able to explain the major sociological social psychology perspectives.

 

 

Key Terms

3

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Breaching experiments:

Culture:

Ethnomethodology:

Macrosociology:

Organizations:

Psychology:

Roles:

Social norms:

Social psychology:

Sociological imagination:

Symbolic interactionism:

 

 

Summary

4

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociology is the study of society. Sociologists look at society from both the macro and the micro level of analysis. Both psychological and sociological social psychologists study the social contexts of human thoughts, feelings and behaviors. Sociologists, however, also apply the perspectives and methods of the field of sociology to the study of social psychology.

Sociology was first defined in 1838 by French social philosopher, August Comte, who applied the principles of the scientific method to society. Some of the founders of sociological social psychology include George Herbert Mead, W.E.B. Dubois, William Thomas, Charles Horton Cooley and George Simmel. Three major perspectives in sociological social psychology include symbolic interactionism, social structure and personality and group processes.

Sociologists use a tool kit consisting of methods and concepts for studying the role of society in social psychological processes. Their tools include such concepts as statuses, roles, norms and values, culture and social institutions—which they apply to the study of human thoughts—feelings and behavior.

 

 

Self Test

5

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. How can macrosociological perspectives be used to study individual, micro-level interactions?

a. Macrosociological conditions may cause some individual-level conditions to exist in the first place. b. Differences in our macrosociological conditions may change the way we react to life events. c. Life events that affect us the most are often caused by societal conditions. d. All of the above.

2. Janna wanted to study the effects of population size on individuals’ decision to commit suicide. Which social psychological perspective is she most likely to use?

a. psychology b. sociology c. sociological social psychology d. psychological social psychology

3. Which macrosociological perspective views society as social systems composed of parts that serve to keep the system working properly?

a. conflict perspective b. symbolic interactionism c. behavioralism d. structural functionalism

4. Joe started noticing that kids from the upper classes tend to get accepted at better colleges than the kids from the middle and lower classes. His analysis probably comes from which macrosociological perspective?

a. conflict perspective b. symbolic interactionism c. behavioralism d. structural functionalism

 

 

Self Test

6

PSY 228 Social Psychology

5. Sociological social psychology is different from psychological social psychology because:

a. it focuses on the effects of societal conditions on individuals’ thoughts, feelings and behavior. b. it incorporates sociological perspectives and theories to explain individuals’ thoughts, feelings and behavior. c. it is a subfield of sociology, not psychology. d. All of the above.

6. Social psychology is the systematic study of individual thoughts, feelings and behavior in a social context. Which of the following social contexts are more likely to be studied by sociologists than psychologists?

a. small groups b. family interactions c. ethnic groups d. friendship groups

 

 

Answer Keys

7

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Breaching experiments: Experiments that violate the established social order to assess how people construct social reality.

Culture: A society’s set of unique patterns of behavior and beliefs.

Ethnomethodology: A method of studying society through observation of people’s typical day-to-day interactions.

Macrosociology: The study of large-scale social processes.

Organizations: Groups that share a common purpose and contain a formal set of rules and authority structure.

Psychology: The study of human thought processes and behaviors.

Roles: A set of expectations about how to behave in a group.

Social norms: The rules that regulate our behavior in relationships.

Social psychology: The systematic study of people’s thoughts, feelings and behavior in social contexts.

Sociological imagination: The ability to see personal lives in the context of the larger society— its history, culture and social structure.

Symbolic interactionism: A perspective within sociological social psychology that emphasizes the study of how people negotiate the meaning of social life during their interactions with other people.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

8

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. c

3. d

4. a

5. d

6. c

 

 

Notes

9

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

10

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Two Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Distinguish the major principles of the symbolic interaction perspective.

2. Define what it means to “construct” the world around us.

3. Characterize the social structure and personality perspective.

4. Identify key elements of the group processes perspective.

5. Consider elements of group structure.

• Read pages 25-53 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

11

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter provides an extensive review of three major perspectives in sociological social psychology. Students will learn about the history, theoretical and empirical importance of the three perspectives. The chapter begins with an overview of the history and tenets of symbolic interactionism. This is followed by a review of the two major schools of symbolic interactionism.

 

 

Key Terms

12

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency:

Collective behavior:

Components principle:

Frame analysis:

Legitimacy:

Proximity principle:

Psychology principle:

Reference groups:

Social scripts:

Thomas theorem:

 

 

Summary

13

PSY 228 Social Psychology

There are three broad perspectives in sociological social psychology: symbolic interactionism, social structure and personality and group processes.

Symbolic interactionism is the study of how people negotiate meaning during their interactions with others. Within this approach, two schools of symbolic interactionism exists: the Chicago school and the Iowa and Indiana schools.

The social structure and personality perspective emphasizes how social structure affects individuals within a society. Structural forces include status, roles and social networks.

The group processes perspective focuses on interactions that occur within groups, characteristics of groups and relationships among groups. Processes studied by those in the group processes perspective include power, status, justice and legitimacy.

A group’s behavior is influenced by structural conditions including its size and its function. Group research may focus on structure or on other aspects of group processes, such as the relationship between groups and the behavior of larger groups of people called collective behavior.

 

 

Self Test

14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Which social theorists are most associated with the concept of the social construction of reality?

a. Marx and Engels b. Thomas and Thomas c. Berger and Luckmann d. Blumer and Mead

2. A local fraternity developed a special hand signal whenever they see each other on the university quad. In symbolic interactionist terms, this signal has become a ______________ for this group.

a. meaningful exchange b. important source of pride c. language d. symbol

3. Terence started to believe that a friend at work is really a spy from another company, leading him to avoid interactions with that person as much as possible. Ultimately, he treats all interactions with her as suspect, making him reluctant to share any work-related information with her. Which of the following best explains Terence’s behavior?

a. components principle of the social structure and personality perspective b. the Thomas theorem c. the peter principle d. the group processes concept of legitimacy

4. Who coined the expression “symbolic interaction”?

a. Emile Durkheim b. Herbert Blumer c. August Comte d. George Herbert Mead

5. Professor Swanson is studying the meaning of “goodness” using a survey of public attitudes toward the topic. Which school of symbolic interaction is she most likely using in her research?

a. the Chicago school b. the Indiana/Iowa school c. the Swanson school d. the sociological social psychology school

 

 

Self Test

15

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Socioeconomic status (social class), race or ethnicity, gender, age and sexuality all relate to which principle of the social structure and personality perspective?

a. components principle b. proximity principle c. psychology principle d. peter principle

 

 

Answer Keys

16

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency: The ability to act and think independent of the constraints imposed by social conditions.

Collective behavior: The action or behavior of people in groups or crowds.

Components principle: Within the social structure and personality perspective, the ability to identify the elements or components of society most likely to affect a given attitude or behavior.

Frame analysis: The process by which individuals transform the meaning of a situation using basic cognitive structures provided by society.

Legitimacy: The perception that a social arrangement or position is the way that things should be.

Proximity principle: Element of the social structure and personality perspective referring to how people are affected by social structure through their immediate social environments.

Psychology principle: Element of the social structure and personality perspective referring to how individuals internalize proximal experiences.

Reference groups: People we look to as a source of standards and identity.

Social scripts: The appropriate thoughts, feelings and behaviors that should be displayed in a particular social frame.

Thomas theorem: Theorem stating that when people define situations as real, the consequences of those situations become real.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

17

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. b

4. b

5. b

6. a

 

 

Notes

18

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

19

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Three Studying People

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Become acquainted with the vocabulary of social science research.

2. Differentiate qualitative sociology from quantitative sociology.

3. Determine major forms of qualitative and quantitative research.

4. Assess how social scientists begin to develop a research project.

• Read pages 54-82 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

20

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to provide an overview of the techniques sociological social psychologists use to study people, emphasizing theoretical differences on the appropriate means of obtaining social-psychological data.

 

 

Key Terms

21

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Categorical variables:

Ethnography:

Focus groups:

Indices:

Interval variables:

Ordinal variables:

Population:

Qualitative research methods:

Reliability:

Snowball sample:

Validity:

 

 

Summary

22

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Several concepts apply to almost any research project. Researchers regularly use terms such as theory, research questions or hypotheses and variables to describe ways of studying people.

Researchers employ qualitative and quantitative techniques to study human subjects. Qualitative research methods include field research and in-depth interviews. Quantitative methods include survey research and experiments.

The steps in developing most research projects include assessing the theory and literature of the research topic, developing research questions or specific hypotheses, choosing the appropriate research methods, conducting data analysis and reporting the results.

Although there is no rule about whether a particular theory should or should not use quantitative or qualitative methods to study people, symbolic interactionists have traditionally relied more on qualitative methods. Many researchers try to employ multiple methods of studying a particular phenomenon.

 

 

Self Test

23

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. How are social theories and hypotheses related to one another?

a. Theories include general statements about social relationships while hypotheses are more specific statements about how variables will relate to one another. b. Theories are an extension of hypotheses. c. Theories are used to develop hypotheses. d. both a and c

2. Samantha started a research project predicting that men would be more supportive of using military forces to go to war than women. In this case, attitudes toward going to war is what kind of variable?

a. index b. scale c. independent variable d. dependent variable

3. In preparing for a survey of country club members, Donella asked the manager of the club for a list of members. This list refers to a _______________.

a. random sample b. probability sample c. sample list d. sampling frame

4. Which of the following types of samples is considered most representative of any given population?

a. random sample b. convenience sample c. snowball sample d. both b and c

5. An instructor asks you to develop a study of the homeless that will provide a great deal of depth into what it is like to be homeless. Given this mandate, which of the following methods would most likely give the information you need for such a project?

a. ethnography b. focus group c. survey d. experiment

 

 

Self Test

24

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. A sample in which any available person is included in the study is known as a ____________ sample.

a. true b. convenience c. odd d. real time

 

 

Answer Keys

25

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Categorical variables: Measures for which the possible responses have no particular order.

Ethnography: A form of field research that includes a descriptive analysis of a group or organization.

Focus groups: Semistructured interviews with small groups of people.

Indices: A series of related questions designed to measure a concept such as mastery.

Interval variables: A type of variable in which the difference between any two adjacent values is the same.

Ordinal variables: Variables for which response categories are ordered but the distances between adjacent categories are not necessarily equal.

Population: The larger group of people about whom a researcher seeks to draw conclusions.

Qualitative research methods: In-depth, semi-structured modes of observation or interviewing of subjects.

Reliability: When a study yields the same results using the same techniques and data.

Snowball sample: Samples in which informants provide contact information about other people who share some of the characteristics necessary for a study.

Validity: How valid or accurate the findings of the study are.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

26

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. a

3. d

4. a

5. a

6. b

 

 

Notes

27

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 1 Examination Instructions

28

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit One Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

29

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Which early sociologists emphasized the role of society in the development of the self?

a. George Herbert Mead b. Karl Marx c. Georg Simmer d. Herbert Blumer

2. Which sociological social psychology perspective emphasizes the role of meaning and the social construction of meaning in the study of social psychology?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

3. Which sociological social psychology perspective is likely to emphasize the importance of roles and statuses in the study of social psychology?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

4. Which sociological social psychology perspective is likely to emphasize the importance of interactions within groups?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

5. The sociological imagination is associated with which social theorists?

a. Emile Durkheim b. Max Weber c. C. Wright Mills d. Auguste Comte

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

30

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. The expectation to look someone in the eye when talking with them refers to a _______________.

a. norm b. role c. value d. belief

7. Derek’s job as a supervisor refers to his relative _______________ in the company while the expectations for how to behave on the job refers to his ________________.

a. role; status b. job; role c. status; role d. status; job

8. Which institution regulates sexual relations and child-rearing in society?

a. economy and work b. politics c. family d. religion

9. Which institution refers to the rituals and beliefs regarding sacred things?

a. economy and work b. politics c. family d. religion

10. Franklin did not think much about how the economy or society affects his life until he lost his job. Franklin’s internal processesing of his job loss best represents which principle from the social structure and personality perspective?

a. components principle b. psychology principle c. propinquity principle d. proximity principle

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

31

PSY 228 Social Psychology

11. After Donna cheated on her most recent exam, she starts to feel a sense of guilt, making her reconsider whether she wants to do it again. Donna’s feelings of guilt can be considered a ______________, according to the social structure and personality perspective, leading her to rethink her future behaviors.

a. social more b. social norm c. social force d. social fear

12. Which of the following is considered a major dimension of group processes?

a. power b. justice c. legitimacy d. All of the above.

13. Janelle wants to study how and why some people are able to tell other people what to do while others can not. What aspect of group processes is she studying?

a. power b. status c. justice d. legitimacy

14. What social psychologist is most associated with the concepts of dyads and triads?

a. Emile Durkheim b. August Comte c. Herbert Blumer d. Georg Simmel

15. The difference between dyads and triads is important because:

a. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially increases the number of relationships available in an interaction. b. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially decreases the amount of intimacy possible in a group. c. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially decreases the number of relationships available in an interaction. d. both a and b

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

32

PSY 228 Social Psychology

16. A group of friends getting together for dinner represents a ______________ group while a group of people at your work represents a _____________ group.

a. reference; primary b. primary; reference c. primary; secondary d. secondary; reference

17. Bob goes to the beach on a hot summer day and is surprised when he observes a group of people dressed in formal wear sitting in beach chairs amongst sunbathers. Bob was surprised because the ______________ did not meet his expectations for that situation.

a. situation b. social scripts c. frame d. All of the above.

18. ____________ require the researcher to weigh individual items differently.

a. Indices b. Scales c. both a and b d. None of the above.

19. Which of the following methods is MOST likely to show causation?

a. ethnography b. focus group c. survey d. experiment

20. An instructor developed a study to determine ways of producing more participation in his classes. In one class she provided free donuts everyday of class while in another she gave them nothing. She had her assistant takes notes on the number of comments and questions students made in each class. Which of these classes represent the control group?

a. the class not given the donuts b. the class given the donuts c. other classes that are not part of the experiment d. both classes would be considered the control group

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

33

PSY 228 Social Psychology

21. ____________ developed the field of operant conditioning; much of his work relied on experiments using rats and pigeons.

a. Carl Jung b. B.F. Skinner c. Sigmund Freud d. Joseph Berger

22. At what step in the research process does the researcher employ the library and other resources and conduct a literature review?

a. step 1 b. step 2 c. step 3 d. step 4

23. At what step in the research process does the researcher actually go out and collect data?

a. step 1 b. step 2 c. step 3 d. step 4

24. Research conducted by interviews, participant observations and ethnographies is referred to as what kind of research?

a. quantitative b. qualitative c. breeching d. experimental

25. Social scientists must always be concerned with _______________ and _______________ to accurately capture the phenomena in question.

a. truth and reliability b. reliability and validity c. truth and validity d. probability and validity

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

34

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit One

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

1. Think about the concept of poverty. How would a macro-level sociologist study this concept differently than a micro-level sociologist?

2. Discuss how symbolic interactionists define the concept of society. What role do symbols and language play in the development of society?

3. Discuss the ways that group structures can impact interaction in groups. Specifically, examine how group size (i.e., dyads and triads) and types of groups (e.g., primary groups) impact interactions between people.

 

 

You Can Do It

35

PSY 228 Social Psychology

You have just completed Unit 1 of this course.

You are off to a great start!

Keep up the good work!

 

 

Objectives

36

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Four The Social Psychology of Stratification

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Interpret how people construct inequality in society.

2. Determine how structure is linked to interactions.

3. Evaluate how stratification develops in group interaction.

4. Judge how inequalities from society-at-large get reproduced in groups.

• Read pages 84-120 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

37

PSY 228 Social Psychology

One of the major ways that sociological social psychology is different from its counterpart in psychology is its greater emphasis on the role of stratification in social psychological processes. There are several ways in which stratification affects our lives and relationships. Symbolic interactionists sometimes address how we create and maintain definitions of different classes of people. Social structure and personality scholars emphasize how structural conditions, often related to work, education, or family settings affect people. Those in the group processes perspective examine how stratification systems from the larger society become reproduced in groups. We will use each of these perspectives to examine how stratification processes occur in our day-to-day lives.

 

 

Key Terms

38

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Borderwork:

Direct exchanges:

Doing difference:

Feedback loop:

Intersectionality:

Routinization:

Social capital:

Social exchange theory:

Social stratification:

Substantive complexity:

 

 

Summary

39

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Three ways that interactionist researchers focus on stratification processes include examining how social structure shapes who we interact with, accounting for inequalities in the content of interactions, acknowledging how people with certain status characteristics have more power in terms of role taking and examining people’s power to define situations and define themselves.

The Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment traces the relationships among individual’s class position, their abilities and their long-term occupational outcomes.

The effect of networking among individuals from different groups creates a variety of outcomes for those involved, depending on the status of the individuals in a group as well as the status of the group itself.

Values serve as a guide for making decisions about the future, ultimately affecting the types of jobs we attain and class position we have in life, producing a feedback loop between our personality and social positions.

Group processes contribute to our understanding of structural developments by studying the exchanges among individuals in groups. Exchange processes lend themselves to the development of status structures because people bring different types and quantities of resources into the process. People who contribute more to a group or have more resources generally achieve a higher status in groups.

 

 

Self Test

40

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Shirley Brice Heath’s research on the socialization of status and race among Whites and Blacks in the rural-Piedmont Carolinas is important because:

a. it shows how social class influences how we interact with other people. b. it shows how historical and social conditions can affect our day-to-day interactions. c. it shows that White people have an advantage over African-Americans in getting into good colleges. d. both a and b

2. Which perspective in sociological social psychology is more likely to examine the effects of stratification in day-to-day exchanges between people?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

3. Which of the following is the best example of “borderwork”?

a. a group of teenage boys smoking cigarettes in a high-school parking lot b. a group of girls at a slumber party c. a group of boys and girls playing “kiss and chase” d. a group of boys and girls being lectured to about poor behavior

4. Elijah Anderson’s study of inner city norms and values show that:

a. inner city residents tend to be submissive in the face of their poverty. b. inner city residents are taught to develop a toughness to deal with challenges of poverty and poor living conditions. c. most inner city residents accept most traditional norms from the larger culture. d. both b and c

5. An intersectional approach is essential to understanding the dynamics of stratification because it allows us to the look at the multitude of ways in which our statuses and positions affect our experience.

a. True b. False

 

 

Self Test

41

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. According to the Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment, how does our social background influence our occupational status in life?

a. It shows that our social background influences with whom we spend time. b. It shows that our social background influences our mental abilities. c. It shows that our social background affects our educational levels. d. All of the above.

 

 

Answer Keys

42

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Borderwork: The creation of social and physical boundaries between boys and girls.

Direct exchanges: Exchanges between two people.

Doing difference: Any way in which inequality in any form (race, class or gender) is perpetuated during our interactions as people are held accountable to the social categories in which they are a part.

Feedback loop: A process in which our class position influences the development of values that, in turn, influences the type of job we seek.

Intersectionality: The idea that race, gender and class statuses are not separate but interlocking systems of inequality.

Routinization: Part of Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment referring to the level of repetitiveness found on the job.

Social capital: Trust and support found in relationships with other people.

Social exchange theory: Theory based on the premise that individuals enter into relationships that provide some benefit to them and end or leave relationships that do not provide some sort of reward.

Social stratification: The ways in which individuals or groups are ranked in society.

Substantive complexity: Part of Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment referring to how complicated the actual work is on the job.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

43

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. a

3. c

4. d

5. a

6. d

 

 

Notes

44

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

45

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Five Self and Identity

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the components of the self.

2. Determine interactionist theories of the self and identity.

3. Characterize three dimensions of the self-concept.

4. Analyze what we know from research on the self-concept.

5. Interpret how group processes affect identity.

• Read pages 121-149 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

46

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter reviews the different ways that sociologists study the meaning of the concepts of self and identity and the structural and group conditions that impact the self. It will address the components of the self; interactionist theories of the self and identity; three dimensions of self- concept; and how group processes affect identity.

 

 

Key Terms

47

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect-control theory:

Backstage:

Dramaturgical sociology:

Emotional arousal:

I:

Identity:

Mastery:

Mattering:

Me:

Personal characteristics:

Psychological centrality:

Self:

Self-enhancement:

Self-esteem:

Self-indication:

Verbal persuasion:

Vicarious experience:

 

 

Summary

48

PSY 228 Social Psychology

From a symbolic interactionist perspective, the self is a process in which we construct a sense of who we are. We use symbols and language to communicate with other people, but we also use language to think internally. The self includes a dialogue between the “I” and the “Me”.

Identity includes our social categories and personal characteristics. Identity theory examines how social conditions affect the salience of identities and thus our behavior. Affect-control theory incorporates emotions in identity processes.

The self-concept refers to all our thoughts and feelings about ourselves as an object, often studied in the form of identities, self-esteem, mattering and mastery. Class, race, and gender are important social statuses that influence our self-development over time. Social identity theory argues that people define and evaluate themselves in terms of the groups they belong to, including one’s race and gender.

 

 

Self Test

49

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. What part of the self-concept is mastery?

a. the self b. self-identities c. self-evaluations d. self indication

2. Debating what other people are thinking about you in a public setting is best represented by what term?

a. self-concept b.self-identities c. self-evaluations d. self indication

3. According to Mead, which aspect of our self is out in public, constantly processing new information related to the self?

a. the “I” b. the “Me” c. self-concept d. self indication

4. Which of the following is NOT an element of identity?

a. social categories b. role identities c. personal characteristics d. self attitudes

5. Being a Canadian applies to which aspect of identity?

a. social categories b. role identities c. personal characteristics d. self attitudes

 

 

Self Test

50

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Identity theory comes from which social-psychological perspective?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functional

 

 

Answer Keys

51

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect-control theory: The theory that incorporates elements of symbolic interactionism and identity theory to explain the role of emotion in identity processes.

Backstage: Part of dramaturgical sociology referring to the region where we relax our impression management efforts.

Dramaturgical sociology: The study of how we present ourselves, playing roles and managing impressions during interactions with other people.

Emotional arousal: Inferences about our abilities based on our emotional states that we use to build our sense of mastery.

I: The part of the self that is active, engaging in interactions with others.

Identity: Our internalized, stable sense of who we are.

Mastery: Our perceptions of our ability to control things important to us.

Mattering: Our sense that we are important to other people in the world.

Me: The part of the self that includes an organized set of attitudes toward the self.

Personal characteristics: Anything we use to describe our individual nature.

Psychological centrality: Our ability to shift aspects of the self to become more or less important to our overall self-concept.

Self: A process in which we construct a sense of who we are through interaction with others.

Self-enhancement: In social identity theory, the process through which we make comparisons that favor our own groups.

Self-esteem: The positive or negative evaluation of our self as an object.

Self-indication: The use of symbols and language to communicate internally.

Verbal persuasion: Information from others about our abilities used to derive mastery.

Vicarious experience: A way of building mastery by seeing other people perform tasks; it shows us that the task is accomplishable.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

52

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. d

5. a

6. a

 

 

Notes

53

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

54

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Six Socialization Over the Lifer Course

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Critique how society influences the social construction of the self.

2. Chart the stages involved in developing the self.

3. Name the four elements of life-course sociology.

4. Consider agents of socialization and how they affect our lives.

5. Assess how group processes researchers study socialization.

• Read pages 150-187 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

55

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to define socialization and the life course and the major theories and research associated with these ideas.

 

 

Key Terms

56

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency:

Birth cohort:

Contextual dissonance:

Gender socialization:

Idiocultures:

Life course:

Life events:

Linked lives:

Looking-glass self:

Pygmalion effect:

Socialization:

 

 

Summary

57

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociologists study socialization processes at every stage of development from childhood to late adulthood. The self develops through a symbolic process. An essential aspect of self-development is the ability to take the role of the other.

The sociology of childhood focuses on how children are active participants in creating culture. Life-course sociology is based on the notion that humans adapt to different situations based on their social and historical location, relative to different events and cultural “moments.” Four major themes in life-course sociology include historical context, timing, linked lives and agency.

Sociologists view agents of socialization as mediators of the larger society rather than direct causes of socialization. The family is considered the primary agent of socialization because children are raised from infancy with parents and often siblings. Schools and peers are two other important agents of socialization.

The group processes perspective often examines the role of socialization after it has occurred, reviewing, for instance, how expectations about gender or race affect group interactions.

 

 

Self Test

58

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Sammy is using dolls to represent people in a doll house. Based on Mead’s theory of child development, at what stage of development is she?

a. preparatory stage b. play stage c. game stage d. toy stage

2. A little boy playing in a baseball team is probably in which stage of development using Mead’s typology?

a. preparatory stage b. play stage c. game stage d. toy stage

3. Which social psychologist is associated with the looking-glass self?

a. George Herbert Mead b. Michel Foucault c. Georg Simmel d. Charles Horton Cooley

4. Studies have shown that factors such as parenting style, resources and status can dramatically affect the outcomes of children of divorced parents.

a. True b. False

5. Studies have found that father’s household labor participation has little effect on their son’s future household labor sharing.

a. True b. False

 

 

Self Test

59

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Several studies have shown that there is a correlation between watching violent television and aggressive behavior.

a. True b. False

 

 

Answer Keys

60

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency: An aspect of life-course sociology referring to our ability to improvise roles, make decisions and control our destiny.

Birth cohort: A group of people born around the same time period.

Contextual dissonance: A feeling that minority members of a group have because they are different from the majority members.

Gender socialization: Learning expectations about how to behave related to one’s gender.

Idiocultures: A system of knowledge, beliefs, behaviors and customs shared by an interacting group to which members refer and employ as a basis of further interaction.

Life course: The process of change from infancy to late adulthood resulting from personal and societal events and from transitions into and out of social roles.

Life events: Event that can cause significant changes in the course of our lives.

Linked lives: An aspect of life-course sociology referring to our relationships with other people.

Looking-glass self: How the self relies on imagined responses of others in its development.

Pygmalion effect: When children develop according to expectations of a group or society.

Socialization: The ways in which individuals attempt to align their own thoughts, feelings, and behavior to fit into a group or society.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

61

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. b

2. c

3. d

4. a

5. b

6. a

 

 

Notes

62

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 2 Examination Instructions

63

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Two Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

64

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. How does Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment link economic status, job characteristics and personality?

a. People with lower economic status tend to find work in jobs that have more supervision. b. People with lower economic status tend to find work in jobs that require less intellectual flexibility. c. People with less intellectual flexibility tend to seek jobs that are routinized. d. All of the above.

2. Bradley, a student at Big U, regularly seeks advice from his professor and mentor, Janet. According to exchange theory, what kind of exchange is most likely motivating Janet to stay in this relationship?

a. a direct exchange b. a reciprocal exchange c. a generalized exchange d. All of the above.

3. What was being exchanged among crew members and the captain in George Homan’s research about exchange processes on small warships?

a. support b. caring c. listening d. All of the above.

4. Who gets the most status in groups based on Bales’ research in social exchanges in small groups?

a. Those who are perceived as the best managers. b. Those who are perceived as being the smartest. c. Those who contribute the most to the group. d. Those who listen and care the most for the other members.

5. Which of the following best reflects a task group used to study status processes in groups?

a. A group of students at a class lecture. b. A group of people waiting in line to pay at a store. c. A group of citizens meeting to resolve a local problem. d. All of the above.

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

65

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Why are weak ties so important for finding work?

a. People with whom we have weak ties live and work in circles outside our own. b. People with whom we have weak ties tend to have better jobs. c. People with whom we have weak ties aren’t biased against us in the job market. d. People with whom we have weak ties provide training in getting better jobs.

7. According to status characteristics theory, gender, race and education levels are examples of _______________.

a. diffuse status characteristics b. specific status characteristics c. roles d. class positions

8. According to status characteristics theory, skill at playing basketball would be considered _______________.

a. diffuse status characteristics b. specific status characteristics c. roles d. class positions

9. People are ______________ aware of the status hierarchies that develop in task-oriented groups.

a. almost always b. usually not c. always d. None of the above.

10. Which theorist is most associated with impression management?

a. Auguste Comte b. Emile Durkheim c. Herbert Blumer d. Erving Goffman

11. According to dramaturgical sociology, what area of identity is associated with hanging out with friends while watching television?

a. front stage b. back stage c. performance stage d. informal groups

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

66

PSY 228 Social Psychology

12. A first date would most likely be associated with what area of identity?

a. front stage b. back stage c. performance stage d. informal groups

13. Spencer Cahill’s research on “bathroom behavior” clearly showed that _______________.

a. people act very differently in bathrooms than other areas of life b. serve as “self-service” repair shops c. people use bathrooms to “retire” from their front stage presentations d. All of the above.

14. Which of the following has the strongest impact on self-esteem?

a. social comparisons b. reflected appraisals c. psychological centrality d. self-perceptions

15. _____________ are observations of our behavior and its consequences.

a. Reflected appraisals b. Self-perceptions c. Social comparisons d. Psychological centrality

16. What is the best way to build a child’s sense of mastery or efficacy?

a. personal accomplishments b. vicarious experience c. verbal persuasion d. emotional arousal

17. Rosenberg’s early research on mattering found it positively related to _______________ and negatively related to ________________.

a. self-esteem; alcoholism b. depression; self-esteem c. self-esteem; depression d. mastery; depression

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

67

PSY 228 Social Psychology

18. Given research and theory in life-course sociology, which of the following groups are most likely to be negatively affected by Hurricane Katrina?

a. a poor White family who survived the storm together b. a poor African-American family who survived the storm together c. a middle-class White man who lost his income and had no access to family or friends during the event d. a middle-class African-American family who survived the storm together

19. Tony and Rose both received word that they were called up for active duty in the military out of the reserve component of the forces. Tony is several years older with a wife and child while Rose is just finishing college. Which dimension of life course sociology best explains why Tony is more likely to be affected by the mobilization than Rose?

a. historical context b. linked lives c. social timing d. agency

20. Which of the following is NOT considered a primary agent of socialization?

a. family b. peers c. schools d. government

21. Elder’s study of the Great Depression generally showed that ______________.

a. all children were negatively affected by growing up in the Great Depression b. only children growing up in poverty were affected by the Great Depression c. the Great Depression had the strongest impact on children’s lives by changing family roles d. both b and c

22. Kohn’s work on class socialization generally showed that middle-class families tend to stress ______________ while working-class families emphasize _______________ in raising their children.

a. autonomy; conformity b. conformity; freedom c. freedom; independence d. conformity; autonomy

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

68

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. Rosenthal and Jacobson’s study of classroom interaction is important because:

a. it showed that children are taught to be racist in the classroom. b. it showed that IQ scores could be manipulated based on a group prejudice. c. it showed that children’s IQ scores were not linked to race at all. d. it showed that racist beliefs and values exist in every classroom.

24. Which of the following groups are most prevalent in American schools based on Adler and Adler’s research on peer culture?

a. the popular click b. the wannabes c. middle friendship circles d. social isolates

25. Group processes researcher is important to the study of socialization in what way?

a. It shows the importance of peer-group interactions in socialization processes. b. It shows the importance of family interactions. c. It shows the importance of the media. d. It emphasizes the impact of socialization in group settings.

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

69

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Two

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. Describe the concept of “doing gender.” Apply this process to other statuses in society (e.g., race, ethnicity or sexuality).

2. Review the three ways that interactionists view the development and maintenance of stratification in society.

3. Discuss the similarities and differences between identity theory and social identity theory.

 

 

You Can Do It

70

PSY 228 Social Psychology

With Unit 2 complete, you are half way through the course.

Take a break and reward yourself

for a job well done!

 

 

Objectives

71

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Seven The Social Psychology of Deviance

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Analyze how we define what is normal and what is deviant.

2. Determine how the construction of deviant labels contribute to the development of deviant lifestyles.

3. Judge how structural conditions influence individuals’ decisions to commit deviant acts.

4. Consider how group relationships influence the development of deviance and perceptions of deviance.

• Read pages 190-220 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

72

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter examines major sociological concepts and theories associated with the concept of deviance.

Interactionists generally view deviance as a normal part of the symbolic interaction process. Structural and group-centered views of deviance tend to focus on the social conditions that increase the likelihood of breaking laws. These views come from the larger social science specialty of criminology. This chapter emphasizes the broader sense of deviance in everyday life, before reviewing traditional theories and research on criminal forms of deviance.

 

 

Key Terms

73

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Anomie:

Attachment:

Belief:

Covering:

Deviance:

Indexicality:

Labeling theory:

Mores:

Reflexivity:

Social control theory:

 

 

Summary

74

PSY 228 Social Psychology

From a social-psychological perspective, deviance is a necessary part of the symbolic interaction process of negotiating social reality. Interactionism assumes that individuals decide to maintain (or break) social norms and standards during every interaction. Deviance allows for change in relationships and society as a whole.

Ethnomethodological perspectives of deviance emphasize how individuals construct and defend their views of social reality—the “real” boundaries of social life. People who can provide better accounts can convince others of those accounts, thus controlling the meaning of good and bad— deviance and conformity—in society.

Labeling theory is a major interactionist perspective of deviance. It is based on the notion that deviance is a consequence of a social process in which a negative characteristic becomes an element of an individual’s identity.

Strain and social control theories apply macrosociological perspectives of deviant behavior, arguing that deviance results from a larger set of societal conditions. Societal norms create limitations to how we can achieve legitimate goals in life. They also give goals that are unattainable for some people.

Groups provide both the motives and the knowledge necessary to commit crime. Differential association theory states that deviance is learned through interaction with others. This theory may help explain how and why people rationalize deviant behavior, especially in white-collar crimes committed by middle- and upper-class people.

 

 

Self Test

75

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Some individuals choose a life of deviance because of the satisfaction they derive from the act and deviant lifestyle.

a. True b. False

2. Which of the following statements best describes interactionist perspective(s) on deviance?

a. Deviance is relative to a given group of people or society. b. Deviance is relatively consistent across groups and society. c. What it means to be deviant is constructed through a process of indexicality and reflexivity. d. both a and c

3. According to labeling theory, a primary act of deviance does not always lead to a secondary act of deviance.

a. true b. false

4. According to Edwin Lemert, how is society involved in the deviance process?

a. during primary deviance, when society makes deviance symbolic in nature b. during secondary deviance, when society labels a person as deviant c. during the process of hiring police personnel to put away criminals d. during the process of committing the deviant act and accepting the deviant label

5. Which of the following is true of William Chambliss’ research on the Saints and the Roughnecks?

a. The Saints committed significantly less crime than the Roughnecks but were more likely to get caught. b. The Saints committed significantly less crime than the Roughnecks but only the Roughnecks got caught. c. The Saints committed somewhat higher levels of deviance as the Roughnecks but the Roughnecks were more likely to be caught than the Saints. d. The Roughnecks committed less crime and were rarely caught.

 

 

Self Test

76

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. How did Howard Becker’s research contribute to the understanding of deviance?

a. It showed the important role of deviant subcultures in the maintenance of deviant identities. b. It reinforced the relationship between primary and secondary deviance. c. He showed that even drug experiences can be influenced by social conditions. d. All of the above.

 

 

Answer Keys

77

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Anomie: A sense of “normlessness” where there is little consensus about what is right and what is wrong.

Attachment: Component of social control theory referring to emotional bonds with other people in society.

Belief: Component of social control theory referring to people’s respect for law and order in society.

Covering: Keeping a known stigma from creating tensions in interaction by downplaying it.

Deviance: Any behavior that departs from accepted practices in a society or group.

Indexicality: The process by which individuals index thoughts, feelings and behaviors from their own perspective.

Labeling theory: Theory that argues deviance is a consequence of a social process in which a negative characteristic becomes an element of an individual’s identity.

Mores: Widely held values and beliefs in a society.

Reflexivity: The process by which individuals think about a behavior within its social context and give meaning to it.

Social control theory: Theory that deviance results when individuals’ bonds with conventional society are weakened in some way.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

78

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. a

2. d

3. a

4. b

5. c

6. d

 

 

Notes

79

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

80

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Eight Mental Health and Illness

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Determine what it means to be mentally healthy.

2. Interpret how the definition of mental illness is constructed.

3. List the structural conditions in society that contribute to distress.

4. Identify resources that can buffer stress.

5. Assess how mental health can influence our sense of identity and interactions with others.

• Read pages 221-246 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

81

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter examines mental health as an outcome of social life, influenced by social conditions and as a status characteristic that impacts our social interactions.

Once you read the sociological perspectives on mental health and illness, you may rethink what it means to have psychological problems.

 

 

Key Terms

82

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Ambient hazards:

Chronic strains:

Colonization:

Intransigence:

Malaise:

Moderators:

Negative life events:

Sociology of mental health:

Total institutions:

Withdrawal:

 

 

Summary

83

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The history of madness and civilization shows that the meaning and treatment of mental illness has changed dramatically over the centuries. In Europe, into the seventeenth century, mental illness was considered similar to other forms of deviance such as criminality.

Sociologists view many manifestations of mental illness to be the result of social conditions that tax individuals’ capacity to manage their lives. The stress process model helps us understand the relationship of negative life events and chronic strains to our mental health and well-being, focusing also on the resources we use to manage those stressors.

Social and economic characteristics are associated with different levels of distress, with social class status a critical factor in the stress process. Other important social characteristics that are implicated in the experience of stressors, the level of resources, and the expressions of distress include gender, age and race/ethnicity.

According to the group processes perspective, people set up different expectations for individuals’ performance depending on their status characteristics. Mental illness may be considered a diffuse status characteristic that influences members’ expectations of the mentally ill in a group setting, as well as the contributions made by those members.

Mental illness may be a form of stigma for individuals, an attribute that is deeply discrediting. Patients housed in mental institutions may try to cope in many different ways, including conversion, intransigence and forms of withdrawal and colonization.

 

 

Self Test

84

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Why was 1656 an important date in the history of mental illness according to Michel Foucault?

a. It is the year that psycho-tropic drugs started becoming widely available in Europe. b. It is the year that the “hospital general” opened, marking the beginning of the great confinement of mentally ill people. c. It is the first year in which psychoanalysis was used to treat mentally ill people. d. It was the first year that psychotropic drugs were introduced to the new world.

2. Which of the following forces are associated with putting aspects of social life, including mental illness, under the boundaries of medical professionals?

a. the power and authority of medical professionals b. activities of social movements and interest groups c. directed organization on professional activities d. All of the above are forces affecting medicalization.

3. Which social theorist argued that mental illness is a “myth?”

a. Peter Conrad b. Michel Foucault c. Thomas Szaz d. Herbert Blumer

4. Horwitz and Wakefield’s research focused on trends to increasingly diagnose individuals with clinical depression as the “loss of sadness” in society.

a. True b. False

5. What kind of stressors do college students typically report?

a. adjustment problems b. death of a loved one c. job loss d. fear of professors

 

 

Self Test

85

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Which of the following is NOT a measurement of someone’s depression levels?

a. I did not feel like eating. b. I felt depressed. c. I felt everything was an effort. d. All of the above are measures of depression.

 

 

Answer Keys

86

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Ambient hazards: Exposure to poor community conditions such as crime, poor living conditions and lack of services.

Chronic strains: Day-to-day role strains that may cause mental health problems over time by the accumulation of small amounts of stress.

Colonization: A way in which patients manage institutionalization by showing that their institution is a desirable place to live.

Intransigence: A way in which patients manage institutionalization by rebelling against the staff expectations.

Malaise: A psychological state of unhappiness associated with living conditions in rural or urban areas.

Moderators: Part of the stress process that includes the personal and social resources that affect the direction or strength of the relationship between a stressor and mental health.

Negative life events: Part of the stress process referring to any event deemed unwanted or stressful to an individual.

Sociology of mental health: The study of the social arrangements that affect mental illness and its consequences.

Total institutions: Places where individuals are isolated from the rest of society.

Withdrawal: A way of managing life in an institution involving the curtailing of interaction with others.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

87

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. b

2. d

3. c

4. a

5. a

6. d

 

 

Notes

88

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

89

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Nine Attitudes, Values, and Behaviors

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the nature of an attitude.

2. Evaluate how researchers study attitudes and behaviors.

3. Describe how people construct attitudes.

4. Analyze how attitudes toward other people form in group contexts.

• Read pages 247-276 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

90

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to review the definition and measurement of attitudes and values and to examine research on how people use their time. Specific emphasis is given to prejudicial attitudes and behavior.

In this chapter, after discussing how attitudes are conceptualized, three areas of study within sociological social psychology will be emphasized. First, we will examine how attitudes are constructed from an interactionist perspective. Second, we will examine how attitudes vary by social location. Finally, we will apply the group processes perspective on attitudes, particularly related to attitudes toward other people in groups.

 

 

Key Terms

91

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Altruism:

Attitude:

In-groups:

Opinion:

Prejudice:

Prosocial behavior:

Social distance:

Status construction theory:

Time deepening:

Values and beliefs:

 

 

Summary

92

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Attitudes incorporate emotional, cognitive and behavioral dimensions—how we feel, think and act toward an object. Attitudes are measured in terms of their direction and strength, though people can also have nonattitudes toward objects. Time-use studies measure behaviors and can be characterized as either productive time, such as work and family care, or free time, including activities such as watching television or socializing.

The relationship between attitudes and behavior, on average, is typically small with an average correlation of 0.38. The weak relationship between attitudes and behavior—and of attitudes with other attitudes—may reflect poor measurement of attitudes or the complexities of attitudes themselves. Interactionist perspectives view attitudes like any other aspect of social life: they are constructed based on our interactions with other people. Our group memberships can have a large influence in our attitudes toward people in other groups based on the relative standing of those groups.

Some attitudes and opinions have been found to vary based on social statuses. Men and women regularly report different attitudes toward some social issues, as do African Americans and whites. Many attitudes toward major social issues have changed over the last half century, indicating that newer cohorts have different values than earlier generations.

Status construction theory posits that individuals develop status value through face-to-face interaction as well as from larger societal prejudices. Social identity theory emphasizes the role of in-groups and out-groups in our attitude development.

 

 

Self Test

93

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Your evaluation of a new political candidate may best be described as a(n) _____________ while your overall political ideology may better be described as a(n) _____________.

a. ideology; value b. value; attitude c. attitude; value d. both refer to attitudes

2. In a recent poll, Darnell told the interviewer that he does not care either way in the election. His response reflects what concept?

a. ideology b. values c. attitudes d. nonattitudes

3. Melissa had planned to play 18 holes of golf on the weekend but decided to cut it down to nine holes so that she could go to lunch with her boyfriend. What kind of behavior is she engaging in?

a. time deepening b. time management c. stress processing d. bureaucratic management

4. Americans have more productive time than free time.

a. true b. false

5. The relationship between our attitudes and behavior is typically ____________.

a. strong b. small c. 1 in average correlation d. 0 in average correlation

 

 

Self Test

94

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Research generally shows that American attitudes on most major social issues have been pretty stable over the last 30 years.

a. true b. false

 

 

Answer Keys

95

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Altruism: Refers to the motivation to help another person.

Attitude: A positive or negative evaluation of an object, a person, a group or an idea.

In-groups: Groups with whom we identify.

Opinion: The cognitive or “thinking” aspect of an attitude.

Prejudice: An attitude of dislike or active hostility toward a particular group in society.

Prosocial behavior: Includes any behavior that benefits another person.

Social distance: How close we feel to other people.

Status construction theory: Group processes theory that posits that individuals develop status value in face-to-face interactions with other people.

Time deepening: When people do more with the time that they have available to them.

Values and beliefs: Strongly held, relatively stable sets of attitudes.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

96

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. a

5. b

6. b

 

 

Notes

97

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 3 Examination Instructions

98

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Three Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

99

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Most college students represent which type of person in Merton’s typology of deviance?

a. conformists b. innovators c. ritualists d. retreatists

2. A homeless person who decides to live in the woods is probably best represented by which of the following people using Merton’s typology of deviance?

a. conformists b. innovators c. ritualists d. retreatists

3. Which of the following represent strain according to new interpretations of strain theory?

a. negative relationships with family and friends b. poverty c. unemployment d. All of the above.

4. Which theory of deviance tries to explain why individuals do not commit crime?

a. labeling theory b. strain theory c. social control theory d. theory of differential association

5. Sampson and Laub’s research on delinquent and non-delinquent youths in Boston found delinquency was greater when bonds with which social institutions were weakest?

a. family b. education c. work d. both a and c

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

100

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. In high school, Janet rarely got involved in smoking or drinking. In college, Janet found some friends who spent most of their off time consuming large amounts of alcohol and other drugs. Soon, she did the same and did not know anyone who did not spend their time that way. Which theory best explains Janet’s behavior given this limited amount of information?

a. labeling theory b. strain theory c. social control theory d. theory of differential association

7. Which of the following best exemplifies white collar crimes?

a. stealing a purse b. simple assault c. telling a lie to your friend d. embezzling from work

8. Murder would most likely be considered the breaking of a ________________ while picking your nose in public would be breaking a ________________.

a. more; folkway b. folkway; more c. norm; value d. both are mores

9. Scholars contend that ______________ and _______________ are two factors that affect the likelihood of committing a crime.

a. controls; formal sanctions b. certainty; severity c. certainty; informal sanctions d. severity; formal sanctions

10. Given the research on the epidemiology of mental health, which group is most likely to report problems with drinking? Depression?

a. married people; singles b. African-Americans; Latinos c. African-Americans; Whites d. men; women

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

101

PSY 228 Social Psychology

11. The stresses associated with living in urban areas come from _____________ while the stresses associated with rural areas tend to be a result of _____________.

a. lack of stimulation; ambient hazards b. ambient hazards; lack of stimulation c. urban malaise; rural malaise d. negative life events; chronic stresses

12. How do group processes scholars examine the concept of mental illness?

a. It is viewed as a status characteristic like race or gender. b. It is viewed as a normal part of group interactions. c. It is viewed as a major area of group research. d. It is viewed as a way for individuals in groups to negotiate identity.

13. Which of the following would be considered a total institution?

a. your college b. a police station c. a prison d. a family household

14. Which sociologist is most associated with the concept of stigma?

a. Erving Goffman b. Georg Simmel c. George Herbert Mead d. Herbert Blumer

15. Goffman’s research on total institutions showed that many patients in insane asylums generally ____________ their roles as patients.

a. resist b. accept c. use colonization to cope with d. None of the above.

16. Which of the following coping strategies emphasize patients’ attempts to rebel against asylum staff?

a. conversion b. intransigence c. withdrawal d. colonization

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

102

PSY 228 Social Psychology

17. The loss of a job is represented in which component of the stress process?

a. stressors b. outcomes c. mediators and moderators d. social and economic characteristics

18. LaPiere’s study of prejudice clearly showed that most people _____________.

a. have some prejudice b. act on their prejudices c. do not act on their prejudices d. both a and c

19. Overall, American political attitudes lean on being ______________.

a. very conservative b. moderately conservative c. moderately liberal d. very liberal

20. Which of the following groups could be identified as most liberal in the U.S.?

a. females living in the Midwest b. females living on the West Coast c. males living in the Midwest d. males living on the West Coast

21. Which of the following groups spend the most time on childcare? Which group has shown an increase in time spent with childcare?

a. women for both questions b. men for both questions c. men; women d. women; men

22. Which of the following social theorists is most associated with studying racial prejudice in the United States?

a. George Herbert Mead b. W.E.B. Du Bois c. Talcott Parsons d. William Thomas

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

103

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. Based on status construction theory, what would be the best way to get what you want out of a group and leave a positive impression?

a. Act like a very nice person. b. Act like a generous person. c. Act like a majority member of society. d. Act like a high-status person.

24. Willer’s research showing presidential approval ratings increasing after the 9/11 terrorist attacks in the U.S. clearly showed ____________.

a. in-group bias tendencies b. out-group bias tendencies c. prejudicial biases d. ideological alliances

25. The slow treatment of Hurricane Katrina victims was used as an example of ____________ in your text.

a. government inefficiency b. conscious racism c. unconscious racism d. None of the above.

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

104

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Three

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. How do symbolic interactionists examine the social construction of mental health? Specifically, review Foucault’s historical analysis of mental illness in western cultures and the medicalization of deviance.

2. Discuss how community conditions can impact individuals’ mental health. Be specific about the role of stressors and resources available under different community conditions (e.g., urban vs. rural; poor vs. middle class).

3. Review the different dimensions of attitudes. How does the complexity in attitudes help to explain the relatively weak relationship between a person’s attitudes and their behaviors?

 

 

You Can Do It

105

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 3 is done! You’re close to the finish line and we’re cheering you on to victory!

 

 

Objectives

106

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Ten The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Distinguish the components of emotions.

2. Determine how people learn emotions.

3. Consider how identity relates to emotions.

4. Evaluate how our statuses in society affect our uses of emotions.

5. Interpret the norms that govern the use of emotions in different social settings.

6. Predict how group settings affect emotions.

• Read pages 277-306 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

107

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter reviews the many dimensions of sentiment and emotions. It also examines the role of emotions in the development and maintenance of society, as well as the impact of society and culture on the development and expression of emotions.

This chapter will start by reviewing how sociologists study the upward movement of emotions in the creation of society and the social construction of emotions more generally. It will also review the structured nature of emotions and how society shapes the scope and expression of emotions.

 

 

Key Terms

108

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect:

Cybernetic approach:

Distributive justice:

Edgework:

Emotional cues:

Emotional intelligence:

Emotional scripts:

Emotions:

Interaction ritual:

Mood:

Potency:

Procedure justice:

Sentiment:

Transient sentiments:

 

 

Summary

109

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociological perspectives on emotion emphasize the cybernetic approach to the study of emotions: emotions radiate upward from individual-level interactions to maintain social structures as well as downward when social structure helps to shape our emotions.

Symbolic interactionists believe we learn emotions like we learn about other aspects of social life: through interaction with other people. The sociocentric model of emotional socialization argues that the primary means of learning about emotions comes from social instruction, whereas affect control theory argues that people use emotions as signals as to how well they are performing their role in a given situation.

People use emotional scripts and cues to help use and manage emotions in day-to-day life. The theory of interaction ritual chains emphasizes the role of emotions in maintaining macrosociological social institutions.

The power-status approach to emotions says that emotions result from real, anticipated, imagined or recollected outcomes of social interactions. The gain or loss of power and status are primary ways in which our position affects our emotional life.

The norms that govern our emotional lives are called feeling rules. We may receive “rule reminders” from friends and family when we do not “feel” appropriately. Emotion work refers to the generation of prescribed emotion to meet the demands of a job. The commodification of emotions is associated with the concept of “McDonaldization.”

The socioemotional economy is a system for regulating emotional resources among people that links individuals into larger networks of people. Sympathy is an important example of this economy. Emotion culture refers to a society’s expectation about how to experience different emotions. According to the group processes perspective, there are at least two ways in which exchange processes may affect your emotions: the concern over getting what is fair out of the group and the way in which distributions are made in a group. Emotions can also affect status relationships in group exchanges such that higher-status people are freer to express certain emotions than lower status people.

 

 

Self Test

110

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Based on Thoit’s treatment of emotions, which of the following is NOT a dimension of emotion?

a. situational cues b. physiological changes c. an arousal d. an emotion label

2. The moment that society gives meaning to an emotion it becomes a _____________.

a. sentiment b. feeling c. mood d. affect

3. Clem has been feeling sad all day long. What term best describes his emotional state?

a. sentiment b. feeling c. mood d. affect

4. Which of the following would be considered a primary emotion?

a. anger b. fear c. depression d. All of the above are primary emotions.

5. Non-verbal behaviors play a lesser role than verbal communication does.

a. True b. False

6. The meanings of emotions are stable over a life course.

a. True b. False

 

 

Self Test

111

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Answer Keys

112

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect: An evaluative component of an emotion.

Cybernetic approach: The study of emotion that assumes that social conditions shape our emotions; and in turn, our emotions act to maintain social structures.

Distributive justice: In exchange theory, it is the belief about the fairness of what people get.

Edgework: Thrill-seeking behaviors designed to produce intense emotions.

Emotional cues: Information about when and what emotions are appropriate in a given social setting.

Emotional intelligence: Our ability to control and employ emotions in our social environments.

Emotional scripts: Expectations about when and how to act excited, angry, sad and so on.

Emotions: Feelings that incorporate situational cures, physiological changes, expressive gestures and an emotion label.

Interaction ritual: The exchange of symbols and emotion between individuals essential to maintaining society.

Mood: A diffuse emotional state that lasts a relatively long period of time.

Potency: Element of affect control theory referring to how a person’s sentiment toward an object is powerful or powerless.

Procedure justice: In exchange theory, it is the beliefs about the fairness of the methods used to make distributions.

Sentiment: A feeling that has been given meaning by society.

Transient sentiments: Sentiments unique to specific interactions.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

113

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. a

3. c

4. d

5. b

6. b

 

 

Notes

114

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

115

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Eleven Collective Behavior

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Analyze how crowds contribute to the development of mass hysteria.

2. Identify theories that explain individuals’ behavior in large groups.

3. Decide whether structural conditions affect crowd behaviors.

4. Chart the phases of collective behavior found in large social movements.

5. Evaluate how group and individual motivations interact in social movements.

• Read pages 307-336 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

116

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to review theories of collective behavior and the current research on behaviors that occur during collective events.

This chapter will review theories and research related to the concepts of collective behavior, collective action and social movements.

 

 

Key Terms

117

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Acting crowds:

Collective identity:

Craze:

Expressive crowd:

Hostile outbursts:

Mass:

Milling:

Routine dispersal:

Social dilemma:

Structural strain:

 

 

Summary

118

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Traditional theories of collective behavior, collective action and social movements emphasize the ways in which crowds transform the individuals acting in them, turning them into irrational beings. Rational choice perspectives on collective action emphasize the idea that people in groups are purposive in their decisions and actions in everyday life, including group events.

Research on protests in the United States over the last decades has shown that most protests and marches are small in nature. Very few marches go over 100,000 participants and very few involve civil disobedience. However, only the largest protests receive much media attention.

Sociological social psychologists also study how we develop collective memories, examining the conditions that produce spontaneous thoughts or feelings at the same time; how conditions coalesce to bring us to believe something is true; what an event means to a people; and, finally, how we categorize those memories with other historical events.

Research evidence in the group processes tradition indicates that people will be likely to form coalitions when they are faced with large power disparities. The free-rider problem and social dilemmas are typical problems found in behavior within and between groups.

 

 

Self Test

119

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. The March for Life protest against abortion is probably best described as a ______________.

a. social action b. collective action c. social movement d. collective movement

2. Gustave LeBon’s book, The Crowd, is based on observations of which of the following events?

a. the Russian Revolution b. The French Revolution c. WWII d. the Chinese Revolution

3. Which theorist is most associated with mass hysteria theory?

a. Carl Couch b. Herbert Blumer c. Neil Smelser d. Gustave LeBon

4. According to Blumer’s theory of circular reaction, when do individuals in crowds start to lose control and act without much rationality?

a. during the milling phase when individuals are encouraged to act out against authorities b. during the interpretation phase when individuals are encouraged to act out against authorities c. during the interpretation phase when individuals lose their ability to communicate about appropriate behavior d. during the milling phase when individuals lose their ability to communicate about appropriate behavior

5. Research on crowd and protest behaviors has generally supported LeBon and other scholars from the mass hysteria tradition.

a. true b. false

 

 

Self Test

120

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Guilford went to a protest against the school’s smoking policy because he truly believed that it was wrong and should be changed. He had been a leader in the anti-smoking group for a number of years prior to the march. According to Turner and Killian, which kind of participant is he?

a. ego-involved participant b. concerned participant c. insecure participant d. curiosity seeker

 

 

Answer Keys

121

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Acting crowds: Groups of people with a focus,or goal who act with unity to achieve the goal.

Collective identity: An individual’s sense of connection with a larger community or group.

Craze: When large numbers of people become obsessed with something like the purchase of a product or an activity.

Expressive crowd: Crowd that lacks a goal and is primarily a setting for emotional release, which often occurs through rhythmical actions such as applause, dancing or singing.

Hostile outbursts: Any type of mass violence or killings.

Mass: Anonymous individuals from many social strata that are loosely organized.

Milling: Part of the circular reaction process in which individuals at an event anxiously move about in a seemingly aimless and random fashion.

Routine dispersal: A dispersal in which participants leave a gathering in a rational, orderly fashion.

Social dilemma: A situation whereby if every person acts in his or her own best interests, the results will be bad for the group.

Structural strain: Element of value-added theory stating there must be some level of conflict over some issue or problem to initiate collective action.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

122

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. b

3. d

4. c

5. b

6. a

 

 

Notes

123

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 4 Examination Instructions

124

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Four Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

125

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Which of the following jobs is most likely to have an extensive set of feeling rules?

a. a stay-at-home mother b. a cashier at McDonalds c. a plumber d. a farmer

2. Zurcher’s concept of emotional scripts most closely resembles what other concept reviewed in this chapter?

a. emotion rules b. emotional energy c. feeling rules d. sentiment

3. Milan was a little perturbed when his boss refused to accept some flowers he had brought as a sign of his sadness over the loss of her sister. Which sympathy rule did his boss break?

a. Do not make false claims of sympathy. b. Do not claim too much sympathy. c. Claim some sympathy. d. Reciprocate to other for their gift of sympathy.

4. Based on Lofland’s analysis of the role of culture in the expression of grief in society, which of the following places would have the hardest time coping with the loss of a child?

a. modern day Asia b. modern day Europe c. modern day Ethiopia d. modern day America

5. Swidler’s research on love in American culture revealed what?

a. Americans find it hard to fall in love. b. Americans initiate relationships based on a mythical view of emotional bonding between lovers. c. Americans use a more realistic view of love to sustain relationships on a day-to-day basis. d. both b and c

 

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

126

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. According to exchange theory and research, which of the following situations is most likely to produce a positive emotion?

a. an exchange in which people get the amount equal to their position in the group b. an exchange in which you get as much as you gave c. an exchange in which you get less than you gave d. All of these exchanges will produce a positive emotion.

7. According to the exchange theory, what sentiment is EXPECTED when you get more out of an exchange than you give?

a. sadness b. guilt c. happiness d. joy

8. According to research and theory of group processes, how does power in relationships affect our emotions?

a. Relationships characterized as having equal power engender positive emotion. b. Power makes us feel guilty in social exchanges. c. Relationships characterized as having unequal power engender positive emotion. d. Power gives us a positive feeling only when we deserve it during social exchanges.

9. Secondary emotions are ________________.

a. learned through socialization b. similar to sentiments c. social emotions d. All the above.

10. Your feeling that a district attorney has a lot of power refer to which dimension of affect control theory?

a. evaluation b. potency c. activity d. strength

11. What emotion did wheelchair users employ when managing interactions with “stand-up” people in Cahill and Eggleston’s study of people with a handicap?

a. fear b. humor c. love d. anger

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

127

PSY 228 Social Psychology

12. Your friend, Chloe, goes through a bad break-up and her cat runs away all in the same week. When you and Chloe are out to dinner one night you run into Sarah, a good friend of yours from school. Chloe expresses the tragedies that have befallen her the past week to Sarah who proceeds to listen and then changes the conversation. Once back to your dinner, Chloe expresses her dismay and hurt that Sarah did not seem concerned about her break-up or loss of her cat. Sarah is upset because her ______________ were not met.

a. social scripts b. emotional scripts c. sentiments d. emotions

13. According to Randall Collins’ theory of interaction ritual chains, what role does emotion play in the maintenance of society?

a. Emotional energies provide the reason for maintaining interactions in society. b. Emotional scripts provide information about how to behave in society. c. Emotions give us cues as to whether we are performing our roles in society adequately. d. Emotions exist within a series of “feeling rules” about how to behave in society.

14. Which of the following jobs does NOT demand high levels of emotion work.

a. waitress b. teacher c. customer service agent d. None of the above.

15. Steve turned to the people around him for help in deciding how to act at a local protest. According to perception control theory, what form of perception control is he using?

a. independent instruction b. interdependent instruction c. organizational instruction d. interactional instruction

16. What is the best predictor of an individual participating in a march or a riot?

a. her structural position b. her concern over a social condition in society c. her being asked to go to the event d. her access to resources

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

128

PSY 228 Social Psychology

17. The vast majority of protests and other collective events have which kind of dispersal?

a. routine dispersal b. emergency dispersal c. coerced dispersal d. active dispersal

18. Which of the following are typical behaviors at a large protest march?

a. People break off into a series of smaller groups. b. People form lines to access various facilities. c. People develop arcs and circles around speakers. d. All of the above are typical behaviors.

19. ____________ is thrill-seeking behaviors designed to produce intense emotions.

a. Potency b. Edgework c. Cyberneticism d. None of the above.

20. Enduring emotional meanings in a given society is known as _____________.

a. fundamental sentiments b. transient sentiments c. emotional cues d. emotion work

21. The debate as to whether or not you should stop and look at an accident while driving by, possibly slowing down the traffic behind you, is an example of a ______________.

a. social dilemma b. free rider problem c. group conformity d. mass hysteria

22. Public radio—radio stations that rely, in part, on listener support to stay in business—run the risk of what problem?

a. a social dilemma b. the free rider problem c. group conformity d. mass hysteria

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

129

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. The use of _______________ is important to the forming of collective memories.

a. storytelling b. collective behavior c. collective emotion d. framing

24. According to emergent norm theory, the _______________ is the type of person who participates in the group out of curiosity.

a. ego-involved participant b. curiosity seeker c. concerned participant d. insecure participant

25. Phase of collective behavior referring to the factors that bring people together into the same place at the same time.

a. gathering phase b. homogeneity of mood c. assembling phase d. interpretive phase

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

130

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Four

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. Review the theory of interaction ritual chains. How do our emotions contribute to the maintenance of society according to this theory?

2. Review the role of emotions in exchange processes. What conditions are most likely to produce positive emotions? Negative emotions? What role does power and status play in the development of emotions in exchange relationships?

3. Apply group processes theory and research related to coalitions to explain the development of social movements more broadly. First, define the concept of coalition. Second, describe how coalitions work and the conditions that make them successful. Third, apply this information to explain how and why people initiate social movements in society.

 

 

You Can Do It

131

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Congratulations! You have completed Unit 4.

Now let’s sharpen our pencils for the Final Exam.

We are confident you will do well.

 

 

Final Examination Instructions

132

PSY 228 Social Psychology

About the Final Examination

After you have successfully completed all of the unit examinations and writing assignments, it will be time for you to take the final examination.

The final examination will be provided by student services only after you have completed all four unit examinations and submitted all four writing assignments.

Scheduling a Final Examination

Final examination requests can be submitted via U.S. mail, online through the Coast Connection student portal, or by calling the Testing Department at (714) 547-9625.

A final exam scheduling form is located on the last page of this study guide. Please fill out ALL required fields and mail it to the university.

If you would like to request a final exam online, log into the Coast Connection student portal and click on My Academic Plan. Select the course you are working on and submit the Final Exam Request form located at the bottom of the page. ALL INFORMATION MUST BE FILLED IN.

Final exams will only be sent if you have completed all four unit examinations and submitted all four writing assignments.

Submitting Your Final Examination

Final Examinations can be submitted by mail, fax or online through the Coast Connection student portal.

After you have completed your exam, you or your proctor can fax it to the Grading Department at (714) 547-1451 or mail it to the university. When faxing exams, please do not resize your fax.

For online submissions, once you have logged into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the final examination. You must input the unique password that was sent to your proctor in order to unlock your final examination questions. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

 

 

Final Exam Scheduling Form

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The university requires all final examinations to be completed under the supervision of a proctor. Please provide information on your designated proctor. ALL information must be filled in; otherwise, your request will not be processed.

Date _____________________________ Student I.D. ______________________________________________

Student Name ________________________________________________________________________________

Address ______________________________________________________________________________________

City __________________________________________________ State _________________________________

Zip Code ________________ Country ____________________________________________________________

E-Mail Address _______________________________________________________________________________

Daytime Telephone _____________________________ Evening Telephone _____________________________

Course Information:

Course Number ___________ Course Title _______________________________________________________

Please send the Final Examination to:

Proctor’s Name _______________________________________________________________________________

Proctor’s Relationship to Student ________________________________________________________________

Street Address _______________________________________________________________________

City ______________________________ State _________________ Zip Code __________________________

Country __________________________________ Email Address ___________________________

Daytime Telephone _________________________ Evening Telephone _________________________________

Student’s Signature ________________________________________________________________________

133

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Traditional theories of collective behavior, collective action and social movements emphasize the ways in which crowds transform the individuals acting in them, turning them into irrational beings. Rational choice perspectives on collective action emphasize the idea that people in groups are purposive in their decisions and actions in everyday life, including group events.

Research on protests in the United States over the last decades has shown that most protests and marches are small in nature. Very few marches go over 100,000 participants and very few involve civil disobedience. However, only the largest protests receive much media attention.

Sociological social psychologists also study how we develop collective memories, examining the conditions that produce spontaneous thoughts or feelings at the same time; how conditions coalesce to bring us to believe something is true; what an event means to a people; and, finally, how we categorize those memories with other historical events.

Research evidence in the group processes tradition indicates that people will be likely to form coalitions when they are faced with large power disparities. The free-rider problem and social dilemmas are typical problems found in behavior within and between groups.

Self Test

119

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. The March for Life protest against abortion is probably best described as a ______________.

a. social action b. collective action c. social movement d. collective movement

2. Gustave LeBon’s book, The Crowd, is based on observations of which of the following events?

a. the Russian Revolution b. The French Revolution c. WWII d. the Chinese Revolution

3. Which theorist is most associated with mass hysteria theory?

a. Carl Couch b. Herbert Blumer c. Neil Smelser d. Gustave LeBon

4. According to Blumer’s theory of circular reaction, when do individuals in crowds start to lose control and act without much rationality?

a. during the milling phase when individuals are encouraged to act out against authorities b. during the interpretation phase when individuals are encouraged to act out against authorities c. during the interpretation phase when individuals lose their ability to communicate about appropriate behavior d. during the milling phase when individuals lose their ability to communicate about appropriate behavior

5. Research on crowd and protest behaviors has generally supported LeBon and other scholars from the mass hysteria tradition.

a. true b. false

Self Test

120

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Guilford went to a protest against the school’s smoking policy because he truly believed that it was wrong and should be changed. He had been a leader in the anti-smoking group for a number of years prior to the march. According to Turner and Killian, which kind of participant is he?

a. ego-involved participant b. concerned participant c. insecure participant d. curiosity seeker

Answer Keys

121

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Acting crowds: Groups of people with a focus,or goal who act with unity to achieve the goal.

Collective identity: An individual’s sense of connection with a larger community or group.

Craze: When large numbers of people become obsessed with something like the purchase of a product or an activity.

Expressive crowd: Crowd that lacks a goal and is primarily a setting for emotional release, which often occurs through rhythmical actions such as applause, dancing or singing.

Hostile outbursts: Any type of mass violence or killings.

Mass: Anonymous individuals from many social strata that are loosely organized.

Milling: Part of the circular reaction process in which individuals at an event anxiously move about in a seemingly aimless and random fashion.

Routine dispersal: A dispersal in which participants leave a gathering in a rational, orderly fashion.

Social dilemma: A situation whereby if every person acts in his or her own best interests, the results will be bad for the group.

Structural strain: Element of value-added theory stating there must be some level of conflict over some issue or problem to initiate collective action.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

122

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. b

3. d

4. c

5. b

6. a

Notes

123

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 4 Examination Instructions

124

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Four Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 4 Examination

125

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Which of the following jobs is most likely to have an extensive set of feeling rules?

a. a stay-at-home mother b. a cashier at McDonalds c. a plumber d. a farmer

2. Zurcher’s concept of emotional scripts most closely resembles what other concept reviewed in this chapter?

a. emotion rules b. emotional energy c. feeling rules d. sentiment

3. Milan was a little perturbed when his boss refused to accept some flowers he had brought as a sign of his sadness over the loss of her sister. Which sympathy rule did his boss break?

a. Do not make false claims of sympathy. b. Do not claim too much sympathy. c. Claim some sympathy. d. Reciprocate to other for their gift of sympathy.

4. Based on Lofland’s analysis of the role of culture in the expression of grief in society, which of the following places would have the hardest time coping with the loss of a child?

a. modern day Asia b. modern day Europe c. modern day Ethiopia d. modern day America

5. Swidler’s research on love in American culture revealed what?

a. Americans find it hard to fall in love. b. Americans initiate relationships based on a mythical view of emotional bonding between lovers. c. Americans use a more realistic view of love to sustain relationships on a day-to-day basis. d. both b and c

Unit 4 Examination

126

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. According to exchange theory and research, which of the following situations is most likely to produce a positive emotion?

a. an exchange in which people get the amount equal to their position in the group b. an exchange in which you get as much as you gave c. an exchange in which you get less than you gave d. All of these exchanges will produce a positive emotion.

7. According to the exchange theory, what sentiment is EXPECTED when you get more out of an exchange than you give?

a. sadness b. guilt c. happiness d. joy

8. According to research and theory of group processes, how does power in relationships affect our emotions?

a. Relationships characterized as having equal power engender positive emotion. b. Power makes us feel guilty in social exchanges. c. Relationships characterized as having unequal power engender positive emotion. d. Power gives us a positive feeling only when we deserve it during social exchanges.

9. Secondary emotions are ________________.

a. learned through socialization b. similar to sentiments c. social emotions d. All the above.

10. Your feeling that a district attorney has a lot of power refer to which dimension of affect control theory?

a. evaluation b. potency c. activity d. strength

11. What emotion did wheelchair users employ when managing interactions with “stand-up” people in Cahill and Eggleston’s study of people with a handicap?

a. fear b. humor c. love d. anger

Unit 4 Examination

127

PSY 228 Social Psychology

12. Your friend, Chloe, goes through a bad break-up and her cat runs away all in the same week. When you and Chloe are out to dinner one night you run into Sarah, a good friend of yours from school. Chloe expresses the tragedies that have befallen her the past week to Sarah who proceeds to listen and then changes the conversation. Once back to your dinner, Chloe expresses her dismay and hurt that Sarah did not seem concerned about her break-up or loss of her cat. Sarah is upset because her ______________ were not met.

a. social scripts b. emotional scripts c. sentiments d. emotions

13. According to Randall Collins’ theory of interaction ritual chains, what role does emotion play in the maintenance of society?

a. Emotional energies provide the reason for maintaining interactions in society. b. Emotional scripts provide information about how to behave in society. c. Emotions give us cues as to whether we are performing our roles in society adequately. d. Emotions exist within a series of “feeling rules” about how to behave in society.

14. Which of the following jobs does NOT demand high levels of emotion work.

a. waitress b. teacher c. customer service agent d. None of the above.

15. Steve turned to the people around him for help in deciding how to act at a local protest. According to perception control theory, what form of perception control is he using?

a. independent instruction b. interdependent instruction c. organizational instruction d. interactional instruction

16. What is the best predictor of an individual participating in a march or a riot?

a. her structural position b. her concern over a social condition in society c. her being asked to go to the event d. her access to resources

Unit 4 Examination

128

PSY 228 Social Psychology

17. The vast majority of protests and other collective events have which kind of dispersal?

a. routine dispersal b. emergency dispersal c. coerced dispersal d. active dispersal

18. Which of the following are typical behaviors at a large protest march?

a. People break off into a series of smaller groups. b. People form lines to access various facilities. c. People develop arcs and circles around speakers. d. All of the above are typical behaviors.

19. ____________ is thrill-seeking behaviors designed to produce intense emotions.

a. Potency b. Edgework c. Cyberneticism d. None of the above.

20. Enduring emotional meanings in a given society is known as _____________.

a. fundamental sentiments b. transient sentiments c. emotional cues d. emotion work

21. The debate as to whether or not you should stop and look at an accident while driving by, possibly slowing down the traffic behind you, is an example of a ______________.

a. social dilemma b. free rider problem c. group conformity d. mass hysteria

22. Public radio—radio stations that rely, in part, on listener support to stay in business—run the risk of what problem?

a. a social dilemma b. the free rider problem c. group conformity d. mass hysteria

Unit 4 Examination

129

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. The use of _______________ is important to the forming of collective memories.

a. storytelling b. collective behavior c. collective emotion d. framing

24. According to emergent norm theory, the _______________ is the type of person who participates in the group out of curiosity.

a. ego-involved participant b. curiosity seeker c. concerned participant d. insecure participant

25. Phase of collective behavior referring to the factors that bring people together into the same place at the same time.

a. gathering phase b. homogeneity of mood c. assembling phase d. interpretive phase

Unit 4 Examination

130

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Four

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. Review the theory of interaction ritual chains. How do our emotions contribute to the maintenance of society according to this theory?

2. Review the role of emotions in exchange processes. What conditions are most likely to produce positive emotions? Negative emotions? What role does power and status play in the development of emotions in exchange relationships?

3. Apply group processes theory and research related to coalitions to explain the development of social movements more broadly. First, define the concept of coalition. Second, describe how coalitions work and the conditions that make them successful. Third, apply this information to explain how and why people initiate social movements in society.

You Can Do It

131

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Congratulations! You have completed Unit 4.

Now let’s sharpen our pencils for the Final Exam.

We are confident you will do well.

Final Examination Instructions

132

PSY 228 Social Psychology

About the Final Examination

After you have successfully completed all of the unit examinations and writing assignments, it will be time for you to take the final examination.

The final examination will be provided by student services only after you have completed all four unit examinations and submitted all four writing assignments.

Scheduling a Final Examination

Final examination requests can be submitted via U.S. mail, online through the Coast Connection student portal, or by calling the Testing Department at (714) 547-9625.

A final exam scheduling form is located on the last page of this study guide. Please fill out ALL required fields and mail it to the university.

If you would like to request a final exam online, log into the Coast Connection student portal and click on My Academic Plan. Select the course you are working on and submit the Final Exam Request form located at the bottom of the page. ALL INFORMATION MUST BE FILLED IN.

Final exams will only be sent if you have completed all four unit examinations and submitted all four writing assignments.

Submitting Your Final Examination

Final Examinations can be submitted by mail, fax or online through the Coast Connection student portal.

After you have completed your exam, you or your proctor can fax it to the Grading Department at (714) 547-1451 or mail it to the university. When faxing exams, please do not resize your fax.

For online submissions, once you have logged into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the final examination. You must input the unique password that was sent to your proctor in order to unlock your final examination questions. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Final Exam Scheduling Form

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The university requires all final examinations to be completed under the supervision of a proctor. Please provide information on your designated proctor. ALL information must be filled in; otherwise, your request will not be processed.

Date _____________________________ Student I.D. ______________________________________________

Student Name ________________________________________________________________________________

Address ______________________________________________________________________________________

City __________________________________________________ State _________________________________

Zip Code ________________ Country ____________________________________________________________

E-Mail Address _______________________________________________________________________________

Daytime Telephone _____________________________ Evening Telephone _____________________________

Course Information:

Course Number ___________ Course Title _______________________________________________________

Please send the Final Examination to:

Proctor’s Name _______________________________________________________________________________

Proctor’s Relationship to Student ________________________________________________________________

Street Address _______________________________________________________________________

City ______________________________ State _________________ Zip Code __________________________

Country __________________________________ Email Address ___________________________

Daytime Telephone _________________________ Evening Telephone _________________________________

Student’s Signature ________________________________________________________________________

133

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Qualitative Findings and Social Work Interventions

 Qualitative Findings and Social Work Interventions

Discussion 1: Qualitative Findings and Social Work Interventions

Evidence-based social work practice calls for the use of research data to guide the development of social work interventions on the micro, mezzo and/or macro-levels. Kearney (2001) described ways qualitative research findings can inform practice. Qualitative findings can help social workers understand the clients’ experiences and “what it may feel like” (Kearney, 2001). Therefore, social workers can develop clinical interventions that take into account the experiences of their clients. Qualitative findings can also help social workers monitor their clients. For example, if after reading a qualitative study on how domestic violence survivors respond to stress, they can monitor for specific stress behaviors and symptoms (Kearney, 2001). In addition, they can educate their client what stress behaviors to look for and teach them specific interventions to reduce stress (Kearney, 2001)

Given the increasing diversity that characterizes the landscape in the United States, social workers need to take into account culture when formulating interventions. Social workers can utilize qualitative findings to plan interventions in a culturally meaningful manner for the client.

To prepare for this Discussion, read Knight et al.’s (2014) study from this week’s required resources. Carefully review the findings, the photographs, and how the researchers wrote up the findings. Finally, review the specific macro-, meso-, and micro-oriented recommendations.

Then read Marsigilia and Booth’s article about how to adapt interventions so that they are culturally relevant and sensitive to the population the intervention is designed for. Finally, review the chapter written by Lee et al. on conducting research in racial and ethnic minority communities.

Kearney, M. (2001). Levels and applications of qualitative research evidence. Research in Nursing and Health, 24, 145–153.

Post the following:

1. Using one of the direct quotes and/or photos from Knight et al.’s study, analyze it by drawing up a tentative meaning. Discuss how this would specifically inform one intervention recommendation you would make for social work practice with the homeless. This recommendation can be on the micro, meso, or macro level.

2. Next, explain how you would adapt the above practice recommendation that you identified so that it is culturally sensitive and relevant for African Americans, Hispanics, or Asian immigrants. (Select only 1 group). Apply one of the cultural adaptations that Marsigilia and Booth reviewed (i.e., content adaption to include surface and/or deep culture, cognitive adaptations, affective-motivational adaptations, etc.)(pp. 424-426). Be as specific as you can, using citations to support your ideas.

References (use 3 or more)

Knight, K. R., Lopez, A. M., Comfort, M., Shumway, M., Cohen, J., & Riley, E. D. (2014). Single room occupancy (SRO) hotels as mental health risk environments among impoverished women: The intersection of policy, drug use, trauma, and urban space. International Journal of Drug Policy, 25(3), 556-561.

Document: Lee, M. Y, Wang, X., Cao, Y., Liu, C., & Zaharlick, A. (2016). Creating a culturally competent research agenda. In A. Carten, A. Siskind, & M. P. Greene (Eds.), Strategies for deconstructing racism in the health and human services (pp. 51-65). New York, NY: Oxford University Press. (PDF)

Copyright 2016 by Oxford University Press. Used with permission of Oxford University Press via the Copyright Clearance Center. 

Marsiglia, F.F. & Booth, J.M. (2015). Cultural adaptations of interventions in real practice settings. Research on Social Work Practice, 25(4), 423-432.

Note: Retrieved from the Walden Library databases.

Vaismoradi, M., Turunen, H., & Bondas, T. (2013). Content analysis and thematic analysis: Implications for conducting a qualitative descriptive study. Nursing & Health Sciences, 15(3), 398-405.

Discussion 2: Addressing Change

What does a leader do when things do not go as planned? How can a leader help to restore or improve an organization’s operations when a situation stalls or interferes with its functions? Although taking a proactive approach to planning is desired, change may occur suddenly and unexpectedly causing immediate consequences. A skilled leader must be able to assess a situation in order to prioritize the steps necessary to stabilize the organization. This process must focus on a short-term strategy to address immediate concerns and include strategic decisions that will affect the long-term sustainability of the organization.

For this Discussion, you address the Southeast Planning Group (SPG) case study in the Social Work Case Studies: Concentration Year text.

· Post an analysis of the change that took place in the SPG. 

· Furthermore, suggest one strategy that might improve the organizational climate and return the organization to optimal functioning. 

· Provide support for your suggested strategy, explaining why it would be effective.

References (use 3 or more)

Lauffer, A. (2011). Understanding your social agency (3rd ed.). Washington, DC: Sage.

Northouse, P. G. (2018). Introduction to leadership: Concepts and practice (4th ed.). Washington, DC: Sage.

Finley, D. S., Rogers, G., Napier, M., & Wyatt, J. (2011). From needs-based segmentation to program realignment: Transformation of YWCA of Calgary. Administration in Social Work, 35(3), 299–323.

Plummer, S.-B., Makris, S., & Brocksen, S. M. (Eds.). (2014b). Social work case studies: Concentration year. Baltimore, MD: Laureate International Universities Publishing [Vital Source e-reader].

“Social Work Supervision, Leadership, and Administration: The Southeast Planning Group” (pp. 85–86)

Working With Organizations: The Southeast Planning Group

The Southeast Planning Group (SPG) is an organization that was created in 2000 to facilitate the Office of Housing and Urban Development’s (HUD) Continuum of Care planning process. The key elements of the approach were strategic planning, data collection systems, and an inclusive process that involved clients and service providers. The fundamental components of the system are 1) outreach, intake, and assessment; 2) emergency shelter; 3) transitional housing; and 4) permanent housing and permanent supportive housing. The outreach, intake, and assessment component identifies an individual’s or family’s needs in order to connect them with the appropriate resources. Emergency shelter provides a safe alternative to living on the streets. Transitional housing provides supportive services such as recovery services and life skills training to help clients develop the skills necessary for permanent housing. The final component, permanent housing, works with clients to obtain long-term affordable housing.

SPG works with the local government; service providers; the faith, academic, and business communities; homeless and formerly homeless individuals; and concerned citizens in the designated service area. During the first 5 years of its existence, SPG was staffed by one part-time and four full-time staff members and oversight was provided by a 21-member board. SPG’s founding director was well respected and liked in the community. She was noted for her ability to bring stakeholders together across sectors and focus on the single mission of ending homelessness.

After serving 5 years as the executive director, she abruptly resigned amidst rumors that she was forced out by the board. Although she had been effective in bringing people together, there were concerns that the goals and objectives had not been met, and there was a lack of confidence in her ability to grow the organization. Approximately one month after her resignation, a new executive director was hired.

One of the new director’s first priorities was to reconfigure the structure of the organization in order to increase efficiency. As a result of the restructuring, two positions were eliminated. The people who were let go had been with the organization since it was created, and similar to the previous director, they had strong ties to the community. Once the community and SPG’s partners learned about the changes, there was suspicion about the new leadership and the direction they wanted to take the organization. Stakeholders were split in their views of the changes—some agreed that they were necessary in order to advance the goals of the organization, while others felt the new leadership was “taking over” with a hidden agenda to promote its own self-interest.

I worked with the group as an evaluation consultant to assess the SPG partnership during this period of transition. In order to assess how these changes were perceived by the stakeholders, I conducted key informant interviews with various stakeholders, both internal and external to the organization. The partners shared many insights about how the month without consistent leadership contributed to the uncertainty about SPG’s purpose and strategy, and it was generally agreed that the leadership transition was not handled well. The results from the evaluation were used to help SPG identify strategies to improve communication with stakeholders and utilize the director’s leadership role to build upon the organization’s past successes while preparing for future growth.

(Plummer 51-52)

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

The Groth Typology Of Rape And The Massachusetts Treatment Center’s Classification Systems Of Rapists.

The Groth Typology Of Rape And The Massachusetts Treatment Center’s Classification Systems Of Rapists.

RESPONSES:

1. According to the U.S Department of Justice Archives, the new definition of rape is: “The penetration, no matter how slight, of the vagina or anus with any body part or object, or oral penetration by a sex organ of another person, without the consent of the victim” (Sullivan, Rogers, & Moran, 2017). The Groth typology was developed almost forty years ago. This typology of rape is based on presumed motivations and aims that underline almost all rapes committed by adult males. Groth believed rape to be a “pseudo-sexual act”. He also believed that rape is a symptom of some psychological dysfunction, whether is temporary and transient or chronic and repetitive. Groth divided rape into three major categories. First, anger rape, second, power rape, and sadistic rape. He believed rape is always and foremost an aggressive act.

The Massachusetts Treatment Center’s Classification Systems of rapists has many similarities to Groth’s typology. The MTC has originally identified four major categories of rapists. One, displaced aggression, two, compensatory, three, sexually aggressive, and four, impulsive rapists. Anger rapists are similar to displaced aggression rapists, sadistic rapists are similar to sexual aggressive rapists. The MTC typology is more extensive and more complex because is based on ongoing research.

2.The Groth Typology was developed around forty years ago. Groth stated that there is always other motivations, rather than simple sexual arousal, for rapists. He divides rape into three different categories, including anger rape, power rape, and sadistic rape. Anger rape is typically brutal, degrading, and extremely forceful. Anger rapists have some internal anger, usually towards a specific woman, and take it out on their victims. Power rape is when the rapists is establishing dominance and control over their victim. The aggressiveness depends on how submissive the victim is. Victims of power rape are often kidnapped and experience multiple assaults. Sadistic rape involves the rapist experiencing arousal and pleasure of the victim’s torture and abuse.

Massachusetts Treatment Center’s Classification Systems of rapists is far more complex and researched than Groth’s. It continues to be researched and updated, unlike The Groth Typology. MTC also identifies four types of rapist, rather than three. The types include displaced aggression, compensatory, sexual aggressive, and impulse rapists. Although the two typologies are different, their division of types of rape are similar. Anger rape is similar to displaced aggression, sadistic rape is similar to sexual aggressive rape, and power rape is similar to compensatory rape. The final MTC type of rape is the impulse rape, in which rapists usually have no other history of sexual assault and committed it spontaneously when the opportunity was there. This type has no similarities with any of Groth’s types.

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Case Study Assignment

Case Study Assignment

Page 1

PSY105 CASE STUDY

Type Your Name Here

Introduction to Psychology
April 3, 2019

Given what you have learned in Chapter 3 about brain development and social development, explain why Gloria’s son is making poor decisions. (Use page 3.4 for brain development and page 3.6 for social development).

What specific strategies can Gloria use to help her son make better decisions? (Hint: pages 3.7 and 3.17 have resources to help)

From what you have learned about human development and self-regulation, why do you think these strategies will be effective?

(Hint – based on what you offered as a suggestion in question 2, why would that strategy help Gloria’s son)

How does Reggie’s mindset affect the way that he prepares for the compliance test? (Hint: page 7.6 will help you learn about mindset)

 

Use brain plasticity (neuroplasticity) to explain how Reggie can start to develop a growth mindset. What can Reggie do to actually change his brain so that he can adopt a growth mindset approach? (Hint: page 7.6 will be a great resource for this question)

Suggest at least three study strategies that Reggie can use to study for the compliance test. Based on what you have learned about memory in Chapter 4, explain why these would be effective study techniques. (Hint: page 4.15 has suggestions to improve your memory)

What are the big five personality traits? When thinking about the big five personality traits, on which ones do Gloria and Lakeisha differ the most? (Hint: page 3.12 helps you learn about the big five traits)

Give some advice to Gloria. How can she use emotional regulation to work more effectively with Lakeisha? Give at least two things that Gloria can do and provide a rationale for why these will be effective. (Hint: Pages 6.4 and 6.11 have resources to help with this question)

References

Myers, D. (2017). Psychology (4th ed.). Asheville, NC: Soomo Learning. Available from hMp://www.webtexts.com

Case Study Assignment Template Note: Please use this template to complete the Case Study Assignment (due in Week 7). All you need to do is write a paragraph within each box contained in the template to receive credit for this assignment.

 

View Help Videos

Case Study Assignment Overview

Case Study Section 1 Review

Case Study Section 2 Review

Case Study Section 3 Review

 

_________________

 

Gloria has recently graduated college and started a new job. Her coworkers seem very nice, and Gloria has gotten to know Lakeisha and Reggie the best.

Reggie is a friendly older man who often talks about his plans for retirement in five years. He likes to make people laugh but often jokes about his struggles to learn new programs and technology.

Gloria and Lakeisha have been assigned to work on a project together. Lakeisha is very organized and has prepared a list of to-do items along with due dates. She even color-coded the list to indicate which partner will do each item. Gloria, who is more laid-back, feels a bit uncomfortable with this micromanaging from Lakeisha, who has only been at the job a few months longer than she has. Gloria wonders if Lakeisha thinks she is either lazy or stupid, and she does not look forward to working on this project. In the past, Gloria attempted to communicate her feelings with a co-worker; however, her coworker told Gloria that she needed to put her feelings aside and just do the work assigned to her. As Gloria ponders having a conversation with Lakeisha, she starts to feel overwhelmed and thinks she might have to ask to be removed from this project.

Still, she and Lakeisha have connected because they are both single mothers of teenagers. Gloria confides in Lakeisha about her 16-year-old son who has started making poor choices and is currently grounded for sneaking out of the house and getting drunk at a party the night before a big exam.

The company recently informed the team that there will be a compliance test on new safety policies, which employees will need to pass in order to keep their jobs. The company has provided materials to study as well as optional practice exams. Gloria and Lakeisha have signed up to take the first practice test. Reggie, however, jokes that he will probably wait until the night before the test to read the material. As the date of the test approaches, Reggie becomes increasingly nervous. He makes frequent comments about how hard it is for him to learn a different way of doing the jobs that he has been doing for years, joking that “you can’t teach an old man new tricks.”

1. Gloria’s son is making poor decisions. Given what you have learned about a) brain development and b) social development in Chapter 3:
Explain why Gloria’s son is making those poor decisions.
Discuss specific strategies Gloria can implement to help her son make better choices.
Use specific concepts related to development and self-regulation to explain why these strategies would be effective.
2. Reggie is demonstrating a fixed mindset. How is Reggie’s mindset affecting the way he prepares for the new compliance test?
Use brain plasticity (neuroplasticity) to explain how Reggie can start to develop a growth mindset.
Suggest study strategies for Reggie so that he will be prepared for the compliance test. Use specific concepts from Chapter 4 to explain why these strategies will be effective.
3. Consider Gloria and Lakeisha’s different approaches to the project. On which of the Big 5 personality traits do they most differ?
Give advice to Gloria on how she can use emotional regulation and cognitive reappraisal to work with Lakeisha.

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Psychology homework help

Psychology homework help

I need only 4 simple pages without any out resources USE JUST THE FILE ATTACHED AND THE LINK AT THE BOTTOM. **With the verb (I). I will attach  Pamela Hays’ Addressing Model and the first part that I did about myself.

The name of this class is Culture and Gender in Counseling and Psychotherapy

The paper has to be divided into two parts. The first part I did in the first half of the semester, and the second part is due now.

It is a self-assessment. The first part was about my self-identity. The second part is:

The second section is due in Week 11 and should be 4-6 pages in APA style. This section is to include a self-assessment using Pamela Hays’ Addressing Model discussed in class, along with reflections on changes or new awareness that have emerged as a result of the course. In other words, reflect on Part 1. You are to turn in the graded copy of Part 1 along with Part 2.

……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Here, the professor said:

C) Self-Assessment.  This paper has two parts. The first section will be a follow-up to in-class activities presented in Weeks 1 and 2.  For this assignment, you will reflect on your cultural identity.  Honesty is expected and will not be penalized; however, a respectful tone is required.  The first section should be 2-3 pages in APA style and be an honest assessment of your cultural identity and how you see yourself at the start of this class. We will do a few in-class exercises during the first two weeks to support this process. The second section is due in Week 11 and should be 4-6 pages in APA style. This section is to include a self-assessment using Pamela Hays’ Addressing Model discussed in class, along with reflections on changes or new awareness that have emerged as a result of the course. In other words, reflect on Part 1.

The following are questions to consider in the completion of this assignment:

a) Which one of these identities (from the ADDRESSING model) do you find to be most salient? Why? Which is least salient? Why?

b) What does it mean to you (and to American society as a whole) to be part of this group?

c) What are some of your recollections about interactions and experiences that have significantly impacted your cultural identity development as part of this group?  Have your feelings changed or stayed the same about being part of this group?

d) Have you contributed to discrimination or oppression as part of this group?  Have you been a victim of discrimination or oppression as part of this group?

e) What messages have you received (directly or indirectly) about people who share your identity and people who do not share your identity?

f) What are some skills you have learned in this class that you can use when working with individuals from diverse groups?

g) Have your views changed since taking this class?  If so, how?  What are some areas you still need to work on?

The link for Pamela Hay’s

https://ltc.highline.edu/cce/Addressing%20Complexities%20in%20Counseling%20(ADRESSING%20model)-%20Hays.pdf

 

 

Running head: SELF-ASSESSMENT 1

SELF-ASSESSMENT 2

 

Self-Assessment Part1

 

Self-Assessment Part1

Everyone has different cultural identity. Each of them has their owns’ cultures, behavior, ethics, religions, languages, education, social..etc. People are different in the whole world. They cannot be similar, but they can respect each other. In this essay, I will reflect my cultural identity.

I am from Saudi Arabia, and we have our behavior that connect with our religion and habits. For example, all of my family members live together at the same house. The daughter or the son cannot live in separate home until they get married. That means, they can move to another house when they want to get married. That because of my religion, which prevents intimacy between any couple without marriage.

Furthermore, in my culture, women cannot drive a car. This related to our habits cultures. Men think that is dangers for woman to drive by herself. They believe that is a part from their responsibility. I do not agree with them, however, I respect their opinions. Thus, women having hard time moving inside the city especially we do not have good transportation.

As a Muslims woman, I grow up in a conservative family. For example, I and other females in my family wear hijab, which is a scarf on our head with long and wide dress. In addition, we do not shake hand with other gender. Sometimes this put me in embarrassing situation with people who are from different cultures. We like our religion and respect other religions and beliefs.

I grow up in a big lovely family, which I have seven siblings. They are five sweet sisters, and two great brothers. I really appreciate my parents’ fatigue. They support all of us and they did their best to make us good people. Therefore, we have strong communication between each other and all of us complete our education until Bachelor’s degree or higher.

My parents give me the power to have a family too. I marry in early age, which I was only 18 years old. In my culture, this is normal age to get married for girls, but it is very young and up normal for other cultures. Men in my culture can get married as soon as they have a job. I got my decision to be marry for my husband when I was in high school. Now, I am so happy and proud to be a mother for two beautiful children, and a wife for an awesome husband.

Schools and universities in Saudi Arabia are very different form the United States. For example, form first grade to university students study in separate schools for each grander. That means males and females study in divided building, and that do not happened in the United States, which student with different gender study together. This difference come by cultures behaviors.

My language is Arabic, and it is a basic language in the Middle East. Recently, I learned English language as a second language after I decided to study my master degree in the United States. I got intensified English classes for one year and half. That because the fact that my county gives me the opportunity to study here after I took a high grade in my under gradate.

Therefore, I am a graduate student in Chestnut Hill College. I am proud that I achieve part of my dreams, which was to study Psychology in under graduate, and Clinical and Counseling in my graduate; however, many people around me tried to change my mind in choosing this major. Unfortunately, they think is a major that take for madness. I did not hear for them because of my desire to help people getting better life.

In spite the fact that I am shy in making friendship, I am a social person and I like to have many friends. I am always interesting for having friends, but it is difficult for me to have a friend from different gender. In my culture, it is fine for females to work with males, but it should not be friendship.

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Psychology homework help

Psychology homework help

MILT 375

 

APA Format Paper Instructions

 

This assignment will prepare you for developing well-written and formatted papers for this course, and others in which you use APA formatting. The paper is to be 4 pages that demonstrate your ability and understanding of APA format and writing style.

 

The paper will consist of:

 

1. A Title/Cover Page: This page of the assignment will have your running head and page number, your title of the assignment, your name, and specific information necessary for any APA research paper. Make sure this page and every page is formatted with correct spacing, content positioning, type font, size of font, etc.

 

2. Abstract Page: Write this abstract as the one you would write for your Needs Assessment paper. It is very important that you read the APA manual to understand what an abstract is supposed to be. Make sure it is in the correct tense and correct format. You will not be able to give your reader your final findings as indicated in number 3 in the instructions for the Needs Assessment paper, yet you can write the rest of the abstract with a fair amount of accuracy. Remember, this paper is an “exercise” to get a head start, demonstrate your ability to develop a good APA formatted paper, and receive feedback on this before you submit the other 2 writing assignments for the course.

 

3. Paper Body Page: This page will consist of 2 basic components. The first will be a brief introduction paragraph. Introduce the Needs Assessment Paper. Even though you have not done a lot of reading or research yet, this should be fairly easy to do. The second component is a correctly formatted demonstration of all 5 APA level headings. You will need to use each heading with a single sentence telling your instructor which level it is. See the example of the first heading below.

 

Level 1 heading

 

A level 1 heading is bold face font, centered and uses upper and lower case font.

 

4. Reference Page: Use your page 4 to demonstrate your ability to cite references correctly. You will need to format the page while citing a website/internet article, a research article, book, the Bible, and an eBook. Use care to make sure all spacing, capitals, abbreviations, etc. are done according to APA.

 

Submit this assignment by 11:59 p.m. (ET) on Monday of Module/Week 3.

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Psychology Theoretical Analysis homework help

Psychology Theoretical Analysis homework help

Ethical and Professional Issues in Group Practice

Those who seek to be professional group leaders must be willing to examine both their ethical standards and their level of competence. Among the ethical issues treated in this chapter are the rights of group members, including informed consent and confidentiality; the psychological risks of groups; personal relationships with clients; socializing among members; the impact of the group leader’s values; addressing spiritual and religious values of group members; working effectively and ethically with diverse clients; and the uses and misuses of group techniques. In my opinion, a central ethical issue in group work pertains to the group leader’s competence. Special attention is given to ways of determining competence, professional training standards, and adjuncts to academic preparation of group counselors. Also highlighted are ethical issues involved in training group workers. The final section outlines issues of legal liability and malpractice.

As a responsible group practitioner, you are challenged to clarify your thinking about the ethical and professional issues discussed in this chapter. Although you are obligated to be familiar with, and bound by, the ethics codes of your professional organization, many of these codes offer only general guidelines. You will need to learn how to make ethical decisions in practical situations. The ethics codes provide a general framework from which to operate, but you must apply these principles to concrete cases. The Association for Specialists in Group Work’s (2008) “Best Practice Guidelines” is reproduced in the Student Manual that accompanies this textbook. You may want to refer to these guidelines often, especially as you study Chapters 1 through 5.

The Rights of Group Participants

My experience has taught me that those who enter groups are frequently unaware both of their basic rights as participants and of their responsibilities. As a group leader, you are responsible for helping prospective members understand what their rights and responsibilities are. This section offers a detailed discussion of these issues.

A Basic Right: Informed Consent

If basic information about the group is discussed at the initial session, the participants are likely to be far more cooperative and active. A leader who does this as a matter of policy demonstrates honesty and respect for group members and fosters the trust necessary for members to be open and active. Such a leader has obtained the informed consent of the participants.

Informed consent is a process that begins with presenting basic information about group treatment to potential group members to enable them to make better decisions about whether or not to enter and how to participate in a group (Fallon, 2006). Members have a right to receive basic information before joining a group, and they have a right to expect certain other information during the course of the group. Discussing informed consent is not a one-time event, and clients should understand at the outset that informed consent is an ongoing process.

It is a good policy to provide a professional disclosure statement to group members that includes written information on a variety of topics pertaining to the nature of the group, including therapists’ qualifications, techniques often used in the group, the rights and obligations of group members, and the risks and benefits of participating in the group. Other information that potential members should have includes alternatives to group treatment; policies regarding appointments, fees, and insurance; and the nature and limitations of confidentiality in a group. Group leaders should not overwhelm members with too much information at one time because an overly lengthy informed consent process may replace a collaborative working relationship with a legalistic framework, which is not in the best interests of group members (Fallon, 2006).

Pregroup Disclosures Here is a list of what group participants have a right to expect before they make the decision to join a group:

• A clear statement regarding the purpose of the group

• A description of the group format, procedures, and ground rules

• An initial interview to determine whether this particular group with this particular leader is at this time appropriate to their needs

• An opportunity to seek information about the group, to pose questions, and to explore concerns

• A discussion of ways the group process may or may not be congruent with the cultural beliefs and values of group members

• A statement describing the education, training, and qualifications of the group leader

• Information concerning fees and expenses including fees for a follow-up session, should there be one; also, information about length of the group, frequency and duration of meetings, group goals, and techniques being employed

• Information about the psychological risks involved in participating in a group

• Knowledge of the circumstances in which confidentiality must be broken because of legal, ethical, or professional reasons

• Clarification of what services can and cannot be provided within the group

• Help from the group leader in developing personal goals

• A clear understanding of the division of responsibility between leader and participants

• A discussion of the rights and responsibilities of group members

Clients’ Rights During the Group Here is a list of what members have a right to expect during the course of the group:

• Guidance concerning what is expected of them

• Notice of any research involving the group and of any audio- or videotaping of group sessions

• Assistance from the group leader in translating group learning into action in everyday life

• Opportunities to discuss what one has learned in the group and to bring some closure to the group experience so participants are not left with unnecessary unfinished business

• A consultation with the group leader should a crisis arise as a direct result of participation in the group, or a referral to other sources of help if further help is not available from the group leader

• The exercise of reasonable safeguards on the leader’s part to minimize the potential risks of the group; respect for member privacy with regard to what the person will reveal as well as to the degree of disclosure

• Observance of confidentiality on the part of the leader and other group members

• Freedom from having values imposed by the leader or other members

• The right to be treated as an individual and accorded dignity and respect

It is critical that group leaders stress that participation in groups carries certain responsibilities as well as rights. These responsibilities include attending regularly, being prompt, taking risks, being willing to talk about oneself, giving others feedback, maintaining confidentiality, and defining one’s personal goals for group participation. Some of these group norms may pose problems for certain members because of their cultural background. It is essential that the expectations for group members be clear from the outset and that members be in agreement with such expectations. Of course, part of the group process involves the participation of members in developing norms that will influence their behavior in a group situation.

Issues in Involuntary Groups

When participation is mandatory, informed consent is as important as it is when working with voluntary groups. Much effort needs to be directed toward fully informing involuntary members of the nature and goals of the group, the procedures to be used, their rights and responsibilities, the limits of confidentiality, and what effect their level of participation in the group will have on critical decisions about them outside of the group. When groups are involuntary, every attempt should be made to enlist the cooperation of the members and encourage them to continue attending voluntarily. One way of doing this is to spend some time with involuntary clients helping them reframe the notion “I have to come to this group.” They do have some choice whether they will attend group or deal with the consequences of not being in the group. If “involuntary” members choose not to participate in the group, they will need to be prepared to deal with consequences such as being expelled from school, doing jail time, or being in juvenile detention.

Another alternative would be for the group leader to accept involuntary group members only for an initial limited period. There is something to be said for giving reluctant members a chance to see for themselves what a group is about and then eventually (say, after three sessions) letting them decide whether they will return. Group leaders can inform members that it is their choice of how they will use the time in the group. The members can be encouraged to explore their fears and reluctance to fully participate in the group, as well as the consequences of not participating in the group. Ethical practice would seem to require that group leaders fully explore these issues with clients who are sent to them.

The Freedom to Leave a Group

Leaders should be clear about their policies pertaining to attendance, commitment to remaining in a group for a predetermined number of sessions, and leaving a particular session if they do not like what is going on in the group. If members simply drop out of the group, it is extremely difficult to develop a working level of trust or to establish group cohesion. The topic of leaving the group should be discussed during the initial session, and the leader’s attitudes and policies need to be clear from the outset.

In my view, group members have a responsibility to the leaders and other members to explain why they want to leave. There are a number of reasons for such a policy. For one thing, it can be deleterious to members to leave without having been able to discuss what they considered threatening or negative in the experience. If they leave without discussing their intended departure, they are likely to be left with unfinished business, and so are the remaining members. A member’s dropping out may damage the cohesion and trust in a group; the remaining members may think that they in some way “caused” the departure. It is a good practice to tell members that if they are even thinking of withdrawing they should bring the matter up for exploration in a session. It is critical that members be encouraged to discuss their departure, at least with the group leader.

If a group is counterproductive for an individual, that person has a right to leave the group. Ideally, both the group leader and the members will work cooperatively to determine the degree to which a group experience is productive or counterproductive. If, at a mutually agreed-upon time, members still choose not to participate in a group, I believe they should be allowed to drop out without being subjected to pressure by the leader and other members to remain.

Freedom From Coercion and Undue Pressure

Members can reasonably expect to be respected by the group and not to be subjected to coercion and undue group pressure. However, some degree of group pressure is inevitable, and it is even therapeutic in many instances. People in a group are challenged to examine their self-defeating beliefs and behaviors and are encouraged to recognize what they are doing and determine whether they want to remain the way they are. Further, in a counseling group, there is pressure in sessions to speak up, to make personal disclosures, to take certain risks, to share one’s reactions to the here-and-now events within the group, and to be honest with the group. All of these expectations should be explained to potential group members during the screening and orientation session. Some individuals may not want to join a group if they will be expected to participate in personal ways. It is essential for group leaders to differentiate between destructive pressure and therapeutic pressure. People often need a certain degree of pressure to challenge them to take the risks involved in becoming fully invested in the group.

The Right to Confidentiality

Confidentiality is a central ethical issue in group counseling, and it is an essential condition for effective group work. The legal concept of privileged communication is not recognized in a group setting unless there is a statutory exception. However, protecting the confidentiality of group members is an ethical mandate, and it is the responsibility of the counselor to address this at the outset of a group (Wheeler & Bertram, 2012). The American Counseling Association’s (ACA, 2014) Code of Ethics makes this statement concerning confidentiality in groups: “In group work, counselors clearly explain the importance and parameters of confidentiality for the specific group” (Standard B.4.a.). The ASGW (2008) addresses the added complexity entailed in coming to a mutual understanding of confidentiality in diverse groups: “Group Workers maintain awareness and sensitivity regarding the cultural meaning of confidentiality and privacy. Group Workers respect differing views toward disclosure of information” (A.6.). As a leader, you are required to keep the confidences of group members, but you have the added responsibility of impressing on the members the necessity of maintaining the confidential nature of whatever is revealed in the group. This matter bears reinforcement along the way, from the initial screening interview to the final group session.

Although group leaders are themselves ethically and legally bound to maintain confidentiality, a group member who violates another member’s confidences faces no legal consequences (Lasky & Riva, 2006). If the rationale for confidentiality is clearly presented to each individual during the preliminary interview and again to the group as a whole at the initial session, there is less chance that members will treat this matter lightly. Confidentiality is often on the minds of people when they join a group, so it is timely to fully explore this issue. A good practice is to remind participants from time to time of the danger of inadvertently revealing confidences. My experience continues to teach me that members rarely gossip maliciously about others in their group. However, people do tend to talk more than they should outside the group and can unwittingly offer information about fellow members that should not be revealed. If the maintenance of confidentiality is a matter of concern, the subject should be discussed fully in a group session.

In groups in institutions, agencies, and schools, where members know and have frequent contact with one another outside of the group, confidentiality becomes especially important and is more difficult to maintain. Clearly, there is no way to ensure that group members will respect the confidences of others. As a group leader, you cannot guarantee confidentiality in a group setting because you cannot control absolutely what the members do or do not keep private. Members have a right to know that absolute confidentiality in groups is difficult and at times even unrealistic (Lasky & Riva, 2006). However, you can discuss the matter, express your convictions about the importance of maintaining confidentiality, and have members sign contracts agreeing to it. Your own modeling and the importance that you place on maintaining confidentiality will be crucial in setting norms for members to follow. Ultimately, it is up to the members to respect the need for confidentiality and to maintain it.

Members have the right to know of any audio- or videotape recordings that might be made of group sessions, and the purpose for which they will be used. Written permission should be secured before recording any session. If the tapes will be used for research purposes or will be critiqued by a supervisor or other students in a group supervision session, the members have the right to deny permission.

Exceptions to Confidentiality Group leaders have the ethical responsibility of informing members of the limits of confidentiality within the group setting. For instance, leaders can explain to members when they are legally required to break confidentiality. Leaders can add that they can assure confidentiality on their own part but not on the part of other members. It is important to encourage members to bring up matters pertaining to confidentiality whenever they are concerned about them. The ACA Code of Ethics (ACA, 2014) identifies exceptions to confidentiality that members should understand:

The general requirement that counselors keep information confidential does not apply when disclosure is required to protect clients or identified others from serious and foreseeable harm or when legal requirements demand that confidential information must be revealed. Counselors consult with other professionals when in doubt as to the validity of an exception. Additional considerations apply when addressing end-of-life issues. (Standard B.2.a.)

It is a good policy for group workers to give a written statement to each member setting forth the limitations of confidentiality and spelling out specific situations that would require breaching confidences. Such straightforwardness with members from the outset does a great deal to create trust because members then know where they stand.

Of course, it is imperative that those who lead groups become familiar with the state laws that have an impact on their practice. Group leaders do well to let members know that legal privilege does not apply to group treatment, unless provided by state statute (ASGW, 2008). The American Group Psychotherapy Association (AGPA, 2002) states: “The group therapist is knowledgeable about the limits of privileged communication as they apply to group therapy and informs group members of those limits” (2.2). Counselors are legally required to report clients’ threats to harm themselves or others. This requirement also covers cases of child abuse or neglect, incest, child molestation, elder abuse, and dependent-adult abuse. Taking an extreme case, if one of your group members convincingly threatens to seriously injure another person, you may have to consult your supervisor or other colleagues, warn the intended victim, and even notify the appropriate authorities. The threat need not involve others; clients may exhibit bizarre behavior that requires you to take steps to have them evaluated and possibly hospitalized.

If you lead a group at a correctional institution or a psychiatric hospital, you may be required to act as more than a counselor; for instance, you will probably have to record in a member’s file certain behaviors that he or she exhibits in the group. At the same time, your responsibility to your clients requires you to inform them that you are recording and passing on certain information. Generally speaking, you will find that you have a better chance of gaining the cooperation of group members if you are candid about a situation rather than hiding your disclosures and thereby putting yourself in the position of violating their confidences.

Confidentiality With Minors In a group for children in a school setting, care needs to be exerted to ensure that what goes on within the group is not a subject for discussion in class or on the playground. If children begin to talk about other members outside of the group, this will certainly block progress and damage the cohesion of the group. As is the case for adults and adolescents, children require the safety of knowing they will be treated respectfully. On this matter, the American School Counselor Association’s (ASCA, 2010) Ethical Standards for School Counselors provides an important guideline:

Professional school counselors establish clear expectations in the group setting, and clearly state that confidentiality in group counseling cannot be guaranteed. Given the developmental and chronological ages of minors in schools, recognize the tenuous nature of confidentiality for minors renders some topics inappropriate for group work in a school setting. (A.6.c.)

Group leaders must also be careful in how they talk about the children to teachers and administrators. Those who do groups with children need to explain what will be kept confidential and what may need to be shared with school personnel. This also applies to talking with parents. Do parents have a right to information that is disclosed by their children in a group? The answer to that question depends on whether you are looking at it from a legal, ethical, or professional viewpoint. It is a good practice to require written permission from parents before allowing a minor to enter a group. It is useful to have this permission include a brief statement concerning the purpose of the group, along with comments regarding the importance of confidentiality as a prerequisite to accomplishing such purposes, and your intention not to violate any confidences. It may sometimes be useful to provide parents with information about their child if this can be done without violating confidences. One useful practice to protect the privacy of what goes on in the group is to provide feedback to parents in a session with the child and one or both parents. In this way the child will have less cause to doubt the group leader’s integrity in keeping his or her disclosures private.

Group leaders have a responsibility in groups that involve children and adolescents to take measures to increase the chances that confidentiality will be kept. It is important to work cooperatively with parents and guardians as well as to enlist the trust of the young people. It is also useful to teach minors, in terms that they are capable of understanding, about the nature, purposes, and limitations of confidentiality. In summary, group leaders would do well to continue to remind members to bring up their concerns about confidentiality for discussion whenever the issue is on their minds.

Social Media in Group Work: Confidentiality and Privacy Considerations Confidentiality and privacy issues take on special considerations when group members and their therapists communicate with each other online and when group members communicate with other members via the Internet. There is an increased risk of breach of confidentiality when members of a counseling group engage in social media (Wheeler & Bertram, 2012). Group counselors must address the parameters of online behavior through informed consent and should establish ground rules regarding members’ commitment to avoid posting pictures, comments, or any type of confidential information about other members online. Developing these rules needs to be part of the discussion about norms governing the group.

Breaches of confidentiality or privacy may occur when members share their own information online, especially if they struggle with poor boundaries. Others may lack the technological skills and knowledge to protect information that is intended to remain private. Educate members to share their experience with others outside the group by talking about their own experience, reactions, and insights rather than telling stories about other members or mentioning others in the group by name.

The Issue of Psychological Risks in Groups

Groups can be powerful catalysts for personal change, and they can also pose definite risks for group members. Ethical practice demands that group practitioners inform prospective participants of the potential risks involved in the group experience. The nature of these risks—which include life changes that cause disruption, hostile and destructive confrontations, scapegoating, and harmful socializing among members—and what the leader can do about them are the subject of this section. It is unrealistic to expect that a group will not involve risk, for all meaningful learning in life involves taking some kind of risk. It is the ethical responsibility of the group leader to ensure that prospective group members are aware of the potential negative outcomes that are associated with various risks and to take every precaution against them.

The ACA Code of Ethics (ACA, 2014) specifies that “[i]n a group setting, counselors take reasonable precautions to protect clients from physical, emotional, or psychological trauma” (Standard A.9.b.). This includes discussing the impact of potential life changes and helping group members explore their readiness to deal with such changes. A minimal expectation is that group leaders discuss with members the advantages and disadvantages of a given group, that they prepare the members to deal with any problems that might grow out of the group experience, and that they be alert to the fears and reservations that members might have.

It is also incumbent on group leaders to have a broad and deep understanding of the forces that operate in groups and how to mobilize those forces for ethical ends. Unless leaders exert caution, members not only may miss the benefits of a group but also could be harmed by it psychologically. Group leaders must take precautionary measures to reduce unnecessary psychological risks by knowing members’ limits, respecting their requests, developing an invitational style as opposed to an aggressive or dictatorial style, avoiding abrasive confrontations, describing behavior rather than making judgments, and presenting hunches in a tentative way.

Here are a few of the problems group leaders can warn members about and work toward minimizing:

1. Members should be made aware of the possibility that participating in a group (or any other therapeutic endeavor) may disrupt their lives. As members become increasingly self-aware, they may make changes in their lives that, although constructive in the long run, can create turmoil along the way. For example, changes that a woman makes as a result of what she gains in a group may evoke resistance, even hostility, in her partner, with a resulting strain on their relationship. Furthermore, others with whom she is close may not appreciate her changes and may prefer the person she was before getting involved in counseling.

2. Occasionally an individual member may be singled out as the scapegoat of the group. Other group members may “gang up” on this person, blaming him or her for problems of the group. Clearly, the group leader must take firm steps to deal with such occurrences.

3. Confrontation, a valuable and powerful tool in any group, can be misused, especially when it is employed to destructively attack another. Intrusive interventions, overly confrontive leader tactics, and pushing members beyond their limits often produce negative outcomes. Here, again, leaders (and members as well) must be on guard against behavior that can pose a serious psychological risk for group participants. To lessen the risks of destructive confrontation, leaders can model the type of confrontation that focuses on specific behaviors and can avoid making judgments about members. They can teach members how to talk about themselves and the reactions they are having to a certain behavior pattern of a given member.

4. If safety is lacking in a group, members who have been subjected to social injustices may be revictimized when they explore their experiences in the group.

One way to minimize psychological risks in groups is to use a contract in which the leader specifies his or her responsibilities and the members specify their commitment by stating what they are willing to explore and do in the group. Such a contract reduces the chances that members will be exploited or will leave the group feeling that they have had a negative experience.

Another safeguard against unnecessary risk is the ability of leaders to recognize the boundaries of their competence and to restrict themselves to working only with those groups for which their training and experience have properly prepared them. Ultimately, the group leader is responsible for minimizing the inevitable psychological risks associated with group activity. To best assume this responsibility, the leader will undergo the supervised practice and course work described later in this chapter.

The Ethics of Group Leaders’ Actions

Being a group practitioner demands sensitivity to the needs of the members of your group and to the impact your values and techniques can have on them. It also demands an awareness of community standards of practice, the policies of the agency where you work, and the state laws that govern group counseling. In the mental health professions in general, there is a trend toward accountability and responsible practice. Graduate programs in counseling and social work are increasingly requiring course work in ethics and the law.

Almost all of the professional organizations have gone on record as affirming that their members should be aware of prevailing community standards and of the impact that conformity to or deviation from these standards will have on their practice. These organizations state explicitly that professionals will avoid exploitation of the therapeutic relationship, will not damage the trust that is necessary for a relationship to be therapeutic, and will avoid dual relationships if they interfere with the primary therapeutic aims. Typically, the ethics codes caution against attempting to blend social or personal relationships with professional ones and stress the importance of maintaining appropriate boundaries.

Group counselors need to be mindful about misusing their role and power to meet their personal needs at the expense of clients. To do so is to commit an ethical violation. The role of leaders is to help members meet their goals, not to become friends with their clients. Of course, leaders who develop sexual relationships with current group members are acting unethically. They not only jeopardize their license and their professional career, but they also degrade the profession at large. For a more complete discussion of these topics, see Herlihy and Corey (2015a, 2015b).

Socializing Among Group Members

An issue to consider is whether socializing among group members hinders or facilitates the group process. This concern can become an ethical issue if members are forming cliques and gossiping about others in the group or if they are banding together and talking about matters that are best explored in the group sessions. If hidden agendas develop through various subgroups within the group, it is likely that the progress of the group will come to an abrupt halt. Unless the hidden agenda is brought to the surface and dealt with, it seems very likely that many members will not be able to use the group therapeutically or meet their personal goals.

Yalom (2005) states that a therapy group teaches people how to form intimate relationships but is not designed to provide these relationships. He also points out that members meeting outside of the group have a responsibility to bring information about their meeting into the group. Any type of outof- group socialization that interferes with the functioning of the group is counterproductive and should be discouraged. This is especially true when some participants discuss issues relevant to the group but avoid bringing up the same issues in the group itself. As Yalom (2005) explains, “It is not the subgrouping per se that is destructive to the group, but the conspiracy of silence that generally surrounds it” (p. 352).

In some cases, out-of-group contact and socialization can be beneficial. From the perspective of feminist group therapy, out-of-group socialization is not viewed as harmful. This is especially true if members are selected carefully and are able to manage out-of-group contact so that it works to their own best interests and to the good of the group as a whole. During out-of-group contact, members often have the opportunity to expand on their goals outside of the group.

One of the best ways for the group leader to prevent inappropriate and counterproductive socialization among group members is to bring this issue up for discussion. It is especially timely to explore the negative impact of forming cliques when the group seems to be stuck and is getting nowhere or when it appears that members are not talking about their reactions to one another. The members can be taught that what they do not say in the group itself might very well prevent their group from attaining any level of cohesion or achieving its goals.

The Impact of the Leader’s Values on the Group

In all controversial issues related to the group process, the leader’s values play a central role. Your awareness of how your values influence your leadership style is in itself a central ethical issue. Value-laden issues are often brought to a group—religion, spirituality, abortion, divorce, gender roles in relationships, and family struggles, to name just a few. The purpose of the group is to help members clarify their beliefs and examine options that are most congruent with their own value system. Group counseling is not a forum in which leaders impose their worldview on the members; it is a way to assist members in exploring their own cultural values and beliefs. To practice effectively and to empower members of a group, group leaders must be able to keep their personal values separate from their work with group members. Kocet and Herlihy (2014) describe this process as ethical bracketing, the “intentional setting aside of the counselor’s personal values in order to provide ethical and appropriate counseling to all clients, especially those whose worldviews, values, belief systems, and decisions differ significantly from those of the counselor” (p. 182).

If you become aware of a value conflict that interferes with your ability to respect a particular value of a member, you may need to seek consultation or supervision. It is critical that group counselors increase their awareness of how their personal reactions to members may inhibit the group process. They must monitor their countertransference and recognize the danger of stereotyping individuals on the basis of race, ethnicity, gender, age, religious or spiritual background, or sexual identity.

Members are best served if they learn to evaluate their own behavior to determine how it is working for them. If they come to the realization that what they are doing is not serving them well, it is appropriate for them to consider alternative ways of behaving that will enable them to reach their goals. A group is an ideal place for members to assess the degree to which their behavior is consistent with their own values. They can get feedback from others, yet it will be their responsibility to make their own decisions.

Religious and Spiritual Values in Group Counseling

Some counselors support the inclusion of religious and spiritual interventions in group work (Christmas & Van Horn, 2012; Cornish & Wade, 2010). Even when such interventions are viewed as appropriate by group counselors, Cornish, Wade, and Post (2012) found that religious and spiritual interventions were infrequently used in group counseling. Almost all survey participants found it appropriate to discuss both spiritual and religious topics when group members brought up these concerns, but they did not introduce these topics or ask group members about their spiritual or religious background and beliefs. In addition, counselors were twice as likely to comment on the therapeutic value of spiritual discussions over religious discussions.

Explicitly religious or spiritual interventions may be inappropriate in some groups due to the heterogeneous nature of clients’ beliefs and practices. It is important to pay attention to how this topic is introduced in a group. Interventions tied to a particular faith could present problems in a group composed of members from diverse backgrounds. Some highly religious or spiritual therapists may find that some group members are uncomfortable with these interventions, especially if their own beliefs do not match the interventions integrated into the group process (Cornish, Wade, & Knight, 2013).

To better understand how religion and spirituality are addressed in groups, Post, Cornish, Wade, and Tucker (2013) conducted a study in the university counseling setting. Counselors in this setting generally held the following views:

• Religious and spiritual concerns are appropriate topics of discussion for the groups they facilitate.

• Spiritual interventions are more appropriate than religious interventions, and spiritual interventions are used more frequently.

• When a client brings up a religious or spiritual concern, basic interventions rather than specific spiritual or religious interventions are most often used.

Addressing spiritual and religious values in group counseling encompasses particularly sensitive, controversial, and complex concerns. It is critical to be aware of and to understand your own spiritual or religious attitudes, beliefs, values, and experiences if you hope to facilitate an exploration of these issues with members of your group. Religious and spiritual values are a basic aspect of the lives of some group members, and clients may feel that their needs are not being met if their religious or spiritual concerns are ignored. In this area, the group members should set the agenda.

Ethical Issues in Multicultural Group Counseling

Becoming Aware of Your Cultural Values

If group leaders ignore some basic differences in people, they can hardly be doing what is in the best interests of these clients, which is an ethical matter. Regardless of your ethnic, cultural, and racial background, if you hope to build bridges of understanding between yourself and group members who are different from you, it is essential that you guard against stereotyped generalizations about social and cultural groups.

Johnson, Santos Torres, Coleman, and Smith (1995) write about issues that group counselors are likely to encounter as they attempt to facilitate culturally diverse counseling groups. They point out that group members typically bring with them their values, beliefs, and prejudices, which quickly become evident in a group situation. For Johnson and her colleagues, one goal of multicultural group counseling is to provide new levels of communication among members. This can be instrumental in assisting members in challenging their stereotypes by providing accurate information about individuals. Another goal of a diverse group is to promote understanding, acceptance, and trust among members of various cultural groups. For group leaders to facilitate this understanding and acceptance in a diverse group, it is essential that they be aware of their biases and that they have challenged their stereotypes.

Social justice issues often surface when working with people from culturally diverse backgrounds (MacNair-Semands, 2007). Individuals can be invited to talk about their pain from the social injustices they have encountered. In these instances, group leaders have an opportunity and a responsibility to transform the group experience and work toward healing rather than perpetuating harmful interactions marked by sexism, racism, and heterosexism. Leaders can do this by assisting members in evaluating their attitudes about a range of diversity issues. The ASGW (2008) “Best Practice Guidelines” offers this guidance on recognizing the role of diversity in the practice of group work:

Group workers practice with broad sensitivity to client differences including but not limited to ethnic, gender, religious, sexual, psychological maturity, economic class, family history, physical characteristics or limitations, and geographic location. Group workers continuously seek information regarding the cultural issues of the diverse population with whom they are working both by interaction with participants and from using outside resources. (B.8.)

An essential aspect of training for group leaders is promoting sensitivity and competence in addressing diversity in all forms of group work. Ethical practice requires that multicultural issues be incorporated in the training of group counselors (Debiak, 2007). There is increased recognition that all group work is multicultural; thus effective training of group counselors must address multicultural dimensions. Addressing diversity is an ethical mandate, but this practice is also a route to more effective group work.

Transcending Cultural Encapsulation

Cultural encapsulation is a potential trap that all group counselors are vulnerable to falling into. If you accept the idea that certain cultural values are supreme, you limit yourself by refusing to consider alternatives. If you possess cultural tunnel vision, you are likely to misinterpret patterns of behavior displayed by group members who are culturally different from you. Unless you understand the values of other cultures, you are likely to misunderstand these clients. If you are able to appreciate cultural differences and do not associate such differences with superiority or inferiority, you can increase your psychological resourcefulness.

Cultural encapsulation, or provincialism, can afflict both group members and the group leader. As group counselors, we have to confront our own distortions as well as those of the members. Culture-specific knowledge about a client’s background should not lead counselors to stereotype the client. Culturally competent group leaders recognize both differences among groups and differences within groups. It is essential that you avoid perceiving individuals as simply belonging to a group. Indeed, the differences between individuals within a group are often greater than the differences among the various groups (Pedersen, 2000). Not all Native Americans have the same experiences, nor do all African Americans, Asians, women, older people, or people with disabilities. It is important to explore individual differences among members of the same cultural group and not to make general assumptions based on an individual’s group. Regardless of your cultural background, you must be prepared to deal with the complex differences among individuals in areas such as race, culture, ethnicity, sexual orientation, disability status, religion, socioeconomic status, gender, and age (Lee & Park, 2013).

Certain practitioners may encounter resistance from some people of color because they are using traditional White, middle-class values to interpret these clients’ experiences. Such culturally encapsulated practitioners are not able to view the world through the eyes of all of their clients. Wrenn (1985) defines the culturally encapsulated counselor as one who has substituted stereotypes for the real world, who disregards cultural variations among clients, and who dogmatizes technique-oriented definitions of counseling and therapy. Such individuals, who operate within a monocultural framework, maintain a cocoon by evading reality and depending entirely on their own internalized value assumptions about what is good for society and the individual. These encapsulated people tend to be trapped in one way of thinking, believing their way is the universal way. They cling to an inflexible structure that resists adaptation to alternative ways of thinking.

Western models need to be adapted to serve the members of certain ethnic groups, especially those clients who live by a different value system. Many clients from non-Western cultures, members of ethnic minorities, and women from nearly all cultural groups tend to value interdependence more than independence, social consciousness more than individual freedom, and the welfare of the group more than their own welfare. Western psychological thought emphasizes self-sufficiency, individualism, directness of communication, assertiveness, independence from family, and self-growth. However, many Asian Americans come from collectivistic cultures that value interconnectedness with family and community (Chung, 2004; Chung & Bemak, 2014). In Asian cultures, moreover, family roles tend to be highly structured, and “filial piety” exerts a powerful influence; that is, obligations to parents are respected throughout one’s life, especially among the male children. The roles of family members are highly interdependent, and family structure is arranged so that conflicts are minimized while harmony is maximized. Traditional Asian values emphasize reserve and formality in most social situations, restraint and inhibition of intense feelings, obedience to authority, and high academic and occupational achievement. The family structure is traditionally patriarchal in that communication and authority flow vertically from top to bottom. The inculcation of guilt and shame are the main techniques used to control the behavior of individuals within a family (D. Sue & Sue, 1993).

These traditional values are shared by other cultural groups. For instance, Latinos/as emphasize familismo, which stresses interdependence over independence, affiliation over confrontation, and cooperation over competition. Parents are afforded a great deal of respect, and this respect governs all interpersonal relationships. The role of fate is often a pervasive force governing behavior. Latinos/as typically place a high value on spiritual matters and religion (Comas-Diaz, 1990). Torres-Rivera, Torres Fernandez, and Hendricks (2014) suggest that the common topics of discussion among Latino/a group members often include relationships, friendship, intimacy and love, sexuality, time, money, parenting, commitment and responsibility, decision making, power, rules, and morality.

The central point is that if the group experience is largely the product of values that are alien to certain group members, it is easy to see that such members will not embrace the group. Group counselors who practice exclusively with a Western perspective are likely to meet with a considerable amount of resistance from clients with a non-Western worldview. Culturally sensitive group practice can occur only when leaders are willing to reveal the underlying values of the group process and determine whether these values are congruent with the cultural values of the members. Group members can also be encouraged to express their values and needs. The major challenge for group leaders is to determine what techniques are culturally appropriate for which individuals.

Being aware of how cultural values influence their own thinking and behavior will help group leaders work ethically and effectively with members who are culturally different from themselves. It is clear that ethical practice demands that group counselors possess the self-awareness, knowledge, and skills that are basic components of diversity-competent practitioners.

Uses and Misuses of Group Techniques

In leading groups, it is essential that you have a clear rationale for each technique you use. This is an area in which theory is a useful guide for practice. As you will see, the 11 theories at the core of this book give rise to many therapeutic strategies and techniques. Such techniques are a means to increase awareness, to accomplish change, or to promote exploration and interaction. They can certainly be used ethically and therapeutically, yet they also can be misused.

Some of the ways in which leaders can practice unprofessionally are using techniques with which they are unfamiliar, using techniques in a mechanical way, using techniques to serve their own hidden agenda or to enhance their power, or using specific techniques to pressure members. Many techniques that are used in a group do facilitate an intense expression of emotion. For example, guided fantasies into times of loneliness as a child can lead to deep psychological memories. Such techniques should be congruent with the overall purpose of the group. If leaders use such techniques, they must be ready to deal with any emotional release.

Leaders should avoid pushing members to “get into their emotions.” Some group leaders measure the efficacy of their group by the level of catharsis, and group leaders who need to see members experience intense emotions can exploit the group members. This expression of emotion can sometimes reveal the leader’s needs rather than the needs of the members.

Techniques have a better chance of being used appropriately when there is a rationale underlying their use. Techniques are aimed at fostering the client’s self-exploration and self-understanding. At their best, they are invented in each unique client situation, and they are a collaborative effort between the leader and members. Techniques assist the group member in experimenting with some form of new behavior. It is critical that techniques be introduced in a timely and sensitive manner, with respect for the client, and that they be abandoned if they are not working.

Effective group counselors incorporate a wide range of techniques in their therapeutic style. Much depends on the purpose of the group, the setting, the personality and style of the group facilitator, the qualities of particular group members, and the problems selected for intervention. Effective leaders continuously assess their group and decide what relationship style to adopt; what techniques, procedures, or intervention methods to use; when to use them; and with which clients.

In working with culturally diverse client populations, leaders may need to modify some of their interventions to suit the client’s cultural and ethnic background. For example, if a client has been taught not to express his feelings in public, it may be inappropriate to quickly introduce techniques aimed at bringing out his feelings. It would be useful first to find out if this member is interested in exploring what he has learned from his culture about expressing his feelings. In another situation, perhaps a woman has been socialized to obey her parents without question. It could be inappropriate to introduce a role-playing technique that would have her confronting her parents directly. Leaders can respect the cultural values of members and at the same time encourage them to think about how these values and their upbringing have a continuing effect on their behavior. In some cases members will decide to modify certain behaviors because the personal price of retaining a value is too high. In other cases they will decide that they are not interested in changing certain cultural values or behaviors. The techniques used by leaders can help such members examine the pros and cons of making these changes. For a more detailed discussion of ethical considerations in using group techniques, see Corey, Corey, Callanan, and Russell (2015).

Group Leader Competence

Determining One’s Own Level of Competence

How can leaders determine whether they have the competence to use a certain technique? Some leaders who have received training in the use of a technique may hesitate to use it (out of fear of making a mistake), whereas other overly confident leaders without training may not have any reservations about trying out new methods. Leaders should have a clear theoretical and therapeutic rationale for any technique they use. Further, it is useful if leaders have experienced these techniques as members of a group. The issue of whether one is competent to lead a specific group or type of group is an ongoing question that faces all professional group leaders. You will need to remain open to struggling with questions such as these:

• Am I qualified through education and training to lead this specific group?

• What criteria can I use to determine my degree of competence?

• How can I recognize the boundaries of my competence?

• If I am not as competent as I’d like to be as a group worker, what specifically can I do?

• How can I continue to upgrade my leadership knowledge and skills?

• What techniques can I effectively employ?

• With what kinds of clients do I work best?

• With whom do I work least well, and why?

• When and how should I refer clients?

• When do I need to consult with other professionals?

There are no simple answers to these questions. Different groups require different leader qualities. For example, you may be fully competent to lead a group of relatively well-adjusted adults or of adults in crisis situations yet not be competent to lead a group of seriously disturbed people. You may be well trained for, and work well with, adolescent groups, yet you may not have the skills or training to do group work with younger children. You may be successful leading groups dealing with domestic violence yet find yourself ill-prepared to work successfully with children’s groups. In short, you need supervised experience to understand the challenges you are likely to face in working with different types of groups.

Most practitioners have had their formal training in one of the branches of the mental health field, which include counseling psychology, clinical psychology, clinical social work, community counseling, educational psychology, school counseling, couples and family counseling, nursing, pastoral psychology, rehabilitation counseling, mental health counseling, and psychiatry. Generally, however, those who seek to become group practitioners find that formal education, even at the master’s or doctoral level, does not give them the practical grounding they require to effectively lead groups. Practitioners often find it necessary to take a variety of specialized group therapy training workshops to gain experience.

The American Group Psychotherapy Association (AGPA) and the Association for Specialists in Group Work (ASGW) both address competence in group work. For example, “The group psychotherapist must be aware of his/ her own individual competencies, and when the needs of the patient/client are beyond the competencies of the psychotherapist, consultation must be sought from other qualified professionals or other appropriate sources” (AGPA, 2002, 3.1). Professional competence is not arrived at once and for all; it is an ongoing developmental process for the duration of your career.

The “Best Practice Guidelines” (ASGW, 2008, section A), which are reproduced in the Student Manual for Theory and Practice of Group Counseling, provide some general suggestions for enhancing your level of competence as a group worker:

• Remain current and increase your knowledge and skill competencies through activities such as continuing education, professional supervision, and participation in personal and professional development activities.

• Utilize consultation and/or supervision to ensure effective practice regarding ethical concerns that interfere with effective functioning as a group leader.

• Be open to getting professional assistance for personal problems or conflicts of your own that may impair your professional judgment or work performance.

Part of being a competent group counselor involves being able to explain to group members the theory behind your practice, telling members in clear language the goals of the group and how you conceptualize the group process, and relating what you do in a group to this model. As you acquire competence, you will be able to continually refine your techniques in light of your model. Competent group counselors possess the knowledge and skills that are described in the following section.

Professional Training Standards for Group Counselors

Effective group leadership programs are not developed by legislative mandates and professional codes alone. For proficient leaders to emerge, a training program must make group work a priority. Unfortunately, most master’s programs in counseling require only one group course, and it is typical for this single course to cover both the didactic and experiential aspects of group process. This course often deals with both theories of group counseling and group process as well as providing students with opportunities to experience a group as a member. It is a major challenge to train group counselors adequately in a single course!

The ASGW (2000) “Professional Standards for the Training of Group Workers” specify two levels of competencies and related training. First is a set of core knowledge and skill competencies that provides the foundation on which specialized training is built. At a minimum, one group course should be included in a training program, and it should be structured to help students acquire the basic knowledge and skills needed to facilitate a group.

The ASGW (2000) training standards state that group leadership skills (see Chapter 2) are best mastered through supervised practice that involves observation and participation in a group experience. Although a minimum of 10 hours of supervised practice is required, 20 hours is recommended as part of the core training. Furthermore, these training standards require that all counselor trainees complete core training in group work during their entry-level education.

Once counselor trainees have mastered the core knowledge and skill domains, they have the platform to develop a group work specialization in one or more of four areas (see Chapter 1): (1) task groups, (2) psychoeducational groups, (3) group counseling, or (4) group psychotherapy. The standards outline specific knowledge and skill competencies for these specialties and specify the recommended number of hours of supervised training for each.

The current trend in training group workers focuses on learning group process by becoming involved in supervised experiences. Certainly, the mere completion of one graduate course in group theory and practice does not equip a counselor to effectively lead groups. Both direct participation in planned and supervised small groups and clinical experience in leading various groups under careful supervision are needed to provide leaders with the skills to meet the challenges of group work.

Ieva, Ohrt, Swank, and Young (2009) investigated the impact on master’s students who participated in experiential personal growth groups. The students’ perceptions of their experience supported the following assumptions:

• Group process is a beneficial aspect of training.

• Experience in a personal growth group increases knowledge about groups and leadership skills.

• Experience in a personal growth group enhances students’ ability to give and receive feedback.

All study participants reported some personal or professional progress as a result of their experience in a group. Areas of benefit included interpersonal learning, knowledge about group process, self-awareness, empathy for future clients, and opportunities to learn by observing group process in action. The participants’ confidence in facilitating a group increased after having experience as a group member, and they believed their participation assisted them in developing their own personal leadership style. Not only did the counselors-in-training report benefiting both personally and professionally from participating in personal growth groups, but they thought this should be a requirement for all students in a master’s level counseling program. Ieva and colleagues (2009) conclude that this study provides counselor educators with valuable information that can help them design and facilitate training experiences that are positive, beneficial, and ethically responsible.

Three Important Adjuncts to the Training of Group Counselors

If you expect to lead groups, you will want to be prepared for this work, both personally and academically. If your program has not provided this preparation, it will be necessary for you to seek in-service workshops in group processes. It is not likely that you will learn how to lead groups merely through reading about them and listening to lectures.

I recommend at least three experiences as adjuncts to a training program for students learning about group work: (1) participation in personal counseling, (2) participation in group counseling or a personal growth group, and (3) participation in a training and supervision group. Following is a discussion of these three adjuncts to the professional preparation of group counselors.

Personal Counseling for Group Leaders I believe that extensive selfexploration is necessary for trainees to identify countertransference feelings, to recognize blind spots and biases, and to use their personal attributes effectively in their group work. Group trainees can benefit greatly from the experience of being a client at some time. To me it makes sense that group leaders need to demonstrate the courage and willingness to do for themselves what they expect members in their groups to do—expand their awareness of self and the effect of that self on others.

What does research reveal on this subject? More than 90% of mental health professionals report positive outcomes from their own counseling experiences (Geller, Norcross, & Orlinsky, 2005). In his synthesis of 25 years of research on the personal therapy of mental health professionals, Norcross (2005b) states: “The cumulative results indicate that personal therapy is an emotionally vital, interpersonally dense, and professionally formative experience that should be central to the development of health care psychologists” (p. 840). Norcross points out that most mental health care practitioners strongly value experiential over didactic learning.

Increasing self-awareness is a major reason to seek out personal counseling. In leading a group, you will encounter many instances of transferences, both among members and toward you. Transference refers to the unconscious process whereby members project onto you, the group leader, past feelings or attitudes that they had toward significant people in their lives. Of course, you can easily become entangled in your own feelings of countertransference, which often involves both conscious and unconscious emotional responses to group members. You may have unresolved personal problems, which you can project onto the members of your group. Through personal counseling, you can become increasingly aware of personal triggers and can also work through some of your unfinished business that could easily interfere with your effectiveness in facilitating groups. If you are not actively involved in the pursuit of healing your own psychological wounds, you will probably have considerable difficulty entering the world of a client. Through being a client yourself, you can gain an experiential frame of reference to view yourself as you are. This experience will increase your compassion for your clients and help you learn ways of intervening that you can use in the groups you facilitate. For further reading on this topic, I recommend The Psychotherapist’s Own Psychotherapy (Geller, Norcross, & Orlinsky, 2005).

Self-Exploration Groups for Group Leaders Being a member of a variety of groups can prove to be an indispensable part of your training as a group leader. By experiencing your own cautiousness, resistances, fears, and uncomfortable moments in a group, by being confronted, and by struggling with your problems in a group context, you can experience what is needed to build a trusting and cohesive group.

In addition to helping you recognize and explore personal conflicts and increase self-understanding, a personal growth group can be a powerful teaching tool. One of the best ways to learn how to assist group members in their struggles is to participate yourself as a member of a group. A survey of 82 master’s-level counseling programs suggests that experiential group training is alive, evolving, and an accepted method for training group leaders (Shumaker, Ortiz, & Brenninkmeyer, 2011).

Yalom (2005) states that a substantial number of training programs require both personal therapy and a group experience for trainees. Some of the benefits of participating in a therapeutic group that he suggests are experiencing the power of a group, learning what self-disclosure is about, coming to appreciate the difficulties involved in self-sharing, learning on an emotional level what one knows intellectually, and becoming aware of one’s dependency on the leader’s power and knowledge.

If a self-exploration group or an experiential group is a program requirement, students must be made aware of this requirement at an orientation meeting during the admissions process or prior to their enrollment in a program. Shumaker, Ortiz, and Brenninkmeyer’s (2011) survey of experiential group training in counseling master’s programs resulted in them recommending systematic instructor self-reflection, informed consent of students, and selfdisclosure training as “the most promising and critical safeguard elements dedicated to promoting a positive experiential group experience” (p. 127).

Participation in Experiential Training Workshops I have found training workshops most useful in helping group counselors develop the skills necessary for effective intervention. The trainees can also learn a great deal about their response to feedback, their competitiveness, their need for approval, their concerns over being competent, and their power struggles. In working with both university students learning about group approaches and with professionals who want to upgrade their group skills, I have found an intensive weekend or weeklong workshop to be an effective format. In these workshops the participants all have ample opportunity to lead their small group for a designated period with the benefit of direct supervision. After a segment in which a participant leads the group, my colleagues and I who are supervising their group offer feedback to those who led the group, provide a commentary on the process, and facilitate discussion of what happened in the group by the entire group.

My Journey Toward Becoming a Group Work Specialist

I want to share some highlights of what I found helpful in becoming a teacher and practitioner of group counseling. In my doctoral studies in the mid-1960s, I had no formal course work in group counseling. It was my experiences as a participant in many different kinds of groups after getting my doctorate that perked my interest in becoming a group practitioner, in teaching group courses, in training and supervising group workers, and in writing textbooks on group counseling.

During my 30s and 40s I availed myself to a wide range of different groups, a few of which included overnight marathon groups, traditional weekly therapy groups, and various residential workshops done in a group format. I participated in many personal growth workshops and encounter groups, which lasted in length from a weekend to 10 days. My early experiences as a group member provided insights and were instrumental in leading me to make significant changes in my personal life. This encouraged me to continue seeking out various groups aimed at personal and professional development. Although my main motivation for participating in these group workshops was not to learn techniques or to acquire skills in conducting groups, I received indirect benefits that I was able to apply to my professional work. This led to finding ways to incorporate group work into my teaching and professional practice. I learned significant lessons about organizing and facilitating groups from my experience as a group member even though I had concerns about the way some of the groups I attended were set up or conducted. These experiences were important in my learning how to design different kinds of therapeutic groups, and they helped me to think about ethics in group practice. Many of the specific dimensions of group facilitation that I address in this book came about as a result of the experiential learning and training I acquired beyond my doctoral program.

My own journey into group work has convinced me of how crucial it is for those who want to facilitate groups to open themselves to the experience of being in groups as a member. Certainly course work in group counseling is crucial, as is supervision when we are beginning to lead groups; in addition, what we can learn about ourselves personally by being a member of a group can pay dividends in our professional work. For a more detailed description of my journey into group work, both from a personal and professional perspective, see Creating Your Professional Path: Lessons From My Journey (Corey, 2010).

Ethical Issues in Training Group Counselors

Training programs differ on whether participating in a group is optional or required. My own bias is clear on the importance of doing personal work in a group as a prerequisite to becoming a group counselor. To be sure, requiring participation in a therapeutic group as part of a training program can present some practical and ethical problems of its own. A controversial ethical issue in the preparation of group workers involves combining experiential and didactic training methods.

I consider an experiential component to be essential when teaching group counseling courses. Admittedly, there are inherent problems in teaching students how groups function by involving them on an experiential level. Such an arrangement entails their willingness to engage in self-disclosure, to become active participants in an interpersonal laboratory, and to engage themselves on an emotional level as well as a cognitive one. Time and again, however, my colleagues and I hear both students and professionals who participate in our group training workshops comment on the value of supervised experience in which they have both leadership and membership roles. Through this format, group process concepts come alive. Trainees experience firsthand what it takes to create trust and what resistance feels like. They often say that they have gained a new appreciation of the group experience from a member’s perspective.

In talking with many other counselor educators throughout the country who teach group courses, I find that it is common practice to combine the experiential and didactic domains. Sometimes students colead a small group with a peer and are supervised by the instructor. Of course, this arrangement is not without problems, especially if the instructor also functions in the roles of facilitator and supervisor. Many of my colleagues believe the potential risks of experiential methods are offset by the benefits to students who become personally involved in experiential group work. These educators believe the experiential component helps students acquire the skills necessary to function as effective group leaders. Clearly, instructors need to be aware of the potential drawbacks inherent in multiple roles and relationships in teaching group courses, and they need to develop safeguards to minimize risk.

Students may fear that their grade will be influenced by their participation (or lack of it) in the experiential part of the class. In grading and evaluating students in group courses, the professionalism of the instructor is crucial. Ethical practice requires instructors to spell out their grading criteria clearly. The criteria may include the results of written reports, oral presentations, essay tests, and objective examinations. Most group counselor educators agree that students’ performance in the experiential group should not be graded, but they can be expected to attend regularly and to participate. Clear guidelines need to be established so that students know what their rights and responsibilities are at the beginning of the group course.

There is potential for abuse when using experiential approaches in training group leaders, but this does not warrant the conclusion that all such experiences are inappropriate or unethical. I view it as a mistake to conclude that group work educators should be restricted to the singular role of providing didactic information. The challenge of educators is to provide the best training available. I am convinced that teaching group process by involving students in personal ways is the best way for them to learn how to eventually set up and facilitate groups. I am in agreement with Stockton, Morran, and Chang (2014) who indicate that there is a fine line between offering experiential activities and safeguarding against gaining information that could be used in evaluating students. Faculty who use experiential approaches are often involved in balancing multiple roles, which requires consistent monitoring of boundaries. Stockton and colleagues emphasize that group work educators need to exert caution so that they offer training that is both ethical and efficacious.

Liability and Malpractice

Although the topics of professional liability and malpractice are not strictly a part of ethical practice, these are legal dimensions with implications for group practitioners. Group leaders are expected to practice within the code of ethics of their particular profession and also to abide by legal standards. Practitioners are subject to civil penalties if they fail to do right or if they actively do wrong to another. If group members can prove that personal injury or psychological harm was caused by a leader’s failure to render proper service, either through negligence or ignorance, the leader is open to a malpractice suit. Negligence consists of departing from the standard and commonly accepted practices of others in the profession. Practitioners involved in a malpractice action may need to justify the techniques they use. If their therapeutic interventions are consistent with those of other members of their profession in their community, they are on much firmer ground than if they employ uncommon techniques.

Group leaders need to keep up to date with the laws of their state as they affect their professional practice. Ignorance is not a sufficient excuse. Those leaders who work with groups of children and adolescents, especially, must know the law as it pertains to matters of confidentiality, parental consent, the right to treatment or to refuse treatment, informed consent, and other legal rights of clients. Such awareness not only protects the group members but also protects group leaders from malpractice suits arising from negligence or ignorance.

The best way to protect yourself from a malpractice suit is to take preventive measures, which means not practicing outside the boundaries of your competence. Following the spirit of the ethics codes of your professional organization is also important. The key to avoiding a malpractice suit is maintaining reasonable, ordinary, and prudent practices. Here are some prudent guidelines for ethical and professional standards of practice:

• Be willing to devote the time it takes to adequately screen, select, and prepare the members of your group.

• Develop written informed consent procedures at the outset of a group. Give the potential members of your groups enough information to make informed choices about group participation. Do not mystify the group process.

• Provide an atmosphere of respect for diversity within the group.

• Become aware of local and state laws that limit your practice, as well as the policies of the agency for which you work. Inform members about these policies and about legal limitations (such as exemptions to confidentiality, mandatory reporting, and the like).

• Emphasize the importance of maintaining confidentiality before the group begins and at various times during the life of a group.

• If social media is part of group work, establish with members the importance of maintaining boundaries, confidentiality, and privacy of others in the group.

• Restrict your practice to client populations for which you are prepared by virtue of your education, training, and experience.

• Be alert for symptoms of psychological debilitation in group members, which may indicate that their participation should be discontinued. Be able to put such clients in contact with appropriate referral resources.

• Do not promise the members of your group anything that you cannot deliver. Help them realize that their degree of effort and commitment will be key factors in determining the outcomes of the group experience.

• In working with minors, secure the written permission of their parents, even if this is not required by state law.

• Consult with colleagues or supervisors whenever there is an ethical or legal concern. Document the nature of these consultations.

• Make it a practice to assess the general progress of a group, and teach members how to evaluate their progress toward their personal goals; keep adequate clinical records on this progress.

• Learn how to assess and intervene in cases in which clients pose a threat to themselves or others.

• Avoid blending professional relationships with social ones. Avoid engaging in sexual relationships with either current or former group members.

• Remain alert to ways in which your personal reactions might inhibit the group process, and monitor your countertransference. Avoid using the group you are leading as a place where you work on personal problems.

• Continue to read the research, and use group interventions and techniques that are supported by research as well as by community practice.

• Have a theoretical orientation that serves as a guide to your practice. Be able to describe the purpose of the techniques you use in your groups.

As you read about the stages of group development in Chapters 4 and 5, reflect on the issues raised in this chapter as they apply to the tasks and challenges you will face as a group leader during various group phases. Realize that there are few simple answers to the ethical aspects of group work. Learn how to think through the ethical considerations that you will face as a group practitioner. Being willing to raise questions and think about an ethical course to follow is the beginning of becoming an ethical group counselor. The Student Manual for Theory and Practice of Group Counseling (9th edition) contains a number of resources that will help you develop your awareness of ethical group practice. I urge you to consult these resources frequently as you begin to formulate your own ideas about ethical practice in group work. For a more comprehensive discussion of ethical issues in group work, see Corey, Corey, Corey, and Callanan (2015, chap. 12).

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet’s Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder

Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet’s Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder

Behcet’s Disease, also known as Behcet’s Syndrome, is a rare autoimmune disorder characterized by recurrent oral and genital ulcers, skin lesions, and inflammation of the eyes. First identified by the Turkish dermatologist Hulusi Behcet in 1937, this condition primarily affects individuals in the Mediterranean, Middle Eastern, and Asian regions. Despite decades of research, the exact cause of Behcet’s Disease remains elusive, with genetic predisposition and environmental triggers believed to play key roles. The disease’s pathophysiology involves systemic inflammation and vasculitis, leading to various manifestations across multiple organs and tissues. Diagnosis is based on clinical criteria, and treatment aims to manage symptoms, reduce inflammation, and prevent complications. Patient education is crucial for empowering individuals with Behcet’s Disease to understand their condition and effectively manage their health. This paper aims to explore the causes, signs and symptoms, etiology, pathophysiology, DSM-5 diagnosis, treatment regimens, and patient education strategies related to Behcet’s Disease. (Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet’s Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder)

Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet's Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder

Causes of Behcet’s Disease

Behcet’s Disease is a multifactorial condition with complex underlying causes. While the precise etiology remains uncertain, several factors are believed to contribute to the development and progression of the disease.

Genetic Predisposition: Genetic susceptibility plays a significant role in Behcet’s Disease, with certain genetic markers associated with increased susceptibility to the condition. Notably, the HLA-B51 gene has been identified as a potential genetic risk factor, particularly in populations with a higher prevalence of the disease. However, it is essential to recognize that genetic predisposition alone is not sufficient to cause Behcet’s Disease, indicating the involvement of additional factors in disease pathogenesis.

Environmental Triggers: Environmental factors are thought to trigger and exacerbate Behcet’s Disease in genetically susceptible individuals. Infections, particularly viral and bacterial pathogens, have been proposed as potential triggers due to their ability to stimulate the immune system and initiate inflammatory responses. Additionally, environmental factors such as exposure to certain chemicals, dietary components, and climatic conditions may influence disease susceptibility and severity.

Immune System Dysregulation: Behcet’s Disease is characterized by dysregulation of the immune system, leading to abnormal immune responses and inflammation. Dysfunction in immune pathways, including aberrant activation of T cells and cytokine imbalances, contributes to the chronic inflammatory process observed in the disease. Dysregulation of innate and adaptive immune responses further perpetuates the inflammatory cascade, resulting in tissue damage and organ involvement.

Abnormal Responses to Microorganisms: Some evidence suggests that Behcet’s Disease may result from abnormal immune responses to specific microorganisms. Molecular mimicry, where microbial antigens resemble self-antigens, may trigger autoimmune reactions, leading to tissue damage and inflammation. Furthermore, alterations in the microbiome composition and dysbiosis in the gut microbiota have been implicated in Behcet’s Disease pathogenesis, highlighting the potential role of microbial factors in disease development.

Overall, Behcet’s Disease is a complex disorder influenced by a combination of genetic predisposition, environmental triggers, immune system dysregulation, and abnormal responses to microorganisms. Further research is needed to elucidate the precise mechanisms underlying disease pathogenesis and identify targeted therapeutic approaches. (Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet’s Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder)

Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet's Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder

Signs and Symptoms

Behcet’s Disease is characterized by a wide range of signs and symptoms affecting various organs and tissues throughout the body. The severity and frequency of symptoms can vary among affected individuals and may fluctuate over time.

Recurrent Oral and Genital Ulcers: One of the hallmark features of Behcet’s Disease is the presence of recurrent oral ulcers, which are often painful and can affect the lips, tongue, and oral mucosa. Genital ulcers, occurring on the vulva or scrotum, are also common and may recur frequently, leading to discomfort and impaired quality of life.

Skin Lesions: Behcet’s Disease can cause a variety of skin lesions, including erythema nodosum-like lesions, papulopustular lesions resembling acne, and pathergy, which is an exaggerated skin reaction to minor trauma. These skin manifestations can vary in appearance and distribution but are typically inflammatory and may leave scars upon healing.

Eye Inflammation (Uveitis): Inflammation of the eyes, specifically uveitis, is a significant complication of Behcet’s Disease and can lead to vision impairment or blindness if left untreated. Uveitis may present with symptoms such as eye pain, redness, blurred vision, sensitivity to light (photophobia), and floaters.

Arthritis: Joint involvement is common in Behcet’s Disease and can manifest as arthritis, causing joint pain, swelling, and stiffness. The arthritis associated with Behcet’s Disease often affects large joints such as the knees, ankles, and wrists, but can also involve smaller joints.

Gastrointestinal Involvement: Behcet’s Disease can affect the gastrointestinal tract, leading to symptoms such as abdominal pain, diarrhea, and gastrointestinal bleeding. Inflammation of the intestines, known as intestinal Behcet’s Disease, can mimic inflammatory bowel diseases like Crohn’s disease or ulcerative colitis.

Neurological Symptoms: In rare cases, Behcet’s Disease can involve the nervous system, leading to neurological symptoms such as headaches, cognitive dysfunction, seizures, and movement disorders. Neurological involvement typically occurs as a result of inflammation of the brain or spinal cord.

Vascular Complications: Behcet’s Disease can affect blood vessels, leading to various vascular complications such as deep vein thrombosis (DVT), arterial thrombosis, and arterial aneurysms. These vascular manifestations can pose significant risks and may require urgent medical intervention to prevent complications such as stroke or pulmonary embolism.

Overall, Behcet’s Disease is characterized by a diverse array of signs and symptoms affecting multiple organ systems, highlighting the systemic nature of the condition. Early recognition and appropriate management of these manifestations are essential for improving patient outcomes and preventing long-term complications. (Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet’s Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder)

Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet's Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder

Etiology

Behcet’s Disease is a complex disorder with an intricate etiology involving a combination of genetic, environmental, and immunological factors. While the precise cause of Behcet’s Disease remains unclear, several hypotheses have been proposed to elucidate its underlying etiology.

Genetic Predisposition: Genetic factors play a significant role in Behcet’s Disease, with evidence suggesting a genetic predisposition to the condition. Certain genetic markers, particularly variations in the HLA-B51 gene, have been associated with increased susceptibility to Behcet’s Disease, particularly in populations with a higher prevalence of the disorder. However, the inheritance pattern of Behcet’s Disease is complex and likely involves multiple genetic factors interacting with environmental triggers.

Environmental Triggers: Environmental factors are thought to contribute to the development and progression of Behcet’s Disease by triggering immune dysregulation and inflammatory responses in genetically susceptible individuals. Infections, particularly viral and bacterial pathogens, have been proposed as potential environmental triggers due to their ability to stimulate the immune system and initiate inflammatory cascades. Additionally, environmental factors such as dietary components, smoking, and climatic conditions may influence disease susceptibility and severity.

Immune Dysregulation: Behcet’s Disease is characterized by dysregulation of the immune system, leading to abnormal immune responses and chronic inflammation. Dysfunction in immune pathways, including aberrant activation of T cells, dysregulated cytokine production, and impaired regulation of inflammatory responses, contributes to the pathogenesis of the disease. These immunological abnormalities result in systemic inflammation and tissue damage, leading to the characteristic manifestations of Behcet’s Disease across multiple organ systems.

Microbial Factors: Some evidence suggests that Behcet’s Disease may result from abnormal immune responses to specific microbial antigens. Molecular mimicry, where microbial antigens resemble self-antigens, may trigger autoimmune reactions, leading to chronic inflammation and tissue damage. Furthermore, alterations in the composition of the microbiome and dysbiosis in the gut microbiota have been implicated in Behcet’s Disease pathogenesis, suggesting a potential role for microbial factors in disease development.

Behcet’s Disease is a complex disorder with a multifactorial etiology involving genetic predisposition, environmental triggers, immune dysregulation, and abnormal responses to microbial factors. Further research is needed to unravel the intricate interplay between these factors and identify targeted therapeutic approaches for Behcet’s Disease. (Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet’s Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder)

Pathophysiology

Behcet’s Disease is characterized by systemic inflammation and vasculitis, leading to various manifestations across multiple organs and tissues. The pathophysiology of Behcet’s Disease involves a complex interplay of immune dysregulation, endothelial dysfunction, and inflammatory mediators.

Immune Dysregulation: Dysregulation of the immune system plays a central role in the pathogenesis of Behcet’s Disease. Abnormal activation of T cells, particularly CD4+ T cells, and dysregulated cytokine production contribute to the chronic inflammatory response observed in the disease. Elevated levels of pro-inflammatory cytokines, such as tumor necrosis factor-alpha (TNF-α), interleukin-1 (IL-1), and interleukin-6 (IL-6), further perpetuate the inflammatory cascade, leading to tissue damage and organ involvement.

Endothelial Dysfunction: Endothelial dysfunction, characterized by impaired endothelial cell function and integrity, is a key feature of Behcet’s Disease. Endothelial cells play a crucial role in maintaining vascular homeostasis and regulating inflammatory responses. In Behcet’s Disease, endothelial dysfunction leads to aberrant expression of adhesion molecules, increased vascular permeability, and enhanced leukocyte adhesion and migration into tissues. These alterations contribute to the development of vasculitis and tissue inflammation observed in Behcet’s Disease.

Vasculitis: Vasculitis, inflammation of blood vessels, is a hallmark feature of Behcet’s Disease and underlies many of its clinical manifestations. Vasculitis in Behcet’s Disease can affect blood vessels of all sizes, including arteries, veins, and capillaries, leading to a wide range of vascular complications such as thrombosis, aneurysms, and vessel occlusion. The inflammatory infiltrates in vessel walls, consisting of T cells, macrophages, and neutrophils, contribute to vascular damage and tissue injury, further perpetuating the inflammatory process.

Overall, Behcet’s Disease is characterized by immune dysregulation, endothelial dysfunction, and vasculitis, leading to systemic inflammation and tissue damage across multiple organ systems. Understanding the underlying pathophysiological mechanisms of Behcet’s Disease is crucial for developing targeted therapeutic strategies aimed at modulating the immune response and reducing inflammation to improve patient outcomes. (Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet’s Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder)

DSM-5 Diagnosis

Behcet’s Disease is primarily diagnosed based on clinical criteria established by the International Study Group for Behcet’s Disease. According to the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition (DSM-5), the diagnosis of Behcet’s Disease requires the presence of recurrent oral ulcers plus any two of the following:

  1. Recurrent Genital Ulcers: The presence of recurrent genital ulcers, typically observed on the vulva or scrotum, is a common manifestation of Behcet’s Disease and is considered a diagnostic criterion.
  2. Eye Inflammation (Uveitis): Uveitis, characterized by inflammation of the uvea (middle layer of the eye), is a significant complication of Behcet’s Disease. Eye involvement, presenting as symptoms such as eye pain, redness, blurred vision, photophobia, or floaters, fulfills the diagnostic criteria.
  3. Skin Lesions: Various skin lesions, including erythema nodosum-like lesions, papulopustular lesions resembling acne, and pathergy (an exaggerated skin reaction to minor trauma), are characteristic of Behcet’s Disease and contribute to the diagnostic criteria.
  4. Positive Pathergy Test: The pathergy test is a diagnostic procedure in which a small needle prick is made on the skin, typically on the forearm, and the reaction is observed. A positive pathergy test, defined as the development of a papule or pustule at the site of the needle prick within 24 to 48 hours, is considered indicative of Behcet’s Disease.

In addition to these clinical criteria, other diagnostic tests such as laboratory investigations (e.g., inflammatory markers, HLA-B51 genetic testing) and imaging studies (e.g., ocular examinations, MRI) may be performed to rule out other conditions and assess for complications associated with Behcet’s Disease. (Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet’s Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder)

Treatment Regimens

Treatment for Behcet’s Disease aims to alleviate symptoms, reduce inflammation, prevent complications, and improve the quality of life for affected individuals. The choice of treatment depends on the severity and specific manifestations of the disease in each individual.

Nonsteroidal Anti-Inflammatory Drugs (NSAIDs): NSAIDs such as ibuprofen or naproxen may be used to manage pain, reduce inflammation, and relieve symptoms associated with Behcet’s Disease, particularly during mild flares.

Corticosteroids: Corticosteroids, such as prednisone or methylprednisolone, are often prescribed to suppress immune-mediated inflammation during acute flares of Behcet’s Disease. These medications can help alleviate symptoms and reduce the severity of inflammatory manifestations, but long-term use may be associated with significant side effects.

Immunomodulatory Agents: Immunomodulatory agents such as colchicine, azathioprine, methotrexate, cyclosporine, and mycophenolate mofetil may be used to control disease activity, prevent relapses, and reduce the need for long-term corticosteroid therapy. Biologic therapies targeting specific immune pathways, such as tumor necrosis factor-alpha (TNF-α) inhibitors or interleukin-1 (IL-1) inhibitors, may also be considered for refractory cases or severe manifestations of Behcet’s Disease.

Topical Treatments: Topical treatments such as corticosteroid creams or ointments may be used to manage oral and genital ulcers and skin lesions associated with Behcet’s Disease. These topical therapies can help reduce pain, promote healing, and improve local symptoms. (Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet’s Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder)

Patient Education and Self-Management

Patient education is essential for empowering individuals with Behcet’s Disease to understand their condition, manage symptoms, and make informed decisions about their health. Key components of patient education and self-management include:

  1. Understanding the Disease: Educating patients about the nature of Behcet’s Disease, its chronicity, and the potential impact on various organ systems helps individuals develop realistic expectations and cope with the challenges associated with the condition.
  2. Medication Adherence: Emphasizing the importance of adhering to prescribed medications as directed by healthcare providers helps optimize treatment outcomes and reduce the risk of disease flares and complications.
  3. Lifestyle Modifications: Encouraging patients to adopt healthy lifestyle habits such as regular exercise, balanced nutrition, adequate sleep, stress management, and smoking cessation can help improve overall well-being and potentially reduce disease activity.
  4. Monitoring and Self-Assessment: Teaching patients how to monitor disease symptoms, recognize signs of flares or complications, and seek prompt medical attention when necessary empowers individuals to actively participate in their care and collaborate with healthcare providers to optimize treatment outcomes.
  5. Disease-Specific Education: Providing tailored education about specific manifestations of Behcet’s Disease, such as oral and genital ulcer management, eye care, skin lesion care, and joint protection strategies, helps individuals manage symptoms and minimize the impact of the disease on their daily lives.

By providing comprehensive education and support, healthcare providers can empower individuals with Behcet’s Disease to effectively manage their condition, improve their quality of life, and achieve better long-term outcomes. (Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet’s Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder)

Conclusion

Behcet’s Disease is a complex autoimmune disorder characterized by recurrent oral and genital ulcers, skin lesions, and inflammation of the eyes. While the exact cause remains unknown, a multifactorial etiology involving genetic predisposition, environmental triggers, immune dysregulation, and abnormal responses to microorganisms is implicated. The pathophysiology of Behcet’s Disease is characterized by systemic inflammation, vasculitis, and endothelial dysfunction. Diagnosis is based on clinical criteria, and treatment aims to alleviate symptoms, reduce inflammation, and prevent complications through a combination of NSAIDs, corticosteroids, immunomodulatory agents, and biological therapies. Patient education is crucial for empowering individuals to understand their condition, adhere to treatment regimens, and adopt self-management strategies to improve their quality of life. By providing comprehensive education and support, healthcare providers can help individuals with Behcet’s Disease effectively manage their condition and achieve better long-term outcomes. (Nursing Paper Examples on Behcet’s Disease: Understanding a Complex Disorder)

References

https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK470257/

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Nursing Paper Example on Understanding Barth Syndrome

Nursing Paper Example on Understanding Barth Syndrome

Barth Syndrome, a rare genetic disorder, presents complex challenges to affected individuals and their families. This condition, characterized by mutations in the TAZ gene, disrupts mitochondrial function, leading to a range of debilitating symptoms. Despite its rarity, Barth Syndrome profoundly impacts various bodily systems, particularly the heart, muscles, and immune system. Understanding the causes, signs, and symptoms of Barth Syndrome is essential for accurate diagnosis and effective management. This paper aims to explore the intricacies of Barth Syndrome, including its causes, signs, and symptoms, etiology, pathophysiology, DSM-5 diagnosis criteria, treatment regimens, patient education, and potential avenues for future research. By shedding light on this condition, we can enhance awareness, improve diagnostic accuracy, and provide better support for individuals living with Barth Syndrome. (Nursing Paper Example on Understanding Barth Syndrome)

Nursing Paper Example on Understanding Barth Syndrome

Causes

Barth Syndrome arises from mutations in the TAZ gene located on the X chromosome. These mutations disrupt the normal functioning of mitochondria, the cell’s powerhouse responsible for generating energy. The TAZ gene encodes a protein called tafazzin, essential for maintaining the structure and function of mitochondria. When mutations occur in the TAZ gene, tafazzin production is impaired, leading to mitochondrial dysfunction.

The exact mechanism by which TAZ gene mutations affect mitochondrial function is not fully understood. However, it is believed that tafazzin plays a crucial role in remodeling cardiolipin, a phospholipid found in the inner mitochondrial membrane. Cardiolipin is essential for various mitochondrial processes, including oxidative phosphorylation, the process by which cells generate energy.

Mutations in the TAZ gene disrupt cardiolipin remodeling, affecting mitochondrial function and energy production. As a result, cells, particularly those in tissues with high energy demands such as the heart, muscles, and immune system, are unable to function properly. This disruption in cellular energy metabolism contributes to the characteristic symptoms of Barth Syndrome, including cardiomyopathy, muscle weakness, growth delays, and neutropenia.

Since Barth Syndrome is an X-linked genetic disorder, it primarily affects males. Females who carry a single copy of the mutated TAZ gene are typically asymptomatic or may exhibit mild symptoms due to random X-chromosome inactivation.

Barth Syndrome is caused by mutations in the TAZ gene, leading to mitochondrial dysfunction and disruption of cellular energy metabolism. These mutations impair tafazzin production and cardiolipin remodeling, affecting various bodily systems and resulting in the characteristic symptoms of the disorder. (Nursing Paper Example on Understanding Barth Syndrome)

Nursing Paper Example on Understanding Barth Syndrome

Signs and Symptoms

Barth Syndrome presents a spectrum of symptoms that can vary in severity and may change over time. The hallmark features of Barth Syndrome include cardiomyopathy, muscle weakness, growth delays, and neutropenia.

Cardiomyopathy, a condition characterized by weakened heart muscles, is a common manifestation of Barth Syndrome. It can lead to symptoms such as fatigue, shortness of breath, chest pain, and an irregular heartbeat. In severe cases, cardiomyopathy can result in heart failure, a life-threatening condition requiring immediate medical attention.

Muscle weakness is another prominent symptom of Barth Syndrome. Individuals may experience generalized muscle weakness, particularly affecting skeletal muscles used for movement. This can lead to difficulties with mobility, including walking and climbing stairs, as well as challenges with activities of daily living.

Growth delays are frequently observed in individuals with Barth Syndrome, manifesting as below-average height and weight for their age. These growth deficits may become apparent in infancy or early childhood and can persist into adulthood.

Neutropenia, a condition characterized by low levels of neutrophils, a type of white blood cell, is a common hematological feature of Barth Syndrome. Neutrophils play a crucial role in the immune system’s defense against infections. Therefore, individuals with neutropenia are at an increased risk of recurrent bacterial infections, particularly of the skin, respiratory tract, and mucous membranes.

In addition to these hallmark symptoms, individuals with Barth Syndrome may experience other health issues, including feeding difficulties, developmental delays, gastrointestinal problems, and exercise intolerance. The severity and combination of symptoms can vary among affected individuals, making the clinical presentation of Barth Syndrome highly variable. Early recognition and diagnosis of these signs and symptoms are crucial for initiating appropriate medical management and supportive care. (Nursing Paper Example on Understanding Barth Syndrome)

Etiology

The etiology of Barth Syndrome lies in genetic mutations affecting the TAZ gene located on the X chromosome. This gene encodes a protein called tafazzin, which plays a vital role in maintaining the integrity of mitochondrial membranes, particularly through the remodeling of cardiolipin, a phospholipid crucial for mitochondrial function.

The mutations in the TAZ gene result in dysfunctional tafazzin, leading to abnormalities in cardiolipin composition and structure within the inner mitochondrial membrane. This disruption impairs the efficiency of oxidative phosphorylation, the process by which cells generate energy in the form of adenosine triphosphate (ATP). Consequently, affected cells experience energy deficits, leading to the characteristic symptoms of Barth Syndrome.

The inheritance pattern of Barth Syndrome follows an X-linked recessive pattern. Since the TAZ gene is located on the X chromosome, the condition predominantly affects males. Females have two X chromosomes and therefore, if they inherit a mutated TAZ gene on one chromosome, the normal gene on the other chromosome may compensate, resulting in milder or asymptomatic presentation. However, some carrier females may exhibit mild symptoms due to random X-chromosome inactivation.

While most cases of Barth Syndrome are caused by mutations in the TAZ gene, there is significant genetic heterogeneity observed among affected individuals. Variations in the specific mutations and their locations within the TAZ gene can influence the severity and presentation of the disorder. Additionally, other genetic and environmental factors may modulate the clinical features of Barth Syndrome, contributing to its variable expressivity and phenotypic spectrum.

Overall, the etiology of Barth Syndrome is rooted in genetic mutations affecting mitochondrial function, particularly involving the TAZ gene and its role in cardiolipin remodeling. Understanding these underlying genetic mechanisms is essential for accurate diagnosis, genetic counseling, and potential therapeutic interventions for individuals affected by Barth Syndrome. (Nursing Paper Example on Understanding Barth Syndrome)

Nursing Paper Example on Understanding Barth Syndrome

Pathophysiology

Barth Syndrome’s pathophysiology primarily revolves around mitochondrial dysfunction resulting from mutations in the TAZ gene. Tafazzin, the protein encoded by the TAZ gene, plays a crucial role in cardiolipin remodeling within the inner mitochondrial membrane. Cardiolipin is essential for maintaining mitochondrial structure and function, particularly in oxidative phosphorylation, the process by which cells generate ATP, the energy currency of the cell.

In individuals with Barth Syndrome, mutations in the TAZ gene lead to dysfunctional tafazzin, disrupting cardiolipin remodeling. This disruption affects the stability and fluidity of the mitochondrial membrane, impairing its ability to carry out oxidative phosphorylation efficiently. As a result, affected cells experience energy deficits, leading to various clinical manifestations observed in Barth Syndrome.

Mitochondrial dysfunction in Barth Syndrome primarily affects tissues with high energy demands, such as the heart, skeletal muscles, and immune system. Cardiomyocytes, the cells responsible for heart contraction, are particularly susceptible to mitochondrial dysfunction due to their continuous need for energy to maintain cardiac function. Consequently, individuals with Barth Syndrome often develop cardiomyopathy, characterized by weakened heart muscles and impaired cardiac function.

Skeletal muscles, which rely on oxidative phosphorylation for energy during physical activity, also exhibit dysfunction in Barth Syndrome. This leads to muscle weakness and fatigue, impacting mobility and physical functioning in affected individuals.

Additionally, mitochondrial dysfunction in Barth Syndrome affects the immune system, leading to neutropenia, a condition characterized by low levels of neutrophils, a type of white blood cell crucial for fighting infections. This renders individuals more susceptible to recurrent bacterial infections, further contributing to the clinical manifestations of the disorder.

Overall, the pathophysiology of Barth Syndrome involves mitochondrial dysfunction resulting from mutations in the TAZ gene, leading to energy deficits and cellular dysfunction, particularly in tissues with high energy demands. Understanding these underlying mechanisms is crucial for developing targeted interventions to manage and potentially mitigate the impact of Barth Syndrome on affected individuals.

DMS-5 Diagnosis

Diagnosing Barth Syndrome involves a comprehensive evaluation following the criteria outlined in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition (DSM-5). The diagnostic process typically begins with a thorough medical history and physical examination to assess the presence of characteristic signs and symptoms associated with the disorder.

Genetic testing plays a crucial role in confirming the diagnosis of Barth Syndrome. Analysis of the TAZ gene for mutations is essential to identify specific genetic abnormalities associated with the condition. Identification of mutations in the TAZ gene confirms the diagnosis of Barth Syndrome, particularly in individuals presenting with characteristic clinical features.

In addition to genetic testing, clinical evaluation of symptoms is essential for diagnosing Barth Syndrome. Common manifestations such as cardiomyopathy, muscle weakness, growth delays, and neutropenia are carefully assessed to support the diagnosis. Laboratory tests may also be performed to evaluate cardiac function, muscle strength, growth parameters, and blood counts.

Diagnostic criteria outlined in the DSM-5 help clinicians establish a clear diagnosis of Barth Syndrome based on the presence of characteristic signs and symptoms, supported by genetic testing and clinical evaluation. The multidisciplinary approach involving medical history, physical examination, genetic testing, and laboratory investigations ensures accurate diagnosis and appropriate management of individuals with Barth Syndrome.

Overall, the DSM-5 criteria provide a standardized framework for diagnosing Barth Syndrome, enabling clinicians to identify affected individuals based on specific clinical features and genetic abnormalities. Early recognition and diagnosis are crucial for initiating timely interventions and providing appropriate medical care to improve outcomes for individuals with Barth Syndrome. (Nursing Paper Example on Understanding Barth Syndrome)

Treatment Regimens and Patient Education

The management of Barth Syndrome involves a multidisciplinary approach aimed at addressing the various symptoms and complications associated with the disorder. Treatment regimens focus on symptom management, supportive care, and promoting overall well-being in affected individuals. Patient education plays a crucial role in empowering patients and their families to understand the condition and actively participate in their care.

Medications: Pharmacological interventions are tailored to address specific symptoms and complications of Barth Syndrome. For individuals with cardiomyopathy, medications such as angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors and beta-blockers may be prescribed to improve cardiac function and manage heart failure symptoms. Other medications may be used to address muscle weakness, growth delays, and neutropenia as needed.

Nutritional Support: Nutritional interventions are essential for individuals with Barth Syndrome to support growth and development, optimize energy levels, and maintain overall health. A balanced diet rich in nutrients, including proteins, carbohydrates, fats, vitamins, and minerals, is recommended. In some cases, dietary supplements or specialized formulas may be prescribed to address specific nutritional deficiencies or challenges.

Physical Therapy: Physical therapy plays a vital role in managing muscle weakness and promoting mobility and functional independence in individuals with Barth Syndrome. Tailored exercise programs, stretching exercises, and muscle-strengthening activities help improve muscle tone, flexibility, and overall physical function. Physical therapists also guide adaptive equipment and assistive devices to enhance mobility and facilitate activities of daily living.

Patient Education: Patient education is essential for individuals with Barth Syndrome and their families to understand the nature of the disorder, its potential complications, and the importance of adherence to treatment regimens. Education sessions provide information on symptom management, medication administration, dietary recommendations, and strategies to optimize overall health and well-being. Patients and families are encouraged to actively participate in treatment decisions, communicate openly with healthcare providers, and seek support from patient advocacy groups and support networks.

Regular Monitoring: Regular follow-up visits with healthcare providers are crucial for monitoring disease progression, assessing treatment efficacy, and addressing any emerging issues or complications. Monitoring may include cardiac evaluations, growth assessments, nutritional status evaluations, blood count monitoring, and other relevant tests as needed.

Overall, a comprehensive treatment approach, coupled with patient education and support, is essential for optimizing outcomes and enhancing the quality of life for individuals living with Barth Syndrome. By addressing symptoms, promoting healthy lifestyle habits, and fostering patient empowerment, healthcare providers can help individuals with Barth Syndrome thrive despite the challenges posed by this complex disorder. (Nursing Paper Example on Understanding Barth Syndrome)

Conclusion

Barth Syndrome is a rare genetic disorder characterized by mutations in the TAZ gene, leading to mitochondrial dysfunction and a range of debilitating symptoms. The causes, signs, and symptoms of Barth Syndrome, along with its etiology and pathophysiology, highlight the complexity of this condition. Accurate diagnosis according to DSM-5 criteria is crucial for appropriate management. Treatment regimens focus on symptom management, supportive care, and patient education. Patient education plays a pivotal role in empowering individuals and their families to understand the condition and actively participate in their care. By addressing symptoms, promoting healthy lifestyle habits, and fostering patient empowerment, healthcare providers can enhance the quality of life for individuals living with Barth Syndrome. Ongoing research offers hope for improved understanding and management of this complex disorder, paving the way for better outcomes in the future. (Nursing Paper Example on Understanding Barth Syndrome)

References

https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK247162/

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Nursing Paper Example on Alpers Disease: Understanding a Rare Neurological Disorder

Nursing Paper Example on Alpers Disease: Understanding a Rare Neurological Disorder

Alpers Disease, also recognized as Alpers-Huttenlocher syndrome, is an uncommon neurological disorder that profoundly impacts infants and young children, often presenting within the initial years of life. This condition, characterized by a trio of symptoms encompassing seizures, liver dysfunction, and progressive neurological degeneration, was first delineated by Bernard Jacob Alpers in 1931. Despite its rarity, Alpers Disease poses significant challenges to affected individuals and their families due to its severe and debilitating nature. Understanding the underlying causes, clinical manifestations, and management strategies for Alpers Disease is crucial for healthcare professionals and caregivers alike. In this paper, we will delve into the causes, signs and symptoms, etiology, pathophysiology, DMS-5 diagnosis criteria, treatment regimens and patient education, and conclude by highlighting the importance of comprehensive care for individuals grappling with this challenging condition. (Nursing Paper Example on Alpers Disease: Understanding a Rare Neurological Disorder)

Nursing Paper Example on Alpers Disease: Understanding a Rare Neurological Disorder

Causes

The exact cause of Alpers Disease remains enigmatic, yet it is predominantly attributed to genetic mutations affecting mitochondrial DNA (mtDNA). Mitochondria, revered as the powerhouse of the cell, play a pivotal role in energy production. The mutations implicated in Alpers Disease primarily target genes responsible for mitochondrial function, particularly those crucial for DNA replication and maintenance within mitochondria.

These genetic mutations engender mitochondrial dysfunction, thereby impeding energy metabolism, particularly in tissues with elevated energy requisites like the brain and liver. Consequently, affected individuals endure a cascade of physiological disturbances, culminating in the characteristic triad of symptoms associated with Alpers Disease.

Mitochondrial DNA mutations are typically inherited in an autosomal recessive pattern, signifying that both parents must carry a mutated gene for their offspring to manifest the disease. Occasionally, Alpers Disease can also result from spontaneous mutations occurring in the mtDNA during embryonic development.

It is essential to recognize that while genetic mutations serve as the primary precipitant for Alpers Disease, environmental factors, and additional genetic modifiers may influence the severity and clinical presentation of the disorder. Furthermore, the variable penetrance and expressivity of mitochondrial DNA mutations contribute to the heterogeneous nature of Alpers Disease, wherein affected individuals may exhibit a spectrum of symptoms ranging from mild to severe.

Given the intricate interplay between genetic predisposition and environmental factors in the pathogenesis of Alpers Disease, further research endeavors are imperative to elucidate the precise mechanisms underlying this debilitating disorder. Such insights hold the potential to inform the development of novel therapeutic interventions aimed at ameliorating the clinical course and enhancing the quality of life for individuals grappling with Alpers Disease. (Nursing Paper Example on Alpers Disease: Understanding a Rare Neurological Disorder)

Signs and Symptoms

Alpers Disease presents a constellation of symptoms that progressively worsen over time, severely impairing affected individuals’ quality of life. The clinical manifestations of this disorder are diverse, encompassing neurological, hepatic, and systemic abnormalities.

Nursing Paper Example on Alpers Disease: Understanding a Rare Neurological Disorder

Neurological Symptoms: Seizures represent a hallmark feature of Alpers Disease and often serve as the initial presenting symptom. These seizures typically commence in infancy or early childhood and tend to be refractory to conventional antiepileptic medications. As the disease progresses, affected individuals may experience various types of seizures, including focal, generalized, or myoclonic seizures.

Developmental Regression: Progressive developmental regression is a prominent feature of Alpers Disease, characterized by a loss of previously acquired developmental milestones. Affected individuals may exhibit a decline in motor skills, speech, and cognitive abilities, ultimately leading to profound intellectual disability.

Neurological Decline: Over time, individuals with Alpers Disease experience a relentless deterioration of neurological function, marked by a decline in motor coordination, muscle weakness, and spasticity. The progressive neurodegeneration may also manifest as movement disorders, including dystonia and ataxia.

Hepatic Dysfunction: Liver involvement is another cardinal feature of Alpers Disease, presenting as hepatomegaly, jaundice, and signs of hepatic failure. Liver dysfunction may manifest early in infancy or later in the disease course and can significantly impact overall prognosis.

Systemic Symptoms: In addition to neurological and hepatic manifestations, individuals with Alpers Disease may exhibit systemic symptoms, including failure to thrive, feeding difficulties, and metabolic disturbances.

Ophthalmological Abnormalities: Ophthalmological abnormalities, such as optic atrophy and retinitis pigmentosa, have also been reported in some individuals with Alpers Disease, further contributing to the multisystemic nature of the disorder.

The progressive nature and multisystemic involvement of Alpers Disease underscore the complex pathophysiology underlying this devastating disorder, necessitating a multidisciplinary approach to management and care. (Nursing Paper Example on Alpers Disease: Understanding a Rare Neurological Disorder)

Etiology

Alpers Disease is primarily rooted in genetic aberrations that disrupt mitochondrial function, leading to the characteristic clinical features observed in affected individuals. The genetic etiology of Alpers Disease predominantly revolves around mutations in genes encoding proteins essential for mitochondrial DNA (mtDNA) replication and maintenance.

Mitochondria play a pivotal role in cellular energy production through oxidative phosphorylation, a process that generates adenosine triphosphate (ATP). Mutations in genes encoding components of the mitochondrial DNA polymerase gamma (POLG) enzyme complex, such as the POLG gene itself, have been identified as major contributors to Alpers Disease. POLG is crucial for mtDNA replication and repair, and mutations in this gene impair mitochondrial DNA synthesis, leading to mitochondrial dysfunction.

Furthermore, mutations in other genes involved in mitochondrial DNA replication and maintenance, including TWNK (Twinkle) and DGUOK (Deoxyguanosine Kinase), have also been implicated in the pathogenesis of Alpers Disease. These genetic mutations disrupt mitochondrial DNA replication and repair processes, culminating in mitochondrial dysfunction and cellular energy depletion.

The inheritance pattern of Alpers Disease is typically autosomal recessive, necessitating the presence of mutations in both alleles of the causative gene for disease manifestation. However, in some cases, Alpers Disease can result from de novo mutations occurring sporadically during embryonic development.

Although the genetic etiology of Alpers Disease predominantly involves mutations in nuclear genes encoding mitochondrial proteins, mitochondrial DNA mutations can also contribute to disease pathogenesis. Mitochondrial DNA mutations can arise spontaneously or be maternally inherited and can further exacerbate mitochondrial dysfunction, amplifying the severity of clinical manifestations in affected individuals.

Understanding the underlying genetic basis of Alpers Disease is critical for accurate diagnosis, genetic counseling, and potential targeted therapeutic interventions aimed at mitigating the devastating consequences of this debilitating disorder. (Nursing Paper Example on Alpers Disease: Understanding a Rare Neurological Disorder)

Pathophysiology

The pathophysiology of Alpers Disease revolves around mitochondrial dysfunction, which disrupts cellular energy metabolism and leads to widespread neuronal and hepatic damage. Mitochondria, organelles responsible for generating cellular energy in the form of adenosine triphosphate (ATP), play a central role in the pathogenesis of this disorder.

Mutations in genes encoding proteins involved in mitochondrial DNA (mtDNA) replication and maintenance, such as POLG, TWNK, and DGUOK, impair mitochondrial DNA synthesis and repair processes. Consequently, mitochondrial dysfunction ensues, characterized by reduced ATP production and increased production of reactive oxygen species (ROS).

The impaired energy metabolism resulting from mitochondrial dysfunction particularly affects tissues with high energy demands, such as the brain and liver. Neurons are highly susceptible to mitochondrial dysfunction due to their reliance on ATP for synaptic transmission and neuronal signaling. The progressive neuronal degeneration observed in Alpers Disease is attributed to energy depletion, oxidative stress, and impaired mitochondrial function, leading to neuronal cell death.

Hepatic dysfunction in Alpers Disease stems from mitochondrial impairment and the resultant disruption of liver metabolism. Mitochondria play a crucial role in hepatic energy metabolism, and their dysfunction leads to hepatocyte injury, hepatomegaly, and liver failure.

The accumulation of reactive oxygen species (ROS) resulting from mitochondrial dysfunction exacerbates cellular damage, leading to oxidative stress and further amplifying tissue injury. Additionally, impaired mitochondrial function disrupts calcium homeostasis and alters cellular signaling pathways, contributing to the pathogenesis of Alpers Disease.

Overall, the pathophysiology of Alpers Disease is characterized by mitochondrial dysfunction, energy depletion, oxidative stress, and widespread cellular damage, particularly affecting the brain and liver. Understanding these underlying pathogenic mechanisms is crucial for developing targeted therapeutic interventions aimed at ameliorating mitochondrial dysfunction and mitigating the devastating consequences of this debilitating disorder. (Nursing Paper Example on Alpers Disease: Understanding a Rare Neurological Disorder)

DMS-5 Diagnosis

Diagnosing Alpers Disease typically involves a comprehensive clinical evaluation, neuroimaging studies, and genetic testing to ascertain the presence of characteristic symptoms and identify underlying genetic mutations. The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition (DSM-5), does not delineate specific diagnostic criteria for Alpers Disease but provides guidelines for assessing the clinical presentation and determining the appropriate diagnostic approach.

The DSM-5 criteria for epilepsy, a common feature of Alpers Disease, encompass recurrent, unprovoked seizures, which align with the clinical manifestation of seizures observed in affected individuals. Additionally, developmental regression, cognitive decline, and neurological abnormalities evident in Alpers Disease may fulfill the criteria for intellectual disability or other neurodevelopmental disorders outlined in the DSM-5.

Neuroimaging studies, particularly magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), play a crucial role in the diagnostic workup of Alpers Disease. MRI findings may reveal characteristic abnormalities, including cerebral atrophy, white matter changes, and signal abnormalities in the basal ganglia, which are consistent with the neurodegenerative nature of the disorder.

Genetic testing is paramount for confirming the diagnosis of Alpers Disease, as it enables the identification of mutations in genes associated with mitochondrial dysfunction, such as POLG, TWNK, and DGUOK. Targeted sequencing or whole-exome sequencing techniques are utilized to detect pathogenic variants in these genes, providing definitive confirmation of the diagnosis.

The diagnostic evaluation of Alpers Disease necessitates a multidisciplinary approach involving neurologists, geneticists, and other healthcare professionals. By integrating clinical assessment, neuroimaging studies, and genetic testing, healthcare providers can establish an accurate diagnosis and initiate appropriate management strategies tailored to the individual needs of patients with Alpers Disease. (Nursing Paper Example on Alpers Disease: Understanding a Rare Neurological Disorder)

Treatment Regimens and Patient Education

As of now, there is no cure for Alpers Disease, and treatment primarily focuses on managing symptoms and providing supportive care to improve the quality of life for affected individuals. Given the complex nature of this disorder, treatment regimens typically entail a multidisciplinary approach involving neurologists, hepatologists, geneticists, and other healthcare professionals.

Symptom Management: Antiepileptic drugs (AEDs) are commonly prescribed to manage seizures in individuals with Alpers Disease. However, seizures associated with this disorder are often refractory to conventional AEDs, necessitating a tailored approach to medication management. Adjunctive therapies, such as ketogenic diet therapy or other dietary interventions, may be considered in some cases to help control seizures.

Supportive Care: Supportive care plays a pivotal role in managing the diverse array of symptoms associated with Alpers Disease. Physical and occupational therapies are integral components of supportive care, aiming to optimize motor function, enhance mobility, and improve the overall quality of life for affected individuals. Speech therapy may also be beneficial in addressing communication difficulties and speech impairments.

Nutritional Support: Given the hepatic involvement observed in Alpers Disease, ensuring adequate nutritional support is essential to support overall health and well-being. Nutritional interventions may include specialized formulas, dietary modifications, or gastrostomy tube placement to facilitate adequate nutrient intake, particularly in individuals with feeding difficulties or failure to thrive.

Liver Transplantation: In cases of severe liver dysfunction or liver failure secondary to Alpers Disease, liver transplantation may be considered as a therapeutic option. Liver transplantation can provide a life-saving intervention by replacing the diseased liver with a healthy donor organ, thereby improving the overall prognosis and quality of life for affected individuals.

Patient Education: Patient education is integral to the management of Alpers Disease, as it empowers patients and their families to understand the nature of the disorder and actively participate in treatment decisions. Educating patients and caregivers about the signs and symptoms of Alpers Disease, available treatment options, and strategies for symptom management can help alleviate anxiety and improve coping mechanisms.

Additionally, providing information about available support services, such as patient advocacy groups and community resources, can facilitate access to additional support and assistance for affected individuals and their families. By fostering open communication and providing comprehensive education, healthcare providers can empower patients and caregivers to navigate the challenges associated with Alpers Disease effectively.

While there is currently no cure for Alpers Disease, a multidisciplinary approach to treatment focusing on symptom management, supportive care, and patient education can significantly improve the quality of life for affected individuals and their families. By addressing the diverse array of symptoms and providing comprehensive support, healthcare providers can optimize outcomes and enhance the overall well-being of individuals grappling with this rare and debilitating disorder. (Nursing Paper Example on Alpers Disease: Understanding a Rare Neurological Disorder)

Conclusion

Alpers Disease presents a significant challenge due to its rare occurrence and severe clinical manifestations affecting infants and young children. Through an exploration of its causes, signs and symptoms, etiology, pathophysiology, DSM-5 diagnosis, treatment regimens, and patient education, we have gained a deeper understanding of this debilitating disorder. While the exact cause remains elusive, genetic mutations disrupting mitochondrial function play a central role in its pathogenesis. Symptom management, supportive care, and patient education are paramount in addressing the diverse array of symptoms and optimizing outcomes for affected individuals and their families. Despite the absence of a cure, a multidisciplinary approach to treatment, including antiepileptic drugs, supportive therapies, and nutritional support, can significantly enhance the quality of life for those grappling with Alpers Disease. By fostering open communication and providing comprehensive education, healthcare providers can empower patients and caregivers to navigate the challenges associated with this rare and devastating disorder effectively. (Nursing Paper Example on Alpers Disease: Understanding a Rare Neurological Disorder)

References

https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK540966/

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!